How to Start an Online Store: Step-by-Step Guide to Success

1. Introduction: Hello and welcome to my course. So let me ask you a couple of questions. So do you want to learn how to create your online store? Of course the answer is obvious, of course you do. But do you want to learn how to make your online store without having to invest a lot of money. And of course, without knowing how to code, basically we're going to create our online store in a easy way. So in this course, are actually created a real eCommerce store. Basically, what I didn't discourse, recreated my online store that I created a month before I started recording this course. And this online store that accurate it is already making sales, is getting organic sales. So that means I don't need it to spend any money to get those sales. And that's exactly what I'm going to teach you in this course. In this course, I'm going to teach you step-by-step method, how you can create your online store that's gonna be professional-looking, fast loading is going to load well on any device that's very important for good user experience that can impact your conversion rate. This course, I'm going to share with you my blueprint that are used to create my online stores. And I used to use the same blueprint to create online stores for my customers. So once you're gonna complete this course, you're gonna have enough skills and knowledge to create a website and online store. Not just for yourself, but if it's something you are interested in, maybe you will decide that you want to work as a freelancer. So that's another great benefit of this course because, but the same blueprint, you will be able to create online stores, not just for yourself, but maybe for your future clients. In this course, you're going to have two methods, how to create your store. So in the first method, we're going to use free tools, so it's gonna be cheaper. You could call this method and money savers method. And in the second option we're going to have a premium option. So in this premium option, you're going to create your website using premium tools and it's going to cost you just $70 extra. It's not much, but results are gonna be shocking compared to the free option. But just to let you know, in this course you're going to have two options. So depending on your budget, you will be able to choose the option you want to use. And of course, you can start with a free option and then you can upgrade to a premium option that's easily doable and no worries about that. So having a professional-looking online store is extremely important. That's why in this course I will show you the tactics, the tricks that you can follow to make your online store professional. Usually less is better and usually less looks much better. So in this course, I'm going to show you how that works. You will learn yourself and I can bet you that you will be surprised. The final results, you won't even believe that this is possible and you are doing this yourself. So that's gonna be a very interesting part where I'm going to show you how to choose colors, how to manage those colors, how to work with different styles, how to choose the right fonts and so on. So this is gonna be a very interesting part in the course. We are we going to take care of the design part of our website. I will also show you how we can easily create a business email address with your domain name and it's going to be completely free. Other people tend to spend a lot of money, hundreds of dollars per year, just to have their email inbox with their domain name. And I will show you how you can do this for free. So that's another great way to save some extra money in this course, I'm not just focusing on showing you how to create your online store because creating a website, not just online store, any type of website is just the first step. And the second step that is the most important. You gotta know how to attract visitors, how to attract customers, and the best way, the best way hands down is SEO, getting those visits from search engines like Google, bing.com or any other, and you will get three sales. So what can be better than getting free sales from random visitors? And if you got to make three sales from Google or any other search engine, that means your online store is good and ready to run paid ads. So in this course, I have a full section where I'll show you how to do SEO. That is Search Engine Optimization. This section is about 2 h long, so you could say that it's completely separate course. So you're going to learn how to do keyword research, how to optimize your products, how to track results, how to understand the data, how to understand the traffic that is coming to your website. And all those things that are important if you want to have a successful online store. So in this course, I have a huge portion dedicated for teaching you how to get those free visitors, how to get those first customers. So that's very important. I'm not just showing you how to create your website. I'm also showing you how to get customers. And of course, for everyone who's looking to create an online store, not in English and anguish or not for the global audience. But maybe you will want to create an online store in your language for your audience. And that audience is not English-speaking audience. So at the end of this course, I have a separate section where I'm going to show you how you can fully translate your website into any language you want. So basically you will be able to create your online store in any language you want. So no matter what your goal is, maybe you want to create an online store in English language for English-speaking audience, for global audience. Or maybe you want to create your online store for your native audience, no matter your goal in this course, I have covered everything. I made this course for everyone who wants to learn how to start their online store. So maybe you are planning to start your business. Maybe you are planning to start selling something online. Maybe you're crafts, maybe you are planning to find suppliers and sell products online. If you add that person, discourse is absolutely for you. Maybe you have a physical store and now you are looking for adding another sales channel to your portfolio. Creating an online store is probably one of the best options you can choose. And if that's the case, discourse is also perfect fit for you. And maybe you are person who's already selling products on Etsy, eBay or any other platform. And trust me, I completely understand how sometimes it can be frustrating selling products on these platforms. They have various different rules. If you do not obey those rules, they might block you. They usually take a huge cut of your sales. So having your own online store, having your own sales channel is a huge benefit. So if you think that you would benefit greatly from having your online store, trust me, this course is exactly for you because having your own sales channel is a huge benefit compared to belonging to a sales platform like Etsy or eBay or anything like that. You're going to have everything in your power marketing aspect, products aspect, because sometimes those platforms, they do not let you sell some products, but when you're going to have your own sales channel, trust me, you're not going to have any issues like that. So no matter what is your situation, as long as you want to start your online store, eCommerce website. This course is for you. It took me around ten years to learn everything I know and I decided to put everything into discourse. I learn everything while running my eCommerce stores, building eCommerce stores for others. And I decided to put everything into one course and share it with you. So if you think this course is the right fit for you, then please join me and let's start building your online store. 2. About Teaching Style: Alright, so before we jump into grading your website, before we jump into building your online store, I believe you might want to know a bit about me, at least about my teaching style. So all online Jordan in online marketing and various ways of making mine online started when I was 15-years-old, but I never had any success because I didn't know how to create a website and it lasted until I was 19 years old. So this is where I learn how to use WordPress, how to create websites using WordPress. And this is where my interests started integrating websites using WordPress. And that's exactly what we're going to use in this course. We're going to use WordPress. And we're going to use WordPress for the reason because it's the most popular content management system around our 50 per cent of websites run using this content management system. So if you decided that you want to use WordPress, then you made a good decision. So once a learn how to use WordPress, how to build websites using this content management system, a lot of doors open up for me. Now I could create websites if I decided I wanted to start a blog or could do this right away without needing to rely on other people. So this is where I started learning about the whole creation process. How the website has to Look, what types of websites there are and how to market those websites. So it took me if some time and a lot of failure until I started seeing some results. But my websites. And now looking back after many years, I know but I made those mistakes. I know what was too confusing for me. Now. I know what works and what doesn't work. It took me around ten years to learn everything and now, and I don't want you to waste this much time. So that's why in this course are focused to put in all my knowledge. So you wouldn't need to spend ten years learning everything yourself. So that's how I look at this course. My goal is to teach you as much as possible in the short period of time. So going away, you could say this is my teaching style. I share as much knowledge as I can. I do not waste your time. I usually like to explain things in a simple way and an easy way to understand things. Because I believe it's much more efficient and you're going to learn much better. So I'm not going to waste your time. And of course I'm going to present information as simple and easy way to understand. While I was working for a web hosting company a while back ago, I spent quite a lot of time trying to understand new customers, trying to understand new users, new WordPress users in general, all the new people who are trying to create their websites using WordPress. And I tried to figure out what the main pinpoint size. So I kinda know, I kinda know what is difficult and what is not so difficult or not so confusing. So in this course, that's exactly where our focus, our focus on the confusing things and hard to understand things a bit more. And if there's gonna be things that are easier to understand, of course I'm not going to waste your time. So that's how I usually make my courses. I don't like to waste your time and understand time is money, time is important. So in this course, I'm going to present you all the information and simple and easy way to understand and I'm not going to waste your time. So if you want to learn how to start your online store the right way and you want to have professional online store. Please join my course. I myself. I'm running three eCommerce stores, and I've been running them for quite awhile now. So I kinda know how they work, how you can attract customers, and of course, how you can build those online stores as well. And in the past there used to build online stores for the customers. So I kinda have experienced, I believe I don't want to brag too much about that, but I will teach you my blueprint, how I build my online stores for myself and how I used to build those online stores for my customers. So if you think this course is the right fit for you, then please join it. 3. (1.0) Choosing Your Domain Name: In this lesson, vegan, a focus on domain name. So in this lesson you're going to learn what those things out, where to get them. And I will share with you some tips when choosing your domain name. Alright, so what is a domain name? Domain name is simply the name or the title of your website that you type in your browser to access your website or any other websites. For example, it could be facebook.com, google.com, basketball news.net or another. You probably get it what it is. And let's talk about the structure of a domain name. So at first you're going to have the title. So for example, it could be Facebook. And then after Facebook goes the extension or the ending of your domain name. In Facebook's case, it is.com. And there are plenty of various different extensions available. So the most popular is obviously.com. The second one popular is dotnet.code.uk and all other. There are plenty of various different extensions available. And in later slide we're going to talk about the extensions itself. Alright, so where are you can get a domain name? I usually like to use godaddy.com because it is the most popular place to get your domain name day have quite a lot of different extensions available. And they are quite cheap, usually to get a domain name for a year. And I'm talking about the domain name, but an extension.com, it will cost you around $10 per year. If you're going to choose a package of three years, it's gonna be cheaper and it's not gonna be cheaper than $10, but it's going to be cheaper around $20 for three years. So it's worth to buy domain names for a longer period of time because it's gonna be cheaper. And if I'm choosing a domain name for, let's say not a global audience, but for some type of local audience, the other speaking language audience, Let's say for Polish people, I might look for other options and that's exactly what we're going to talk about right now. When you are choosing your domain name and you know that your project, your website is going to target global audience. Or if it's going to target English-speaking audience, then your best choice is always.com if that domain name is not available and it is already registered than the second best option is dotnet. And usually those two options at the best. But of course these are not strict rules to choose only from.com or.net. You can choose any other extension. If you think it's going to work for eCommerce stores, you can absolutely choose that star, that sharp, or anything similar. I personally use that path for one eCommerce store, that is cat toys store, and it works very well. And we have a second group of domain names. For example, if you are building a website and not for English-speaking audience and your reps, it is not going to target a global audience than your best choices to choose a country code domain name. For example, if you are building a website that is going to target Polish people and it's going to be in Polish than your best choice would be to choose the main aim extension, or in other words, the ending dot PL. If you are doing the same for, let's say Latvians, than your best option would be dot LV. If you're doing this same for lithuanian audience than your best option is that LT. This is how it works. If you are building a website for global audience, then your best choices always.com. And the same goes for the English-speaking audiences. And if you are building a website that is going to target a particular country, particular language, then you should choose Country Code extension. Alright, so let's talk about the Tips men choosing a domain name. So obviously you want to make your domain name simple and easy to remember. It's obviously because when people are going to visit your website and the next time they going to want to visit your website another time or they're going to want to let their friends know about your website. Ed's going to be much easier for them to remember your domain name. And the day not going to be over complicated with the name of Your Domain. And the next step tried to keep it under 15 characters. I guess this tip goes with the first step because F your domain name isn't going to be very long, it's going to be short, of course is gonna be easier to remember. Alright, let's move on. And the third tip would be avoid hyphens in between the words. So when you are building a website, when you are choosing a domain name, you might want to try out or to use a domain name that is out of two words. For example, site visitor.com. And a lot of cases when people cannot find a certain domain available, they tried to use hyphens in between the words. So it looks like site dash wizard.com. It's kinda complicated because people can mistake in your domain name with someone else's domain name. So for example, with site visit or anything like that. So be careful with hyphens in between the words. If a particular domain name is not available, then you might want to try another extension. So for example, if.com is not available, maybe look for dotnet. Maybe this one is available. If it's not available may be good option would be to try out that store if you are building an eCommerce store or anything similar? These are some of the tips you can follow. Of course, these are not rules, these are just recommendations. Those steps is going to help to choose and easy to remember and the simple domain name, which is going to help you a lot. And if you can make this happen, of course it is the best to make your domain name catchy. It's gonna be much easier to remember. And like I said, if it's going to be much easier to remember, you're going to do yourself a favor because you gotta consider that your website, your domain name is gonna be basically a brand and you're going to have your social media profiles. So we want to look interesting, you want to look at different, and this would be a tip for you. Of course, understand that Choosing the right domain name, it can take some time. Maybe you already have some ideas and quiet soon we're going to check out if those ideas or domains are available is. So if you feel like you need some time to think of a good sounding domain name, just take your time, take a day or two or anything like that, and then come back to the scores and you can continue building your website. I totally understand from personal experience how frustrating it can be to get yourself a good domain name. Because if you are building a website for a global audience, it's quite difficult to find the main aim that is free, that is not already registered and it can take awhile, so no worries about that. And let's say if you are building a website for your native audience, not for the global audience or English-speaking audience, then go dad, might not be the best choice. You can basically use Google, just type the extension of your country code domain. Let's say if you're looking for domains but an extension that LTE just typing a search.lt domain names for sale. And definitely you will find the Country Code extension that you are looking for. But in this case, we are going to use GoDaddy and just to show you how it works. So let's go to godaddy.com and let's try to look for domain name that we could register. Alright, so I am at godaddy.com and as you can see, just entered the domain name, which I would like to register. So just do it yourself right here. Like I mentioned you before, I'm going global and that will use the extension.com, which is the most popular ones. So once you have typed in your domain name, just click right here, Search. And this is what we get. As you can see, there's the main aim is already taken, but to be honest, already registered this domain name and the past. So this domain name belongs to me, and we're going to use this domain name to create our website. Later on, I will show you how to connect your domain name to your web hosting. Alright, now I just wanted to show you the whole process of looking for a domain name. Like I mentioned you before, as you can see right here, we have various different domain names with various different extensions. We have Comtech go store side. So as you can see, there are plenty of different extensions available. And it's completely up to you what extension you want to use. But like I mentioned you previously, if you are going to go global, then your best option is always.com. The second best option is always dotnet. But if those options are not available, you can experiment with other types of extensions. They're going to work as well. Like I mentioned you before, I even have a domain name. That is what an extension dot bet. And it will just wonder, I know vicious with that. Alright, so once you have typed your domain and once you have found your domain name, you would like to register, just click Add to Cart and finished the checkout. And once you have done this, you're going to actually find all your domain name server side here. If you would go to my products, then as you can see, these are all domain names have, and later on we're going to use this domain name to create our website. Alright, so that's all for this lesson. Now, you know what our domain names and where to get them? 4. (1.1) Setting Up Your Web Hosting: So assume you already got yourself a domain name, but if you haven't gotten yourself a domain name yet, you can still follow this lesson. In this lesson, I will show you how to set up your web hosting. And I will share with you a special discount that our God for myself, that will give you a 20 per cent off for the first three months. And as you can see, but this web hosting, you're gonna get free day trial without even needing to add any credit cards or anything like that. And let's go right here. Let's click Start free. And as you can see right here, you'll have to fill up your information and here, just type a coupon code. And this is the coupon code you want to type right here and just fill up your information and click Start free. And I will tell you why I use this web hosting myself. And as I like to say, only recommend tools that are used myself. And the reason why I'm using this web hosting is because in the past I have tried various different providers. I even tried to go down, but I was eventually disappointed because at the end of day, my eCommerce store lost at least a couple of hundred customers because it was quite lagging. It wasn't loading quiet good. It was quite disappointing, and the price was almost identical to this web hosting. This web hosting is going to cost you $10 per month. It is pay-as-you-go plan. You can stop using this web hosting anytime you want. There's no upfront fees. Just like with majority of web hosting companies, what they claimed that it's gonna cost you $3 per month. But at the end of today you got to purchase at least two years, plan to get this good deal. So just add your information and set up your account. And I will show you how to set up your server, how to install WordPress and do all the other unnecessary steps. Alright, so I just logged into my account and as you can see, this is how it looks. I have three projects running on Cloud ways. So as you can see, I started in 2018 and I've been running those products for quite awhile. This particular server cost me $70 per month. So I even upscale some projects using this. We have always think you might not see the same as I see Ryan here, because you are fresh client and you have to click right here Add server. So right now we're going to create a new server where we're going to install WordPress. And basically this is where we're going to set up our website. Alright, so let's choose an application, let's choose WordPress, and right here, just give a name for your applications. So basically your application is going to be your website. So I'm just going to type right here, my website.com and the name of your server is going to be basically just the name of your server. You can call it anywhere you want, but I usually like to call it the same as my app, but except I don't use extension at the end of my title right here, you'll have to create your projects since I've been using this web hosting for quite awhile, yes, you can see I have some projects created, but in your case, you will need to create a new project. You will see it here, an option to create a new project. Alright, now let's choose servers size. Let's start with 1 gb of ramps. It's going to be more than enough. And now they are saying you that there are some recommendations, but don't bother yourself with those recommendations. A, because your website is going to be new and you will not need so many resources just because they are recommending you this, it doesn't mean that you have to get more expensive plan, alright? So it's going to be more than enough, alright? Now you have to choose your server location. So like I mentioned you previously, when I was talking about domain names, if you are building a website for global audience, most likely you want to choose a server location that is located in United States of America. Because most likely most of your users, most of your visitors will be from United States of America. I usually like to use New York when I'm building a website for a global audience. But San Francisco should work as well. But if you are building a website just for the people who are in the US and you're planning to target a certain state or anything similar, then you should choose a server location that is closer to your potential visitors. If you are building a website that is located in Europe, for example, in my case, not so long ago are building a website that is located in Lithuania that is targeting Lithuanian audience. And as you can see right here, we don't have any servers that are located in Lithuania. So at chose the closest server, that is Frankfurt, and this server is in Germany and it works just fine. My website loads lightening fast and there are no issues. So let's say if you're building a website for people who are in the UK, then you might want to choose lambda, and the same goes for other Europe countries. You can choose any other server that is closest to your country, or maybe you are building a website for other regions, then of course you want to choose a server that is closer to your potential visitors. If you're going to choose the server that is far, far away from your potential visitors, you will have a slight delay. It's not a big thing, but of course, it's the best to do things the right way. And if you are building a website for a global audience like a set, you might want to consider servers that allocated in the United States of America. And if you are building a website for your native audience, than just look for a server that is closest to your audience. Simple as that. In my case, I think I will go with a global audience and I'm just going to choose New York. So just like that. And let's click Launch now. Alright, so just wait a few minutes until the server setup is complete. It shouldn't take very long. Alright, the syllabus complete and we're basically done with this lesson. The next lesson, I will give you a walk-through of the panel of this web hosting. You will familiarize yourself a bit more. And basically we have finished with the first steps and starring our website 5. (1.2) Web Hosting Dashboard Walkthrough: In this lesson, I will give you a quick walk-through of our web hosting panel. So once you have graded your server, you should see your server right here, just like that, except as you can see, I have some more servers, but you should focus on your newly created servers. So let's click right here. Alright, so now we are on the first level of our web hosting panel. This is where we're gonna do various adjustments. Let's say this is where you're going to find the various settings you related to your server. So this is the first level of Your Web Hosting panel. Right here is you can see we have mastered credentials. With his credentials, we can access FTP account to check all the files we have on our server. And actually we're not going to use those credentials, but you can use them if you want. And by using those credentials so you can access all the files you have on this server. So those files belong to your websites or just a website that you are creating right now, using this server, you can actually host multiple websites, not just one, but more than one. And you will find the list of those websites right here. So as you can see, websites that we are Hosting right here are called applications. So that's how they are called. If you would have more websites hosted on this server, here you will see more applications. Alright, let's go back to the first level of our web hosting. And the second tab right here is monitoring. So right here you can see how many resources your website is using on your server. Because on your server, you have a limited amount of resources. So as you remember, we chose a server. Dad had 1 gb of ramps, and this is the CPU usage. As you can see, it's not at use at all. It's showing us that it's 0% in US. And as you can see right here, this is our disk space. That's how much space we have on our server. So basically your website, it consists out of files like media files, images, Codes, and so on. And those files are uploaded on your server. So those files take some space right here if you go to Details, and this is where you can see how much of your CPU is in use. I kinda understand that these things might sound complicated, but don't worry about that at all. Because right here you just have to check how much of CPU your website is using. Right here, we have some recommendations. So if your CPU usage is below ten or 20 per cent, That's an indication that your server isn't powerful enough. And you might need to upgrade your server to more powerful server that has more resources. But when you are starting with your website, your website is fresh and your website isn't getting a lot of visitors. There's not gonna be any issues with CPU usage. The more visitors come to your website, the more they interact with your website, the more CPU will be at USU. So simple as that, if you are website is fresh, do not focus around here too much as the time goes by. Once your website star is growing and growing, and once you see that your CPU isn't powerful enough to handle this traffic that is coming to your website. You might want to upgrade your web hosting right here in New Relic. You actually don't need to focus right here, right here, you can check your server usage, the CPU, and everything a bit more in depth. You can see how much of CPU separate plugins are using on your WordPress website. So this section is not very important to be honest. In the past, they used to track all those things right here, but eventually, I realized that it's not worth it because it's time-consuming and there's not a lot of things to focus on. But if you are planning to go above and beyond, dive deeper into all management settings and so on. Maybe this is going to be useful for you in the future. Right here we have tab to manage services. So right here we don't need to change anything. Everything is good as it is by default. So let's not focus here too much. Alright, let's go to settings and packages. Right here we have various adjustments that we can do to our PHP. But again, everything is good as it is by default right here. And we don't really need to do any adjustments, like going to other tabs like Optimization. We don't really need to change anything because we are starting fresh and everything is good as it is by default, we would go to Security tab. As you can see, you can whitelist and block IP addresses in the future once your website becomes bigger and bigger and there are more and more visitors to your website. You might see that there are some spammy comments coming to your website. And this might be a good idea to add IP addresses of these commentators right here, so they would be blocked. But there's a huge chance that you're not going to get those spammy comments. I remember I started getting spam on my website after two or three years. So that's not a huge issue. You can just delete those comments. But yeah, this is where you can whitelist stapes and blacklist IP addresses. Alright, if you would go to vertical scaling, this is where you can upgrade your server. So just like I mentioned you previously, if you would go to Monitoring tab right here, and if we would go to details, as you can see If your server usage is always below ten or 20 per cent, then this is where you want to scale your server. So if you would choose more powerful plan, you will have more resources. And just like that, just select better plan and click Scale now, right now, our plan is the cheapest one. Hit works just fine. I've been running various different WordPress websites using this cheapest plan and I was getting quite a lot of visitors to my websites, even eCommerce stores, and everything works just fine. So you can start with the lowest server and you have any issues, alright, if we would go right here, backups, you can obviously take backups of your server. So just in case you're going to need to take a backup of your server when you are doing some major changes, major updates your website and you don't want to mess anything up. It's a good idea to have a backup of your website. You can also do backups in your application settings. Alright, if why would go right here and SMTP tab right here, we're not going to change anything, but in later lesson we're going to use this stab to activate SMTP, and we're gonna do this. So we could get various Notification Emails to our email address from our website. That's what we're going to use this tab later. But for now, let's not focus. Alright, being honest, in this level, what you're going to use most likely I've been using Cloud waste. We're five years and I can tell you from my own experience, I've been running multiple websites. And right here the only thing I use is this one monitoring. I just like to check how much of resources my website is using, especially when I have an increase of visitors. Let's say if I have like 200 live visitors on my website at once, Dan, I usually like to check how much of resources my website is using and if everything works smoothly without any issues. So this is where you can check the usage of your resources. And like I said, this is probably the only one tab that I use. Most often. I don't use almost any other tabs at all. Alright, so this was the first level of our web hosting. And the second level is right here on application level. So before I would go to my application right here we have another set of various tools and settings. Alright, so let's start with first step. Right here, you'll find your credentials to log into your WordPress dashboard. So later on we're going to use those credentials to access our WordPress dashboard. And here we can set up our FTP client. Later we can use this FTP client can access files of our application, as you remember right here in server level and the first level of our web hosting, we had master credentials that we can use to login to our FTP and access all the files that are now Server. But if you would go right here and application level, which is the second level of our web hosting. And right here we're going to set up our username password. And by using those credentials, we just going to access the files of this application of this particular website, instead of accessing all files that can be found in this first level of our web hosting. Later we're going to set up those credentials and we'll show you how you can access the files. Alright, let's move on to staging management. This one is for staging management. Basically, before going live with your website, you can set up your website in the staging environment. So this one is up to you. Usually. This one is for a bit more advanced users who want to test various code things, Plugins and before making sure that everything is going to work smoothly, those people can use staging application to check if there's not gonna be any issues with the changes, with the Plugins or anything like that. But in this course we're going to use proven methods, proven Plugins and everything. So you won't need to use this staging management environment. Alright, let's go to monitoring section. This one is kinda similar to the previous one. We had the first level of our Web Hosting as you remember. But right here you can check what IP requests are coming to your website and all other things. This section might not be very important to you, but this is where it can check the incoming traffic to your website by the IP addresses and so on. This one is completely up to you if you want to use those Analytics right here, but I usually don't use them at all. Let's go to both protection. As you can see right here, cloud waste is protecting our website from both activity. This is very useful tool to have, as you can see, it is active so we're protected from both activity and that's good. Basically this tool, this tab right here, once it's activated, it just installs a plugin to your WordPress website. Plugin is basically an add-on for adding some type of a function. This time the function that was added is both protection, Simple as that. Let's go to Domain Management. Right now. We're not gonna do anything here, but in later lesson, we're gonna use this tab to connect our domain name. For now we can skip it, will be can go into Cron job management, ride year. You will be able to create Cron jobs. I know it might sound complicated, but do not get discouraged by this whole jargon and everything. Because most likely not going to need to use this that much Basically Cron jobs are meant for creating some commands. Some task would be executed automatically. So that's what these Cron jobs are for. But right now we're not going to add any Cron jobs because we don't need, we're going to create our website, fully functioning website without needing to do anything like that. But if in the future you will stumble upon a plugin that you want to install to your website for a specific functionality. And this plugin might need some Cron job. This is where you can create this Cron job. This is where you can add a new Cron job. Alright, let's go to SSL certificate. For now. We're not going to do anything with this SSL certificate. The good thing is that with cloud-based, you will get free SSL certificates. You want need to pay for them. If you remember, when we were in the GoDaddy, they offered SSL certificates for almost 50 pounds. So that's how much you can save per year. Alright, later on we're going to come back here and we're going to install this SSL certificate. If you're not sure what is an SSL certificate? It is this gray padlock next your domain name. It basically indicates that your website has secure connection. There is an SSL certificate installed your website. And basically this certificate encrypt data that you're visitors type into your website. It is important for security, alright, if we would go to backup and restore here, you can take backups of your website. So instead of going right here to your cellular level, like I mentioned you previously, you could go around here and take backups of your application, of your website. So once you take a backup, you're going to take a backup of this particular website right here, instead of taking a backup of the whole server. So if you would take the backup of the whole server and you have to websites hosted on this single server, then you're going to take a backup of this whole server with those two websites. But since we have only one website, and this is what we're going to focus on. The best is to take backups right here, your website. So if you are doing some changes and you don't want to mess anything up, if you are trying to install some plugins, let's say in the future you will decide that you want to install a plugin and something goes wrong and your website just breaks. Before doing before those installations, you can take backup of your website. And if you see something goes wrong, you can always choose a backup that you just took from the list and you can click Restore application. And just like that, you will restore your website to the previous state, just like that deployment via good, this is for advanced users, very can connect get with your website. And we're not going to use this at all. We would go to Application Settings. Right here. You'll see various extensions that you can activate to your application. If we would go to PHP settings, you can do changes to PHP, but we're not going to do that unless in the future you will stumble upon that something requires those changes. This is very confined dose adjustments those settings in this tab. Alright, let's go to migration tools. Migration tools are kind of obvious. You use those tools to migrate a website. So let's say if you have a website hosted somewhere else and you want to use cloud-based because Cloud ways is a fast hosting, then you can use this tool to migrate your website, Simple as that. Alright, if you would go to Cloudflare, Cloudflare is basically CDN service content delivery network. By using cloud-based, you will add extra layer of security to your website. And by using cloud-based, you will improve the speed of your website just a little bit. But let's not focus on cloudflare. Cloudflare not cloud-based. So I'm talking about cloudflare. Cloudflare is a paid service and as you can see, it will cost you this much. Actually, you can use a free version of Cloudflare, but you will have to connect everything yourself. But let's not focus on that because we don't really need to use any of those adjustments. But if in the future, let's say after a couple of years or something like that, you will decide that you want to dive a bit deeper into optimizing your website. You might need to use some of those tools, some of those settings right here, if you would go to save updates, this is a new tool. You can do, save updates for your web sin. For example, if there are some WordPress updates, plugin updates or anything like that, you can do save updates without messing up with your website. Because sometimes in rare occasions when you do update your WordPress plug-in or theme, it might mess something up, but it doesn't happen very often. And it's up to you if you want to be extra cautious and take updates using this tab. So this one is up to you, but we're not going to need to use that. Like I said, Mom methods are proven. I've been using the same blueprint to create websites for myself and for my clients. And everything worked smoothly. And being honest, what tools you're going to use right here. Probably going to use this tab more often to access your WordPress dashboard. So you're going to use those credentials. You probably going to use those credentials right here after you create them to access all the files on your website. And the other white important tab that you might use more often is bought protection just to check how much of bot activity is going on on your website, how much of these bonds were blocked or not and so on. So being honest, I'm using cloud-based for five years and on application level, on the second level of our Web Hosting Dashboard, this is the most important tab to me. And this step both protection only use those two tabs on application level. And when we go to the first level of our Web Hosting Dashboard, that is cellular level Dashboard. Only use this monitoring to check how much of resources Maya website is using right now, I only use just briefings, but it's good to know what each tool is, man four. So you would be a bit more familiar with all the settings, all the tools that are right here, because maybe in the future you might need to use some of these tools. Just don't forget there are two levels. The first level is for Server Management right here. And like I said, only use monitoring. And the second level is for application management. So this is the second level of Your Web Hosting Dashboard. And this is where you're going to find various settings are related to your website itself, not just the cerebellum. Alright, so this is for this lesson. 6. (1.3) Connecting Domain to Web Hosting: In this lesson, we're going to connect our domain name to our web hosting because right now those two things are separate entities. Even far we have our domain name. We cannot access our website because it's just the name. It's not connected to anything. So we have to connect this domain name to our web hosting. And we're going to use Web Hosting to host our website, basically to keep all the files of our website on the server. Alright, so to connect your domain name to your web hosting, you want to go to your account of GoDaddy or any other place where you registered your domain name. In my case, it's of course is going to be GoDaddy. And let's go right here to my products then as you can see right here, this is my domain name. Maybe you going to have your domain names right here. What you want to do is actually you want to go to the list of all your domain names and you want to click right here DNS. Alright, so the only thing that is going to be the most important for us in this whole section is this first line. In your case, you might have texts that says parked, no worries about that. It's completely okay. But everything else should look very similar lag that you are records might be a bit different, but no worries about that. If you haven't done any changes, everything will be fine. Alright, so we have all our records and now we want go back to our Web Hosting right here. And don't forget, you want to go to your application management level. So this is the second level of Your Web Hosting Dashboard. As you remember, server is the first level. So this is server management, but you don't want to be here. You want to go ride year in application Settings like your website, and now you want to copy this IP address. So just click on this IP address right here. And now we can go back to our DNS management settings and we want to change this first record right here. Let's click Edit and just paste DIP address you just copied. Let's change the time right here. Ttl, that stands for time to load. And instead of using this number, Let's use 600. Let's click Save. Alright, success. Our DNS record was updated and now our domain name is pointing to our web hosting. It's like we added a telephone number to a name just like that. So now once someone is going to type our domain name into web browser, they're going to be able to access our website, but we're not done yet because we have to do some changes right here. Like I said in the previous lesson, we're going to use this tab right here, Domain Management. And let's click Add Domain. And right here you just want to type the domain name you purchased, you registered. In my case, it was the bacon avocados.com. So I'm just going to type this domain. I'm right here. Let's click Add the main. And we want to make this domain name primary. So let's click right here. Let's click here, and let's select make primary set as primary. Alright, so just wait a minute until the changes complete. Alright, let's go to access details one more time. As you can see, an admin panel now we have a completely different URL. It has our domain name. And by using this URL, we can actually access our WordPress dashboard. For example, I'm just going to go to my domain name. So I'm just going to copy my domain name. Or I can open this domain name in a new tab. And if I would go right here, as you can see, we're getting this message that there's a suspicious page and it was blocked for me, it's happening because we don't have SSL certificates, so we are not able to access this website. But if I would click right here, I can actually go to this website. But since we got an SSL certificate for free, we can actually installed this certificate to our website. And in later lesson, that's exactly what we're gonna do it for now. We can close this tab and this is it, this is it for this lesson. Now you know how to connect your domain name to your web hosting 7. (1.4) Installing SSL Certificate: Alright, so as you remember, we couldn't access our website because my antivirus was blocking it. Because it seemed for this antivirus that this website is too suspicious because this website doesn't have SSL certificate. So as you can see, if your website doesn't have an SSL certificate, it doesn't look trustworthy at home. So it is important to have a sessile Certificate. And like I said, at cloud-based, you will get SSL certificate for free. And that is just great. So let's go to SSL certificate, and now we're going to install an SSL certificate. Alright, so let's use, Let's Encrypt right here. Just type your email address, the email address that you use for your personal uses. You can use the same email address that you use to register right here at Cloud ways. So that's exactly what I'm gonna do. I'm just going to type my email address and I will enter my domain name. Alright, so just centered my details and now we can click Install Certificate. It shouldn't take long, just wait a minute. Alright, fantastic. We just successfully installed our SSL certificate. As you can see, it says it's going to expire this date, but no worries about it. It's going to renew automatically, so you won't need to do any changes. Alright, since we have installed our SSL certificate, we can actually go to our website and let's see if it works. If my antivirus isn't blocking this website anymore. Alright, so this is the website we want to access and wall as you can see, my antivirus isn't blocking this website anymore. It's because this website has SSL certificate. This website is secure and this website has an extra layer of security. When you are creating a websites, it is extremely important to have an SSL certificate because as you saw yourself, some antivirus is going to block the website because it's not trustworthy at all. So as you can see, how our websites so great progress so far. Of course, this website has Demo Content and doesn't look good. It doesn't have any of our information, but good job on creating your website. So if it's your first website, congratulations, you just created your website. Of course, there's a lot of things to do, but we can see the foundation of our website. So fantastic job. This is it for this lesson. Now, you know how to install SSL certificate to your website and why it is extremely important. 8. (1.5) Setting Up FTP Account: This lesson, I will show you how to set up your FTP Accounts so you could access all the files of your website. This is quite important, especially in the future for you if you're going to need to do some identification with your website. Sometimes some websites might require for you to upload a file to your FTP account. Let's say that to verify your website. So it is important to know how to access your files. Alright, so like I said, we're going to use some details from our tab that says access details. And right here application credentials. So right here, you want to create credentials for your application just given a username and set a password. So that's exactly what I'm gonna do myself. Alright, so why just added my details and I'm gonna click right here, and I'm not going to update anything right here. Alright, so just wait a bit and everything is ready. So now we can use those credentials to login to FTP account, but how to access FTP account? What is that? Ftp account is simply the files of your website. So FTP is file transfer protocol. That's what it stands for. But to access your files, you need to install one program. So just go to Google and look for this program that is called FileZilla in all times, this is how people use to upload the various files on the server. And this is how people use to share those files, download those files from various different servers. Those things used to be like that in the past before various different file-sharing options were available. Alright, but we're not here to talk about that. We're not to talk about the history of Internet via here to set up our FTP account. So let's go around here and let's click Download FileZilla client. Let's click Download FileZilla client one more time. And all we have to do is just download the first option, alright, once the download is complete, just installed FileZilla to your computer. Just a second. Alright, let's click Agree. Let's Install Brave browser. Let's click Next. We can add and desktop icon. Let's click Next. Let's click Next install. It shouldn't take very long. Just installed FileZilla. Alright, now we can lounge FileZilla, and as you can see, this is how it looks. Alright, so now we can close this tab and let's go back to our FileZilla. And right here we could type our host that it's going to be IP address. This is the username, this is the username password, password right here, port should be 21 or 22. I don't really remember. It's 22 if I'm not mistaking anything. Yes. But instead of typing those credentials right here, Let's create our new site right here. So let's go to Site Manager. And let's click New side. Just type your domain name right here. I'm just going to tie bacon avocados. Alright? Here we have to choose protocol. So it's going to be this one. And now you want to copy your public IP address. Let's go to FileZilla. Let's face it right here. Let's go right here. Let's copy username and we can copy the password, the same credentials we just created. Let's click right here. Let's click Okay, Let's say password. And now let's click right here. And let's see if we can connect. Yes, we can connect. So let's click. Okay, we are connecting and we just connected to our files of our website. So as you can see right here, we have files just like on your computer, you have filed directories and everything. The same goes for your website. So as you can see, these are the files if I would go into public HTML. Those are basically the files of our website of WordPress. And this is where all the plugins will go. This is where you might need to upload files, some files for all defecation, let's say Pinterest used to do this in the past. I'm not sure if the Pinterest still requires to authenticate your website. If you want to connect your reps it with Pinterest through files. But in a lot of cases, it's still possible there are some websites that are required to do this. So they usually say for you to download the file, and once you download a file, you just have to add this file right here, just like that. So as you can see, we have various different files. We can access our website using those files. We can check all the files of our website, media files like images, code and so on. So we your website, you are WordPress website or any other type of website is basically just a bunch of files and your browser, whatever your browser is, if it's Firefox, Chrome or Internet Explorer or any other these browsers, they just read those all files that are right here, let's say. And they display your website in easier to understand format, interactive type of format. So just like that, you can go through your website, through your files since I'm just going through these files, directories, you go your website just like in this format. So this is it for this lesson. Now you should know how to set up your FTP account. You might not use this FTP account that often, but it's good to know how it's done because as I can say from my own experience, I use FileZilla not that often, but I usually use FileZilla couple of times per year or something like that to do some changes, to do some adjustments. But to be honest, you might not need to use that much, but it is important to know how to access your files using FTP account. So this is it for this lesson. 9. (1.6) Setting Up SMTP For Notification Emails: This lesson, I'll show you how to set up SMTP services so you could send and receive Notification Emails to explain to you what is SMTP? Instead of explaining everything, I'm just gonna give you an example. So let's say you are building an eCommerce store. And once your customer places an order, he receives and Notification Emails of successfully placed order. Once the order is shipped, he's going to receive an e-mail and Notification Emails of ship order. So those are Notification Emails that customers receive if you don't have SMTP service that is responsible for sending and receiving, basically sending emails to e-mail addresses than your customers will not be able to receive those Notification Emails, let's say if you have a contact form on your website, those forms wants to go to our contact page of a certain website and there is a former. You can add your email address, your name, and leave a message. And once you hit buttons, sand at this form is sent to the administrators of dyspepsia. So if you don't have SMTP service setup on your website, you will not be able to have Contact Forms functioning Contact Forms because you will not receive emails. So in this lesson, we're going to set up our SMTP services. And it's quite easy. You just have to know what you have to do. Alright, so the first thing, Let's go right here, and let's hope and add ons and a new tab. Alright, let's go here. And as you can see right here, I have this add-on that is called elastic Emails. I have already activated this add-on because as you saw it yourself, I have multiple websites, multiple servers running on this web hosting, so I had to activate this one, but in your case, you have to activate it yourself. So you will have to click right here and just select your package. I highly recommend you to choose the first one. It's going to cost you just $0.10 per month for 1,000 emails. And when you are just starting out is gonna be more than just enough. So just select the first option and click subscribe. That's all you have to do. And once you surpass this number of females, you can always upgrade your plan. But I'm telling you when you are just starting out, you don't really need to worry about that. Alright? Once you have done this, we can close this one and now we can go back right here to the previous step. And as you remember, now, we are on the second level of our web hosting and we found application level, that is our website. We have to go back to the server level and the first level of our web hosting. So right here and SMTP tab, Let's click right here and we want to select elastic email. Let's click right here. Let's click Enable. Alright, Just wait a minute until it is enabled or I fantastic, everything was configured successfully. And now we can go back right here. And we're going to need to verify our domain name. So to do this, we will have to click here on this checkmark. And you can open this link and a new tab, and you see it right here. Well then scroll down until we see it instructions. And we're going to need to add those records right here to our domain name. So to do this, we want to go to our domain name provider where we purchased our domain name. In my case, it's going to be GoDaddy. We're going to need to do some DNS adjustments. So as you remember from the previous lesson, when we had to add our IP address of our web hosting, we have to click right here. Let's go right here, my account, we can quick domains. Actually, we could have done this in a previous window, but it's okay. Alright, so let's find our domain name. This is the domain name we want to use. And just a second, Let's click right here managed DNS. And now we're going to need to add some new records right here. So to Add a new record, simply click Add. And let's go back to instructions. Now. You just have to remember that is going to be texts record so you don't need to copy this one, but you have to carpet this one right here. So let's click Copy. Let's go back to our domain provider. Let's select texts element right here. And name just type Eta as you saw it yourself. And just paste the value right here. And time to load. Let's add custom. Let's choose 600 s. Alright, let's click Add record. Alright, so we successfully added a new record. As you can see, this record was added right here, and now we're going to need to add some other records as well. So this is the other record we want chads. So as you saw it yourself, the previous one had name host alias, that was Eta, and this one as this one. So you want to copy that. Let's go back and let's click Add, and let's choose the types. The type is going to be just like it was with the previous one, but instead of the name, we're going to use this one right here. We have to copy the values. So this is the value you want to copy. So just quick copy the value. Let's quick paced right here, and let's choose custom just like we did with the previous one. And let's type 600 s. Alright, let's quick and record. And I believe we're going to need to add another record. So let's scroll down At this time we're going to need to add another type of record that is going to be seen name. So you want to copy this one tracking or you can remember it right here. Let's click Add. Let's choose type. The type is gonna be C name, name, it's going to be tracking. And now you want to copy values. So let's copy this value. Let's go back. Let's face it right here. And let's choose time to load just like we did with the previous one. Let's click Add record. Alright, fantastic. It was added successfully and now we're going to need to add believed the last record. As you can see, we suppose that another record that is M X, but we're not going to do this right now in a later lesson, we're going to add this record when began to set up our business email address. Because we're verifying this domain name, we don't really need this MX record unless we are going to use some type of e-mail suit like G suit or any other. I will show you the one I use myself, it's three. So you will be able to send and receive emails using your business email address. For now, let's not focus on that. Let's add the last recurrence. So the last record is going to be tax record and we want to copy the name. So let's go back to GoDaddy. And as you remember who that is, click Add, or that's shoes types. The type is going to be taxed element. Let's space the name and let's copy the values. So the value, this is the value want to copy. Let's paste it right here. And let's choose the custom time to load again, 600 s. And let's click Add record. As you can see right here, in rare cases it can take up to 48 h until those records are full added. But in our case, it shouldn't take this long. Everything should be set and read dividend couple of minutes. Alright, so we have done this, we have finished with this part. Let's go back and let's see if we have any other records that no, we don't have. But as you can see, we had some other options for the last record, but we don't need to do that. Alright, we can close this tab. We can close this tab as well. Again, if you're using any other domain name provider, if you have registered your domain name somewhere else, the procedure is still going to be the same. You just going to need Chad records. So it's just so I just saw we had some texts records and we had a CNAME records. Just add those records and you will be good to go. Alright, so now we have to verify our domain name. So right here, just type the domain name you using for this website, the one that we use to add those records. So that's exactly what I'm gonna do. I'm just going to type my domain name and now we can click Verify domain name. Alright, so we haven't successfully activated our domain name, but no worries about that. And later lesson we're going to go back right here, like I showed you, we don't have MX record. Mx record is responsible for setting up a you have business email address with a domain name. So let's say I'm going to have a business email address that it's going to say Support at bacon avocados.com. This is gonna be my business email address. For now, everything seems great. Now we can leave it as it is. As you can see, all other records are greens, so that means to be successfully activated them. And the last record that we need to take care of, it's going to be this one, AmEx. And in the next lesson when we are going to set up our business email address, I will show you how to add it. We're gonna go back right here and we're going to click Verify one more time and everything should be okay. Alright, so for now, everything seems great and we can leave it just like that 10. (1.7) Creating Business Email Address: Alright, so just like I told you in the previous lesson, in this one, we're going to focus on setting up our business email address. So I hope you haven't left this tab. So instead of leaving this stamp, you should go to our new tab and you want to go to zoho.com. Alright, so once you're here, you want to click right here, Signup now, and make sure that you have select business email and just type your name, your email or phone and set a password. So that's exactly what I'm going to do myself. Alright, let's agree to terms of service and let's click sign up for free. You can click Save if you want. Mark is I'm just going to click Save password. And right here you'll have to type the code you receive to your email address. So simply just verify your email address. Let's verify it. So there's you can see we have paid plans. It doesn't cost that much compared to Google suit, G suit, or basically the interface of Gmail. But we don't really need to pay for him since we are just starting out, we can use a free plan. So we will be able to create five different email addresses with your domain name. So for example, you could have an email address for marketing support everybody your name and so on. So let's click Try. Now, let's click add existing domain name. And now you just want to type your domain name. So I'm just going to type my domain name and fill up all the other needed information. Alright, let's click Add. And now we're going to need to verify our domain name. So just like we did in Cloud ways, right here, the procedure is going to be almost identical. Alright, let's click Proceed to verify our domain name and we can click configure manually. Now we're going to need to add a texture occurrence. So just like we did the previous time, you want to go to your domain name provider. And my case, it's going to be obviously GoDaddy. So let's click and GoDaddy. Let's close this one. Let's go around here to my products and let's choose the domain name. This is the domain name I want to use. Let's click Manage DNS. And just like we did the previous time, we're going to need to do the same. Let's click Add. And as you remember, it was text element as well. And now we have to copy the value. So let's click right here to carpet this value. And the name is gonna be Eta. Alright, so let's paste the value around here, and let's choose custom 600 s. Let's click Add record. Alright, we can close this window. Let's go back right here and let's click Verify, texts record. Alright, It's not verified yet because I selected time to load 600 s. So time to load basically means how long it's going to take to load those newly add records. So I added 600 s. That means we should wait a couple of minutes. So just wait a minute or two and try verifying tax record one more time. If this issue happens, you don't need to worry too much. It just means that you have to wait some time. In rare occasions, you're going to need to wait a longer period of time. As you can see right here, it can last from 30 min to one day, but it happens in very rare occasions. Now we can click Verify tax record. Alright, so our successfully verified the ownership of my domain name and now I can create my email address. So the first email address that I want to create, and it's going to be used as a super administrator. I want this email address to be Support at bacon avocados.com probably when you're starting any type of project, this is going to be the most important email address for you. So you should always savvy email address Support at your domain name.com or dot any other domain name extension. So I'm just going to type support, but if you want, you can type any other email address. It's up to you. Alright, let's click Create. And here you can add other users, you can add other e-mail addresses right here if you need to. So now this is your perfect opportunity to add more Email addresses. Later on you can edit those email addresses, as you can see right now, it is Support at the bacon avocados, but the name is whether it is my name, but you can do changes to this email address. So let's click Edit Profile instead of showing my name gvidas, because once your visitor or customer receives an email from you, from Support at the bacon avocados, they're going to see your name. So you can change that instead of saying your name, you can add support. You can change the nickname as well, right here. Alright, let's see, I'd save changes and now we can go back. And as you can see, now we have an email address that is Support at your domain name.com. And once your customer service There's going to receive an email address from you, they're going to see that it's going to be from Support. Alright, so now you can add more Email Address by clicking right here just creates an email address with your name and email address for marketing purposes and so on. But in this case, since you already know how to do that, we can proceed to the next steps of setting up our email accounts Alright, so now we don't really need to create any groups because our business is small. We just starting out, once your website grows, you will always be able to create groups for various other purposes. But now let's proceed to DNS mapping. Alright, so let's click configure manually. I'm doing this manually because you might be using some other domain name providers. Because in your case, you might not be able to do this automatically. And you will need to do this manually so that everybody would be able to follow this lesson. I'm doing this manually. Alright, so now we're going to need to add some records. It's gonna be very simple. We just have to copy those records just like we did previous lesson. And we have tad those records right here. So we're going to need to add free MX records. So basically, let's copy the first MX record. Let's go to our domain provider and let's click Add. Let's choose types. The type is going to be Emax and name. Let's go back for name. Yeah, it's gonna be Eta. Let's paste the value priority. It's gonna be ten and time to load is gonna be 600 s. Let's click and record. Alright, let's add another one. Let's go back right here. Now we have to carpet this one. As you can see, priority is gonna be t10. And let's go right here. Let's click Add. If you know how to do that, you don't need to follow this lesson. You can do it this yourself, but I just want to show you how it's done. Alright, so let's base the value and let's choose custom. Let's type 600. And as you can see, it's quite simple. Alright, so I'm just going to add the last MX record is gonna be this one. It is set to 50 priority. Let's go to Add, Let's type. Type is going to be Emax name, it's going to be at priority 50 and value. Just paste it right here. And let's select custom time to load 600 s. Let's click Add record. Alright, great success. It is successful added. And now we're going to need to add SPF record. But instead of adding a new record, we're going to need to edit the record we previously Add when we were verifying our domain name on cloud-based with elastic email. Alright, so now we should go back to Zoho. Let's click View SPF value. This is the current value we have and we have to replace this value with this one. Alright? We want to use this value. Alright, let's click, Okay. Since we have copied this value, and now we have to go back to our domain provider and we have to look for SPF value just a second. It's supposed to be taxed records. So let's go to the next page. Alright, just a second. Alright, SPF, so this is the value we want to replace. So instead of creating our new SPF value, we have to add the value that was generated by Zoho because you can only have one SPF record added to your domain name. Alright, so this is very important. Alright, so we successfully replaced this value of it, another one. And now we can go back. And the last value that we're going to need to add, not the value, but the record is going to be TXT record. It's gonna be this one. We have to copy the host, the name. So it's gonna be this one. Let's go back to our domain provider. Let's choose text element lead space, the name right here. Let's go back and let's copy the value. So this is the value that space, this value right here, as you remember, time to load 600 s and let's click Add record. Alright, so everything should be good right now. And now we can go back to Zoho and now we're going to need to verify all our records. So instead of verifying right away, just wait a couple of minutes and then click Verify all records. Alright, after you have aided some time, Let's click verify all the records. Alright, we successfully verified all the records. Now we can proceed to go mobile. If you want. You can install an application to your phone device with Zoho Email suit. It's up to you, but I'm just going to keep it as it is. And now we can proceed to complete our setup. And as you can see, you have two choices. So let's open the first one and a new tab. Let's see if we can open this in a new tab. Now, we cannot. So instead of going to admin console, if you would go to admin console, you would go straight to your administrators Console where you can add more email addresses. You can delete email addresses, where you can do adjustments to those email addresses. You can try out other Zoho tools. They have other tools I calendars and all other various tools that will help you to optimize your workflow. But in this lesson our focus is email address. So let's click right here, check out your inbox. Alright, and this is a, now you have fully functioning business email address. Alright, we can skip the tutorial and as you can see, this is how it looks. So you have your inbox, you have drafts and spam trash. You can click new email, you have countered tasks. You have all kinds of stuff right here. Don't be afraid to explore everything yourself, because this way you're going to learn how to use this email shoot much better. As you can see here, we have various other tools. If you would go right here, you would be able to access your administrators Console. So do not be afraid to explore everything yourself because this way, when learn how to use this tool much butter, if you would use any other tool, let's say G suit like Google, it's a paid tool and you would have just interface of Gmail. Maybe it would look better, but this one that is free, it completely does the job. I've been using this e-mail provider for very long time and it works very well. Just click to write a new e-mail. That's all you have to. But before we finished with this lesson, we have some unfinished business to do. So we can close our domain name provider right here, because we're not going to use this one for quite awhile. And now we can go back to Cloud ways. And as you remember, we had one record missing, that was a max. And as you remember, we added that record. Alright, so now we can click Verify domain, and as you can see, Domain verification was complete. We can close this window and we can actually test if our Notification Emails will work. To do this, we have to go to servers right here. Let's select your server that is here. And you want to go to the second level of your web hosting, that is your application. You want to go back to the server to the first level of your web hosting and click SMTP. Let's refresh this page because as I remember, we saved elastic email and it should reflect right here. Yeah, as you can see, we have elastic Emails saved success. And you should have this one as well. If you don't have, you have to select it from the list click Enable, and now we can click Send test email, simply type your email address. So type your business email address, in my case, is going to be Support at the bacon avocados.com and click Send test. You will see yourself that you're going to receive this e-mail. So let's try this out. Let's click Send test email. Alright, It seems like it was sent successfully. And now I'm just going to open my email inbox and I'm gonna check if I received this Testament N. As you can see, we successfully received a test e-mail. It says that it came from Support at the bacon avocados.com. When you are sending a test e-mail, make sure that you are not using the same email address for receivers email address as you have used for creating your Cloud ways account because it might not work. So make sure that you are using other email address then you use to create your Cloud ways account. Because if you're going to use the same, it might not work. But if you're going to use other email address it should want. This is it for this lesson now you know how to set up your business email address without needing to pay a lot of money for any other options. And as well, you know how to verify your domain name bot for Zoho and for elastic Email 11. Section 1 Summary: Alright, congratulations on completing the first section of this course. So now you should know what is a domain name, what is Web Hosting, how those two things connect together? And of course, now how to set up your business email address. That's very important if you are running your online store because you want to look professional and having a business email address is extremely important. So if something was not clear for you, you are always welcome to join my Facebook group. If you're going to have questions while building your website, just joined this group and I'm always here to help you. So now you are done with the first part of discourse and you kinda have your website. Of course, this is a completely default version of your website, but at least now you are online. So there's before starting this course, you didn't know anything about building websites. Or what is the domain name or what is the Web Hosting? Just look at yourself now. Now you have your website, now you are online. So great job on that. In the next section you're going to get a solid foundation of WordPress. So if you will ever decide that you want to create any type of website, you're going to have a solid foundation of WordPress and that's gonna be helpful for you in the future. Alright, so that's all for now. And of course, congratulations on going online. 12. (2.0) Getting Started With WordPress: This lesson we're going to talk about WordPress. So you will learn what is WordPress and why we are using WordPress as our content management system. So let's put it simply. Wordpress is basically like a software that you use to create your reps it. So instead of needing to code everything, to program everything, we have a content management system that helps us to do the whole creation process of our website without needing to know any code or anything like that. Basically, you will need to learn how to use this content management system. We were to add your content, how to add products and all other things. And this helps to create a website much faster. And you don't need to spend a lot of money on developing your own website. So this is a huge advantage of WordPress. And WordPress is the most popular content management system, believe it or not, around 50% of websites that are online running this content management system. So if you have visited any type of website, there's a huge chance, actually 50% of chance that this website was created using WordPress. There are plenty of huge websites using this content management system. So it's very popular, it's very good, and it's actually quite easy to use it once you know how to navigate the Dashboard and everything. In this section, that's exactly what we're going to focus on. We're going to focus on WordPress. So the first things first, we have to login to our WordPress dashboard before we can dive deeper into this content management system itself. So alright, so you want to open your website in a new tab right here, just like added. And at the end of your website URL, you want to type slash WP dash admin, and hit Enter right here. You'll have to enter your credentials to login to your WordPress dashboard. So let's go back to our Cloud ways Account. Right here. Let's select our server. And right now we're on the first level of our dashboard, of our Web Hosting Dashboard. And we want to go to the second level of our Web Hosting Dashboard, which is application. And right here, as you can see, we have information about admin panel. So as you can see, this is the same URL that we typed right here, slash WP, dash admin. And now we want to go back right here and just copy your username. Your username is basically the same email address that you used to create your Cloud ways Account. And the password was generated automatically. So we want to go right here, click on this password. You just copy it and just paste it right here. Let's click Remember me and let's login to our website. Alright, we can click Save and we end. This is the dashboard of WordPress. And like I said, WordPress is a content management system that helps us to create our website much faster, much easier without needing to code anything. And this content management system is the most popular for reasons. So if you decided to use WordPress, you made the right choice. Alright, so this is it for this lesson. Now you know what is WordPress, how to login to your WordPress dashboard. And then the next lesson we're going to dive deeper into the dashboard of WordPress itself. 13. (2.1) WordPress Dashboard Walkthrough: This lesson, I will give you a quick walk-through of our WordPress dashboard. So you would understand each tool much better, actually like cloud ways hosting a lot because when you set up your WordPress website, you don't have too many tools right here because other web hosting providers, they tend to install various different plug-ins that we actually don't even need. And the dashboard of WordPress looks quite confusing. I really liked that. It looks very simple. Alright, so since you are here, we actually can close this tab of cloud-based web hosting because we're not going to use it. And the right now let's focus with the first step that is Dashboard. So as you can see right here, we have two other tabs, that is home and updates. In this Home tab you will see various tools, widgets you can add to your home dashboard. As you can see right here, we have various activities that are going on on your website, basically right here we see comments on blog posts, on everything like that. You can see how many posts you have pages right here. It also shows your sin health status and some other various widgets. And here you can add other widgets if you want, if you need to head. This is basically the Homepage of your WordPress dashboard. If you're going to install more plug-ins to your website for different functionalities. To add more functionalities to your website right here you can add those tools right here to see a quick summary of your Plugins of your website. But to be honest, I don't really use this type of home that much. Actually don't use it completely because this is not where my focus is. Some people might like to use it, but I don't really see a point why to use this Dashboard, because most of the time I use just certain tools. And later on I will show you what tools might be more important to you as well. Alright, so let's go to updates right here. Here you will see values available updates. So if you have a WordPress that is out of date, you will see that you can update your WordPress itself, that is content management system. Right here we have Plugins and as you can see to Plugins are outdated and we can update those plugin. So let's do that. It's a good practice to keep everything up to date on your WordPress website because you want to be sure that everything works smoothly and there are no issues and sometimes outdated plug-ins, outdated Themes. In rare cases they can cause you some security issues so you don't want that to happen. So make sure that you keep everything up to date. So let's go back to updates. And yeah, this tab is for updates. So if you will see that there are updates available, don't ignore them and just keep everything up to date because it is good practice to keep your plugins, themes and a WordPress itself up to date. Alright, let's go to post them right here. Alright, so once I click on posts, I can see all posts. So basically this tab is focused on blog posts. If you are writing blog posts, this is going to want to focus more. And as you can see in all posts, you can see all of your blog posts that you have on your website at a moment only have one blog post that was created by default. If you would add new blog post by clicking right here or right here, you will be able to add more blog posts to your WordPress website. Alright? If I would go to Categories, obviously you can create categories for your blog posts. So of course, depending on your project, you want to create your categories for blog posts if you're writing them. And if I would go to tags right here you will see the list of tags that you are using in your blog posts. Basically the tags are used to describe your blog posts in short words and short keywords. So it would be easier for your visitors to navigate through your blog and so on. Also, a lot of people who in to SCO say that tags help to rank higher if you include tags relevant to your blogs and you can optimize your blogposts a bit better. In later lesson, I will show you a bit more about blogposts. Several talk about the tags and categories more in depth. But for now I just wanted to let you know that this tab both, this is where you will add your blog posts. Alright? If we would go to Media Library, this is obviously very, you will find all your media files, most likely, without a doubt, this is where you will find your photos and never recommend for people to upload videos to their WordPress websites because it is not good practice if you will ever want to upload a video to your WordPress website, the better choice would be to go to YouTube, upload your video to YouTube, and then copy the link embed video to a blog post to a page or anywhere else. You don't want to upload videos, your WordPress website because it's going to slow down your website tremendously. And you don't want this to happen because you want to keep user experience as good as possible. So if I would click right here, right here, I would be able to Add new media files to my WordPress website. So simply drag and drop files right here or just select from files. If I would go to pages right here. As you can see, we have barriers pages. So similarly to pose, of course posts are different than later lesson. I will explain to you the main difference between posts and pages. I'm going to talk about this a little bit in-depth, but to make it short and to make it quick, I'm gonna tell you that pages are the most important pages on your website. If you're going to write blog posts, you're going to have a lot of blog posts in different categories. And once you add pages, you most likely going to have just the limited number of pages Pages are important information to your customers, to your visitors. So for example, you could have page about your business. You could have Page Contact Page privacy policy, terms of service, cookie policy, and all those pages that you see on all other websites. So those are pages. If you will want to add a page, you will have to click right here or here. Alright, let's go to comments tab. In comments tab you will see all the comments that are on your blog posts. So as you can see right here, we have one common debt was added by default. And we can do various things with his comments so we can unapproved, we can reply to this comment. We can even edit this comment. We can put this comment to spam them or we can put it to trash bin. So this is where you will see all the comments that are posted under your blog posts. Alright, let's go to Appearance tab and appearance tab. You basically can install a new theme for your WordPress website. So depending on your project, depending on your niche, you can choose the Theme you would like to use. But in this course I will recommend use some themes that I use myself and I have tested myself so I can guarantee you that those beams going to work smoothly. And if you will want to Add New Theme, just click right here or click here. And editor, you can basically edit the theme of your WordPress website. Of course, it depends on what FIM you are using. Different teams have different options, different ways of customizing themes. But as you can see, this default theme has such options for customizing this theme. This is not the best way to customize your theme. And like I said, I will show you the proven themes that I use myself. And those streams are popular, they are fast and they are reliable. Alright, let's go back right here. Alright, let's click Dashboard. And like I said, an editor, you don't really need to focus right here. Of course it depends on your theme, but in later lessons when we will edit our theme, I will show you how you can customize it and you'll see it yourself, how simple it is. Alright, let's go to plugins tab. If I will click on plugins tab, as you can see, those are the plugins we have. Those are two Plugin sector if you see something different now worries about that. If you see any inactive Plugins, you can delete them because you are not using them obviously. And the Plugin saf or adding various different functionalities to your WordPress website. In later lesson, we're going to talk about this a bit more in depth so you will understand themes and plug-ins much better. If you would click Add New or right here, you'll be able to Add a new plugin using search. You will find any plugin you want. Alright, let's go to users that There's, you can see Users tab right here in all users, we can see all the users that are on this website. Obviously I'm the only one user. I am the administrator, so I'm just the one user right here. If you will ever need or if you will ever want to add new users zero absolute. Once your project grows, you can do this right here, just sad, username, email address. The password is generated automatically and just select the row for your newly added user. As you can see, you can add administrator, editor for blog posts, author for blog posts as well, and so on. Alright, let's go to profiles tab right here. Alright, we do not need to save anything. And in Profile tab basically you will be able to do various customization options for your profile. You can change the color scheme. You can do various other adjustments related to your profile. This one is up to you if you want to do any changes at all. Alright, let's go to tool stamp, right here you will see various different tools for your WordPress website right here in import export, you can export and import your data of your profile, of your WordPress website, not a profile. Those two options might be useful for you if you're planning to migrate your website anywhere else. But actually there are plugins that will help you to do that. So you don't really need to focus right here. If we would go to side health, you will see the health of your website. Obviously, since it's a new website design, health is gonna be good. Usually it shows that there's some issues with health, especially if there are some outdated plug-ins and anything like that. So you will see any issues that are going on on your website right here. But again, this is not the most important thing. Like I said, just keep everything up-to-date and you will not need to worry about anything right here. Export yours personal data. You can export your personal data of your WordPress website. So from your profile, these settings are not so important. Right here in Theme file editor, you can edit the files of Your Theme. So this one is for advanced users who know how to work with a code. And the right here, you don't really need to focus at all because this is for advanced users, just like plugin file editor, you will be editing the code of your plugins. So those two options are not that important. You don't need to focus on them too much because they are for advanced users. And then this course, we're not going to use those options actually, we're not going to use any tools right here at all, but it's good to know what each tool is for. Alright, let's go to Settings tab. And to be honest right here, we're not going to focus in this lesson too much on the settings, because in later lesson I will show it the most important settings that you have to do to make sure that your website works smoothly. Alright, so this is it basically this was the quick walk-through of WordPress dashboard. And as you can see it yourself, It's not that complicated. You just have to know what each tool is for. Talking from a personal experience. I can show you the most often used tools that I use myself, but eCommerce websites with blogs, business websites without dubbed this one both for adding blog posts, you probably going to use more often than any other tool right here, media, media you're going to use also more often, especially for adding media files like images for your blog posts. So you can use media to upload all images all at once pages, you're not going to use that often because once you set up all your pages, you just going to forget about those pages. So this is not very going to focus too much. So you're going to focus more on comments, because once you start getting comments, you will be able to find all the comments right here, just like I showed you previously. And you can delete them and approve them, do whatever you want with those comments. Probably one of the most southern, more often used tabs is this one, because in the future wants to Add New Plugins your website. This is what you might want to use more often. Maybe you will need to deactivate some plugins, so that's what you're going to use as well. So the most popular ones are Posts, media, comments, and the last one is Plugins. This is it for this lesson. Now you know how to navigate WordPress dashboard much better and it shouldn't look this complicated anymore. 14. (2.2) The Essential WordPress Settings: This lesson, I'll show you the most important settings. The settings can be found right here as you remember from the WordPress Dashboard Walkthrough lesson. So all the settings related to your WordPress website can be done around here in this step. So let's start with general settings right here. And right here, the most important things you have to do is you have to add your site title and just add a tagline for your website. You can see right here it says just center a few words to explain your website to describe your business. And Simple as that, just type the tagline and add a site title. So that's exactly what I'm going to do myself. Alright, as you can see, I just changed the site title and added a tagline. As you can see, once you change your site title, it changes around here as well. So it's up to you what site title and tagline you want to use. As you can see, I just added a Simple tagline. This website is basically to teach you guys, to teach you how to create your websites. Alright? Alright, here we can scroll down and here you can choose your date format. The date format you want to use on your website. Usually like to keep the default settings. Of course, don't forget to choose your time zone, because according to this time zone, you will see various blog posts that are posted on your website or the products added and so on. So just choose your time zone. And other than that, you don't need to do any adjustments right here and you can hit Save Changes. Alright, let's go to riding tab here. We don't need to do any adjustments. Everything is as it is by default. So let's go to Reading tab. In Reading tab, you can basically do some adjustments to the information, to the content that is displayed on your website at the moment, we're not going to do any adjustments in later stages of creating our website. We will do some changes right here. I'll show you what those changes are for. Basically, we will set a homepage for our website that is going to be the front page of our website. We're going to add a blog page to display blog posts. So this is what we're gonna do a bit later. Now we're not going to change anything because we don't even have those pages ready. So those things will be done in later stages of setting up our website. This is just a common practice, but it's good for you to know what quick introduction of various steps that are right here. Alright, from here we can move to discussion tab. This tab discussion is responsible for the comments that are on your website. So your visitors are going to leave comments. They might leave reviews under your products if it's gonna be your eCommerce store. And this is where you can do various adjustments. You can play around with these settings right here. But I'm going to be honest, the only adjustment that I do right here, I like to activate this option right here. Comment must be manually approve. So once I was there gonna leave a comment, the comment will be shown right here. So I'm just going to open this one in a new tab. And as you can see right here, we have one comment that was added by default. And once I activate this option right here, as you can see, this comment was approved automatically, it was added just automatically. Default comments. And I'm just going to click on Approve. And as you can see, once WR, once your visceral going to comment under Europe blog posts or that was going to leave a product review. This comment will be unapproved. So you will have to approve this comment yourself manually. And the reason why I like to do this, because at some point once your website starts to grow, once your website starts to get more and more traffic, there's a huge chance that you're going to start getting spam comments. And you don't want those comments to appear under your content because it's not going to look too good and you're gonna need to delete those comments enemies, so it's the best for you to keep this one active right here, and you can approve the comments manually yourself. Just click right here a proven the comment will be approved automatically. If you want like that comment, you can delete this comment or you can mark this comment as a spam as well right here. The other quite important tab that I like to use myself is this one. Instead of using this one for moderating comments, I like to disallow comments. So once you start getting those spammy comments right here, you will notice the pattern that usually those comments going to have the same commentator URL address added to a comment, or maybe the same email address. Maybe these comments going to have the common keywords among those comments, like the ones that are repeating in every single comment. So you want to copy any of those things. Right here you will see the IP address of the commentator. We cannot see the P address under this comment because this comment was added automatically by default. So we're not able to see the IP address, but once someone is going to leave a common, you're going to see that. And you can copy this IP address and paste it right here. So just paste one IP address or e-mail address, or the URL or the keyword one parallel line to disallow these comments. So if this is spammy commentator gonna go ahead and leave you another comment or spammy common. This comment will be deleted automatically so you will not need to approve this comment or disapprove. So this is going to help you to save a lot of time. But when you are starting fresh and your website is new, it might take some time until you start getting those spammy comments, but it's good to know how you can combat with these comments. And you wouldn't need to worry in later stages of running your website. This is the real life example. This is one of my websites that I'm running myself. And as you can see, this website gets quite a lot of spammy comments. So just besides approving them myself manually and besides the leading them, I usually like to identify the common keywords and the comments itself, the most used or repeating Email addresses, URLs or IP addresses. And once I identify those swings, I just copied those things and a paste them right here in this window and disallowed common keys, just one per line. Alright, so now you should know how everything looks. Alright, we can scroll down. And as you can see your ion here, you can do some adjustments to your avatar of your profile. I usually like to hide avatars because it helps to load website a bit faster. It's a very small thing, but I like to do those things as well. So I usually like to hide avatars, but it's up to you if you want to display avatars, those avatars will be displayed under your blog posts. If you're going to add blog posts to your websites, you're going to show your avatar's. So you can choose an avatar you want to use, or you can set your own avatar. But I usually like to hi, This one. Again, it's up to you if you want to do that as well. But this one right here, I meant this one is quite important. So once you have finished doing changes, you can click Save Changes. Alright, let's go to Media tab. This one is also good as it is by default, because we don't really need to change anything. Everything is good as this by default. Alright, let's go to permalink. This one is extremely important. So right here and permalink, you can see The Structure of the URL, basically how your URLs is going to look to your visitors. So for example, if I would go to our homepage right here, I'm going to show an example. So this is our URL. And if I would go to sample page, as you can see, this is how it looks. So we have our domain name, we have slash index.php, and we don't really need this part to display because it doesn't do any good for SEO, for search engine optimization. And we want our URLs to look simple. So instead of choosing this one, Let's choose this one post name, and let's hit Save changes. For example, if I would go back to this side right now, again to our homepage and not the side. I would click on the sample page. As you can see, this is how it looks. This is the structure we want to use because it's much better. It's much easier to understand per hour visitors and it's much easier for search engines to understand. So we want to keep this one, alright? So don't forget hit Save Changes and every time you make changes. And from here we can move to this tab privacy. At the moment, we don't have our privacy policy page already. In later stages, I will show you where you can create your privacy policy pages, Thompson conditions, and all other Important Pages for your website where you can generate them automatically. So you wouldn't need to hire people to ride those pages for you. But for now in this step, we don't need to change anything except we can set privacy page. So we would have it set and we wouldn't need to come back to this tab over again. So let's click, use this page. And now it's set and now we can leave it as it is. Alright, we can go right here to this stamp, but we're not gonna do any changes in this tab as well. Because those changes that are here, those options that are here at W14, the plugin, as you remember when we were in our Plugins page, I'm just going to open in a new tab real quick. As you can see, we have breeze Plugin and these settings right here. I've done for this particular breeze plugin. This plugin is responsible for optimizing your website. So your website will load faster for your visitors. And right now, everything is good as it is by default, we don't really need to change anything. But in the future, if you will decide that you want to learn how to optimize your website even better. Because I know this from my own experience. As you continue growing your website, as you continue improving your website, one very important point will become websites speed. But with a fresh website, you're going to have fast loading website anyway. But eventually, you might want to improve the website speed. Maybe your website will grow even bigger and this might become more important to you. I believe I will make another course on that. So if you are taking discourse that course and optimizing your website will be ready for you. And I'm doing this because there's a lot of things you can tweak. There's a lot of things you can change to make your website load fast. But again, you will suit yourself that this freshly created website will load fast in any case. Alright, so this is it, these were the most important WordPress Settings. So to sum it up, one of the most important settings where in this general tab, in this discussion tab and in permalink step. So this is it for this lesson 15. (2.3) Plugins and Themes Explained: Alright, let's talk about themes and plug-ins. Now we already talked about them in the previous lessons, but now are all focus will be on those two things. Alright, so let's go to themes around here. And as you can see in this page, we can see all the themes that are installed on our website. Basically, Themes are responsible for the design part of your absence. So different themes have different customization options. With various themes you can achieve different looks and so on. In this course, I will show you the methods, the themes I use myself, the proven themes that you can trust and that are fast loading. But again, it is important for you to know what themes are, where you can find them. Because maybe in the future you will decide that you want to update your website and you want to change the Theme. So you will know where to look for themes and you would know what our Themes responsible for. So right here is you can see we have this beam actor. This is how our website looks when this beam is active. For example, if I would go to the homepage of our website, I'm just going to open this in a new tab. As you can see, this is how our website looks. I know it doesn't make much sense because this is the default website. But basically you can understand that this is the design of this website. This is how it looks. And it only looks this way because this website, this WordPress website, is using this theme. Of course, you can do customization options, but right now, this is how the default version of this beam looks. If we would choose this beam, Let's say we would click right here live preview. As you can see, this is how our website would look with this FEM active. Of course, we can change the content, we can add our images, we can add our blog post products and anything like that. But the default version of this beam would look this way. So as you can see, it's kinda different looking website, but it still doesn't look too good. Alright, since we are not going to use this when we can close it right here. Alright, so if you would want to add a new theme, you will have to go right here, Add New Theme. And as you can see, we have loads of themes available. We have our 5,000 themes that you can use on your WordPress website. Usually Themes for eCommerce websites are in different category because eCommerce Themes are more customizable. Themes for blogs and business websites are a bit more simple. But if you are looking for themes and you want to go through the list of all those themes, you can even use filter. So right here, what type of themes you are looking for? And you can use those filters. If we would go back, you could use Search to look for certain themes. Again, it's up to you if you would like to use Themes. But in this course I will show the themes I use myself that are proven, but it is important for you to know where you can find themes. So this is one place where you can find themes. Usually all Themes right here are three mu, so that means they have free and paid versions. And usually with free versions, you don't have a lot of customization options and you will not be able to create a truly unique-looking website. So you will need to purchase a paid version. And usually if themes that are right here, usually those themes costs around $60 per year. So you will have to pay each year for a premium theme from this list. Of course, it doesn't apply to all the themes right here. But most of these themes, they have such two options. They have free and premium version. There's another place where I like to buy my premium themes and it is a completely other websites. So I'm just gonna go to this website to show you how it looks. This is the place where I like to get my premium themes. So for example, if I would go to WordPress tab right here and that would click popular items, you will find popular themes. For example, if I'm going to open this theme, as you can see, this theme going to cost you $69. But the best part is with all the themes that now here on this website, they only are only with onetime fee. So they only come with one-time fee. You only need to pay for those themes once. And basically those themes belong to you. You will not need to pay every year $69. So it's just onetime fee. Alright, so this is the other place where you can look for those themes and those streams that are right here on this website cannot be found here. And if you want to add this FEM, you will need to upload once you purchase that Theme. And you will need to upload the file right here, this Theme, and you will need to install that Theme. It doesn't necessarily mean that you will go and use those other themes right away. But like I said, it is important for you to know what our themes, how to use them, what options are available. And it's just good to know that you're going to have more options in the future. Alright, so Themes are responsible for the design part of your website. Now let's talk about Plugins. Let's go to Plugins. And as you can see right now, we have to plug in SAG do so like I told you, this plugin is responsible for speeding up our website, and this plugin is responsible for adding extra layer of security to our website. So basically Plugins are responsible for adding new features to your website. Even if you want to add an eCommerce feature to your website, you're going to need to install plugin that is called WooCommerce. So to install a new plugin, you will need to go around here. As you can see right here, there are plenty of plugins available for adding values, different features to your website. Of course, in the future, maybe you're going to decide that you want to add some other feature to your website. And this feature wasn't shown in this course. Maybe you'll want to do some changes. You can use various plugins. So there are plenty of plugins available for barriers of different features. And you can basically use Search to look for those Plugins. And of course, if you would go to this website, there are such Plugins right here as well. And just like with Themes, those Plugins and two versions, so they come with a free version and premium version. And usually a premium version will cost you. Of course, it's going to cost you less than a theme. And some cases it might cost similar to a Theme fee. But yeah, those Plugins right here, they might cost you on the early basis. You might need to pay on early basis for premium plugins. But if you would purchase Plugins from here, again, you would own those Plugins basically. Alright, so Plugins are responsible for adding various features to your website. And in this course we're not going to use paid plug-ins because we can easily set up good-looking, a professional-looking, a functional website even without using premium plugins. So probably now you understand what plugins are used for. And of course, it is important to note that if you are looking for certain feature to add a feature to your website, let's say to Add Forms to your website so your visitors would be able to use those forms and they could leave you messages. Then of course, it doesn't mean that there's only one Plugin responsible for this future. There are plenty of plug-ins for the same feature available. For example, if I would tie up a Keyword forms. As you can see, we have a lot of different versions available. We have our 1,000 plugins available for this particular feature of adding Contact Forms to your website. So it's similar to phone apps. There are plenty of apps for various different features. Alright, so now we can close those two tabs, I believe. And probably now you understand what themes and plugins are. Four. Themes are responsible for the design part of your website. And Plugins are responsible for adding a new functionalities to your website. So that's all for now 16. (2.4) Content Types: Let's focus on the types of content we have on our WordPress website and the previous lessons, we already talked about them a little bit and we're going to focus on posts and pages. You might be wondering why it's so important and why I'm repeating myself. I think it is very important because in the past I have gotten various questions from the people asking how those two things are different. And as I remember myself and a bass that had some issues understanding the difference between those two things. So for example, let's start with Pages and let's go to All Pages. And like I mentioned you before, pages are static type of content. When you are creating your website, you're not going to have a lot of pages. Once you have finished grading your website, probably, that's it. These will be the pages you're going to have on your website once you've finished grading your website, of course, in a Pages tab right here, you're going to have such pages as privacy policy right here, terms and conditions. If you're going to run an eCommerce store, you're going to have Shipping and deliver information or refunds and returns policy and all other Important Pages, search pages, of course as cookies policy and so on. So those are going to pages that you're going to have on your website. Of course, you're going to have such page as blog page as well for displaying your blog posts. Because you need to have a page in order to be able to display the blog posts that you're going to post right here by clicking Add New, and you're going to have such page as homepage. The homepage is going to be the front page of your website. So for example, if you're going to Add a Contact Us page, where are you going to add this page? You're not gonna go right here and Posts and you're not going to click right here, Add New Post just because it's easier or more customizable. Know, you're gonna go right here, you're going to click Add New. I'm just going to open in new tab. And as you can see, this is how it looks. This is where we can add our pages and simply just type the title of the page. And here you can add information and later lesson I'll show you how to create those pages. And for now we can close this tab. And yet, if you're going to Add a Contact Us page, you're going to use pages that this page. So let's go to pose. Alright, let's go to all pose. And like I mentioned you before, you solve for adding blog posts. So if you are running almost any type of website, there is a huge chance that you're going to have a lot of blog posts. I highly recommend writing blog posts because by writing blog posts you can attract more visitors to your website. Alright, so for example, I'm going to click this blog posts and I'm going to open a new tab and I just want to go to All Pages 1 more time norms is going to click right here. And I'm going to open you this sample page in new tab as well. Now, let's compare those two pages, how they are different. Let's compare this page to this blog post. So it's can see it looks quite the same. Blog posts. We have various information that is added right here. It was added by default. And as you can see right here, we have comments section. So that's something we don't have in our page. This is the sample page and it's quite simple as you can see, it doesn't have too much compared to a blog post, because blog posts has common section. Of course, it is possible to activate common section four pages, but it's not a common practice and I do not recommend you doing this. So, alright, there's, you can see there's a clear difference between pages and blog posts. Alright, we can close this. And if I would go back to boast right here, and I would click all posts. As you can see, this is the list of all posts. As you can see, both have categories that they have tags. Usually tags I used to scribe ensure towards what this blog post is all about the most important keywords and so on. And as you can see, it has common section, it has publishing date and so on. So once you're going to have more blog posts right here in this list, you will see who's the offer, and you will see the category of this blog posts, tags, comments, and so on. To Add a new blog posts, you will have to click right here. And I will show you that this whole panel, this whole dashboard looks identical to the previous one when we click to Add New Page, alright, even though it looks the same, but here we have some different adjustments here where we can do some adjustments to post where we can choose categories and tags, add featured image and so on. Alright, so this is the main difference. The main difference is that pages are used for displaying static content, important content to your visitors and Posts I use to add various blog posts and formative blog post, valuable information to your visitors where they could read interesting things, valuable things. For example, if I'm creating a pet store where I'm focusing only on cat products. So I'm going to have pages such as about Contact, terms and conditions, privacy policies, shipping and delivery, and all those other similar pages in blog posts, I could add various blog posts with valuable information for more visitors. And those blog posts would have different categories. So for example, I could have such category as breeds where I could talk about various different Cadbury's, where I could share various Cat Facts about certain Cadbury's. I could also have such category as health and care, where I could share various steps in different blog posts for helping your CAT, for helping your older cat and so on. So you probably now understand what is the main difference. Because I know from the experience that there are some people who can find this kind of difficult to understand. Of course, when you have an eCommerce site, you're going to have another type of content that is going to be products. But usually this is not so confusing. Products are quite simple and the main issue is when we're talking about pages and posts. So now you should understand what are postwar and pages were much better. And from here we can move on to other lessons 17. (2.5) Creating Important Pages: Alright, so in this one we are going to create the most important pages for our website. Those pages are gonna be terms and conditions, privacy policy, shipping and delivery About Us page, Contact, Us page. Of course, you're going to create such pages as Homepage. So we will have this page once we install Ciao website, we would be able to work on the Homepage and the next page that is going to be also very important is gonna be a blog page. Of course, at the end of the day is going to be completely up to you if you want to write blog posts to your eCommerce store if you want to add those. But I always highly recommend you to do that because it gives you extra edge and you're gonna get more visitors to your website. And that means there's a bigger chance that you're gonna get more customers. Alright, so to create your page, of course you remember, you have to go right here and let's check all the pages 1 more time. And let's delete this page because we're not going to use this page. As you can see, we already have privacy policy. It was created automatically as you saw it yourself. It's quite good. It's quite good. I'm not gonna lie, but of course, it might be a better option to use this automatically created page for bloggers, for small business websites that represent a brand or a business and not an eCommerce website. But we can keep this page and later we're going to edit this page. So first things first, let's create the first page. And the first page that I want to create is going to be About Us page. So let's click Add Page. Alright, right here we will need to add a title to our peers. So just give a title about and that's it. So before we move on, I believe it is important to give you a quick walk-through of all the tools we have right here. So all the tools right here, this tab right here, this sidebar, I'm not a tab, but sidebar with various options. Here is just for editing your page. So as you can see, you can do some changes to URL. You can add author, but it's not necessary at all. You can add featured image, you can add comments, allow comments, but we're not going to do any changes right here. This sidebar is very important when you are adding blog posts, because there you will need to select some things, add a featured image for your blog post. But when you are working with pages, he didn't really need to do that. The biggest focus will be right here. Once you click on this plus symbol, you will get various blogs. So as you can see, we have all kinds of blogs. We have a paragraph block for adding just the texts paragraphs. We have Heading blog for adding headings, we have a list blog, and as you can see, we have imaged blogs and all kinds of other blogs. To be honest, when you are creating pages, you've probably going to use just a paragraph block, heading block, and maybe image, if that's something you want to use. Or maybe you're going to use some embed codes like YouTube embed videos to talk about your business. Maybe you want to include a video where you introduce you are eCommerce store or talk about your story. In that case, of course, you can add videos. But again, I highly do not recommend to add videos directly to your WordPress website, because if you're going to do that, is going to slow down your website. So we want to use YouTube instead. So simply just add your video to YouTube and then just use this embed, for example, like that. And just paste your video URL right here and click embed. This way your video will be added to your page. And this way it's not going to use resources of your website. In this way, your video going to use the resources of YouTube. So it's not going to slow down your website. So this is very important. Alright, so like I showed you, these are blogs. And when you are adding your content, you can simply start typing this content right here, just stuck wherever you need. Once you hit Enter, it's going to open a new paragraph. So you're going to have another block with a paragraph. I usually like to write down all the information, all the important information and Google Docs or any other document. And once I'm done with that, I just paste this information. So that's exactly what I'm gonna do. I have already prepared some information about my business in advance and then I'm just going to paste this information here and you will see how it looks. Alright, there's, you can see I just pasted information about my website and this is how it looks. It's not too much, but when you are writing about texts, about your website, actually you don't really need to write too much information. But I believe it is important and it is essential because at the end of day you want to tell about your businesses this way you're going to look a bit more trustworthy. Your visitors, your potential customers will know you a bit better. So I highly recommend used to create your about page. Just write it down, write it on Google Docs or anywhere you want, and just paste this information here. So I'm going to show you how to add an image to this page, to this about page. So like I showed you before, once you click right here, you'll find various blogs and here's an image block. So simply drag this block and drop it anywhere you want. Alright, so if you want to add an image, just click right here Media Library, of course, you could have clicked to upload, but I usually like to do this from media library. So let's click Select Files And just a second. This is the folder I want to open, and this is the image I'm planning to use. Alright, so I'm not going to add any title. I'm not going to change anything. This is going to be as Seo aspects, search engine optimization aspect. And I'm going to tell you about this in later stages of discourse, probably the latest stage of this course. Alright, so just select an image. Let's click Select. And as you can see, our successfully added an image. This image, it doesn't make too much sense, but actually it looks kinda good. Alright, you can preview the changes you made. Once you click right here, you can click Preview Nan. As you can see, this is our about page. It's simple looking about page. Of course, this is not how it's going to look once we have finished working on our eCommerce store, because we're going to install another Theme and we're gonna do all the customization options and it's gonna look a bit better than that. But you can get a quick draft. You can get better vision of how it's going to look. It looks quite simple. So as you can see, this is how it's done. Now we can close this Preview tab as well. You can preview how it's going to look on tablet and mobile and so on. So we can close this one. And another thing that I wanted to show you, you can do adjustments, do a particular blogs. So once you click on a block, in this case on an image blog, we can do changes to this block, as you can see right here, we have various adjustments. This is the blog tab of this particular blog that is image. And you can do some changes right here. So we can change the alignment of this image. So we can align this image left. It doesn't look too good, but we can keep it as it was before. And if you would click right here, you could do some other adjustments. At the moment. Just a second. I'm just looking for align center, align left. Alright, if you would do this, you could resize this image and you could make this image look like this. But it's not working too good. So let's make it. It was previously, I guess this was the previous version. Alright. So yeah, this is how it looks. As you can see. You can resize this image. You can do all those changes if you want, if you need to. So you will know how to add an image, How to Add and embed video. It's quite simple. I highly recommend you to write down all the information on Google Docs or any other document file and then just paste this information right here. So as you can see, we have different blogs for each paragraph. You can do adjustments right here if you will need to add a heading elements. Let's say right here, where was it? This is the heading element. Just paste it right here. Second level of heading is set. So that's exactly what you want to use and just type the text you want to use. For example, our story. And you can click Preview one more time and a new tab again. And this is how it's going to look. Of course, at the end, it's going to look a bit better because we're going to change the Theme. And at the end of this course, we're going to make sure that everything looks fine, everything looks great. So now we can close this tab and we can click Publish. Alright, let's click Publish one more time. Alright, we can go back to the list of all our pages. And the next page that we're going to create is going to be Contact page. So just add a title right here. Contact or Contact Us. It's up to you what type of title you want to use. I'm just going to use Contact and I'm going to click Publish this time I'm not going to add any information because once we install a theme with a new theme, we will have more options, more customization options. We will be able to include the Contact Form. And you will see yourself that with this Contact page, we're going to need to use more customization options from the Theme itself. And right now, we can create just a blank page. We just want to have all the pages already so we wouldn't mess up our workflow. Alright, so we just published our contact page. It's live and now we can go back and I'm going to add the next page. The next page is gonna be terms and conditions. Alright? So I'm just going to type terms and conditions right here. And you might be wondering where to get terms and conditions for this page. Alright, I will share with you some of the methods I use myself, some of the ways I used to generate those Important Pages for our visitors, for our customers. Because if you're not going to have those pages, you're not going to look trustworthy. And of course, those pages actually to help you to protect your business. So there wouldn't be any loopholes. So of course, huge businesses like Amazon, they have all the lawyers and all the legal teams working on those things. But when you are just the small business, a, you shouldn't worry on that too much. Usually simple Templates, pages, they work and they do the job just well. Alright, so I'm just going to open for you a new tab and I will explain to you where our generate all the Important Pages. Alright, so I'll just open a new vendor. And as you can see, this is my Google Docs. And right here I have all the pages are neither have terms and conditions. I have Shipping and deliver information. I have privacy policy, I have returns and refunds, and of course I have cookie policy. Alright, so the question is, where did I get those pages? Actually, I didn't spend much time to generate those pages. It took me around 15 min and I have custom-made pages These are pages per my business. These are pages graded for online store, that is this one. And as you can see, it has all the needed information. Of course, if you want it to be sure that it works for you in better than this version. You can check other websites that you trust, check their terms and conditions, check their other legal pages, and see what you can take and you can adapt for your own website. But I will show you how are generated those pages. So I'm going to share with you the first method. And the first method is completely free at the moment, it is completely free. I don't know how it's going to be in the future, but there's such tool as Open ai.com. It is right here. You can see, just check the URL that is here. And it is a generator AI to basically with this tool, you can write all types of content, not just necessary, the Important Pages or any other pages you can write almost anything you can imagine. This generator is very powerful and it can pump out you all kinds of content. So I will show you what inputs are added. So I would get a terms and conditions space. So just a second, Let's scroll up. And this is the shipping and delivery page. Alright, terms and conditions. Alright, so this is what I entered right here and chat. Ask the, this Open AI tool, generate terms and conditions for an eCommerce website, bake on our catalyst.com. And this is what a God. This is what a god. It was pretty nice-looking page with terms and conditions. And it actually does the job. It looks professional, it looks trustworthy, and it has clear terms and conditions. So that's the most important thing. So just like that are generated, terms and conditions, just like that are generated shipping and delivery, as you can see, generate shipping and delivery for an eCommerce website, bacon over Carlos. Here we go. We have shipping and delivery in my case series United States. But in your case, it could be any other country. But again, if you are making your website in any other language, you might need to generate and later to translate this text. But it's not a huge problem. And as you can see here, we have clear shipping and delivery information. And of course, I might need to adjust this delivery information. I might need to add my own timeframe, but we basically have the biggest piece of information ready and we don't need to hustle ourselves writing this ourselves. We can use AI generator. So I'm going to show you what I did with privacy policy. I did the same. This is my input generate privacy policy for an eCommerce website, bacon avocados.com. And here we go. We have privacy policy page, just like it's completely free. This is the best thing. Alright, let's scroll down. We have generate returns and refunds for an eCommerce website. And this AI tool generates you all needed information. So you don't need to pay for people who are into this stuff. Usually it would cost you quite a lot. But with this tool, you can do this for free. I know that even people using this tool, they pass some exams. So that's how advanced this tool is. You can easily use this tool for Generating such pages as returns and refunds and so on. Alright, I generated cookies policy. So as you can see, this is what are entered. It is cookie policy and for eCommerce website, and I said that cookie is used for marketing purposes. So as you can see, this is even the description for the cookie. What is that? Usually is such websites as Facebook. When you run ads on Facebook or when you run ads on Pinterest, they save cookies on your visitor's device. And this way you can do marketing campaigns. Good marketing campaigns, calculated marketing campaigns. This is how cookies work. And now this might be a bit advanced, but you don't really need to know too much about this. You just have to know how to write those pages, those Important Pages, and what information you want to include. Of course, I know that I'm going to run Facebook ads. So that's why I included cookies used for marketing purposes is gonna be Facebook. I'm going to run Pinterest ads. I'm going to run Google ads and also included cookies used for analyzing, or maybe I could have included analyzing traffic. Because later in this course I will show you how to set up Google Analytics so you could analyze the traffic that is coming to your website. So you will know how many visitors you are getting, where those visitors are coming from. This way, you will be able to analyze how well your website is performing. So obviously, you want to include this one as well. This is how your input should look and just type this one, hit Enter and you will get cookies policy page ready for you. The second option that I used to do is I used to generate privacy policy with this tool, as you can see right here. And as you can see here, you will have to enter your details and hit Next, and you will get your privacy policy generated. And maybe this option could be better for bloggers, for small business websites, where those websites are meant to represent brands or businesses, because it's very simple privacy policy. But again, it's up to you if you want to check out this tool. I have used this tool in the past The last option that I use myself, that I have used in the past, actually I use this option for one of my websites. I have a premium option for this one. It doesn't cost much compared to all other plants. That compared to all other tools, not the plants, but maybe in the future is going to cause a bit more. But right now, this was the cheapest paid tool for Generating Important Pages As I could find. And this is what I'm using. So as you can see, but this tool, even with a free version, you can generate all kinds of pages. Those pages gonna be a bit limited compared to premium pages. I'm just going to login to this website and I'm going to show you how it looks. Alright, so this is one of my projects. As you can see, I have four pages in use out of five. So if I would click right here, manage, as you can see, these are all the pages I'm using. For example, if I would click terms of service, that is terms and conditions. Of course this page is not an English, but I just wanted to show you that such option exists. Alright, So to copy this all texts right here, the best option would be glucuronide here, HTML. And you would have to open this HTML file and a new tab and just copy all the texts right here and simply go back to your page and just paste all the information here. And it's going to be copied and pasted without losing its Style or anything like that. So you can use this option as well. So this is the paid option. It's quite cheap. I use it myself. This is the other option. This one is quite limited. You can create privacy policy page. Of course there are some other options, but this is not the best option in my opinion, but even though it is quite limited, you can use it for smaller projects. And this is the last option that is probably the best. It's completely free. And with this option, with this tool, with this AI tool, you can generate those pages for free. Alright, so it's going to be up to you what option you want to use, but I just wanted to show you that such options exist. Alright? So of course I'm going to copy this terms and conditions text right here. And I'm just gonna copy it. And I'm going to go back to my terms and conditions page. Alright? And I'm just going to paste this information right here. Alright? So just a second, Let's go back. Let's check if lost numbers, yeah, last numbers. So instead of copying this way, I'm just going to copy the other way. Alright, let's go back and let's just a second. Just a second. Now it should work. Alright, so this is my terms and conditions page. And just a second, am I going to delete this blog? And now we can click Preview. Let's click preview. As you can see, this is how it looks. We have a fully done terms and conditions page, and we are done with this page. Now we can close this tab and we can actually click Publish, publish. Let's click one more time, and let's go back to the list of all our pages. And as you can see, these are the pages we have right now. So we have our about page. We are done with this page. We're going to finished working on this page and other lessons when we're going to install a theme, we are completely done with terms and conditions and privacy policies, so Jad are private. Suppose instead of grading new page, we can edit this page. As you can see, this is the information we have, so we can simply select all the information right here and we can delete it. Alright, so now it's gone. So now I'm just going to paste the text from the previous document. Alright, so I'll just add in my privacy policy and now I can click Publish. Let's click Publish one more time and we can click View Page. Let's see how it looks. And yet this is how it looks. Just like that. I'm going to go back and I'm going to go to pages, will go to All Pages. And I'm going to create, and I'm just going to add all the other missing pages. So I'm gonna skip this all process for you so you wouldn't get bored too much. And as you remember, let's click Add New and just add all the needed information. Alright, so as you can see, I just finished adding all the pages and all the pages can be found right here. So we have all the pages already. And as you saw it yourself, you have multiple options to generate those pages. You can use AI tool or you can use a paid option or any other option you want. Of course, if you want, you can check other websites, other websites policies, and you can try to come up with your own policies. Alright, so this is it for this lesson. Now you know how to create pages and how to generate information for those pages. 18. Section 2 Summary: Congratulations on completing the WordPress section. So now we know how this content management system works. What are the most important settings? And basically now you have a solid foundation of WordPress. So from here we're going to start working on our eCommerce part of our website. But since now, you know how WordPress works, this is where you will be able to create almost any type of website. You can imagine. This information that you just learned is gonna be useful for you, not just in creating online stores or eCommerce websites. But if you will decide that you want to create a blog, you're going to know how to use WordPress to create a blog or just a regular business website to represent brand or business. So this is a very powerful knowledge to know how to use WordPress. And a lot of websites use WordPress for a reason because it's a truly great content management system. So congratulations. Now you know how to use WordPress and we are getting closer to our eCommerce website. Of course, there are a lot of things left to do, but now you know how to use WordPress. Great job 19. (3.0) Getting Started With WooCommerce: So we are done with the WordPress section. And now we're going to start with WooCommerce section. Woocommerce is a plugin and as you probably remember Plugins and half, we're adding various functionalities to your WordPress website. Since we are done with WordPress part, we're going to move on to WooCommerce part. And WooCommerce is a plugin that adds an eCommerce functionality to our website. So to install a plugin, and you probably remember you have to go right here and click Add New. And right here in search bar type WooCommerce. Alright? And as you can see, this is the plugin we want to use. As you can see, it has over 5 million active installations. So we add this is how popular this plugin is and we can click install now. Alright, let's click activate. Alright then right here we're going to need to fill up all the information. Just select your country, your region. Because depending on the selected region, you're going to have different time zone or different types of settings. So here, this is where you should select your country. And if you would activate taxes on your WooCommerce store. And I'm going to show you how it's done. This information, this address, the country and everything else will be used to calculate taxes automatically. So you will not need to install any separate Plugins. It will be done automatically for you. You just have to select your address, alright? If you're not ready for that, of course you can skip. Let's click Continue. Let's not share any data With WooCommerce because we don't want to slow down our website. Just select your industry. Of course it's not necessary, but let's make it other. And of course, you can choose what type of products you're going to sell. This course you're going to create, store but physical products. So let's keep it as it is, but as you can see, there are other options available as well. So using WooCommerce, you can create an online store, not just for physical goods but for downloadable goods. So digital products, you can create subscription-based websites. You can create memberships, type of websites, and all other types of websites as well. Alright, let's click Continue. If you want, you can select some information right here. How many products do you plan to display? We can select 11-100 currently selling elsewhere, not guess not. And we can click Continue. Let's see what free extensions they offer to us. Alright, just a second. We can disable this one. We can keep that one and we will see if you're going to need this plugin a later when we are going to set up Payment Gateways, we're going to check if we're going to need this plugin. If you're not going to need, we're going to replace this Plugin with other option. Alright, we can uncheck this one because it's not going to help us at all. Neon firm which says it's for security. No worries about that. We're not going to need male poet. I'm going to need this one. We're not going to need this one because we can install this plugin ourselves manually and we can install even a better version than this one. Alright, just a second. Alright, we can leave this one. Pinterest users are going to find out products. They will be able to pin our products to their boards. So extra reach for us. So this is good. We can keep this one right here, Facebook for WooCommerce, we can keep this one as well. But just a second, let me think about that. No, we actually don't need this one because Facebook has its own plugin for that and it works much better than WooCommerce plug-in so we can disable this one. And TikTok again, if you're going to decide that you want to run TikTok ads in the future. You can install this plugin, but alive to keep everything light Where did as possible because I don't want to make our website to load slow. I want to our website to load as fast as possible. So that's why I disabled so many plug-ins because there are better versions than those that are offered right here. And in later lessons you will see that yourself. Alright, let's click Continue. And since we installed WooCommerce and we added eCommerce functionality to our website. The previous theme that was active, It's this one. It's not going to work very well with WooCommerce. And of course, in later lessons we're going to install other themes. But for now, let's choose this beam that comes by default With WooCommerce. And by installing this week, we're going to have a better look, better understanding of our eCommerce website. So we just installed WooCommerce plug-in. And just like that, we added an eCommerce functionality to our website. So as you can see, this is how it looks. As you can see our WordPress dashboard God, bigger, much bigger Because right now we have WooCommerce products, payments, Analytics. And probably with payments we can disable this plugin because it's not going to help us much. That is going to be a bit different plugin. But as you remember, let's practice one more time and let's go to Install Plugins, and let's select WooCommerce payments. Let's deactivate this plugin and let's click Delete because we're not going to need this plugin. We're going to install other plug-ins for payment options that are proven and that truly work. Alright, so this is how it looks. As you can see, our WordPress dashboard got bigger and now our website has eCommerce functionality. We would go to visit our site. As you can see, it looks a bit different. It has a shopping cart. It doesn't have any products because we haven't added any products. But right now, our website looks completely different from the previous version. Alright, so this is it for this lesson, we had a quick introduction into WooCommerce. And now you know that WooCommerce is a plugin that adds eCommerce functionality your website. And we installed some of the plug-ins, but we did an install all the plugins that came with this WooCommerce plugin. Because in later stages of discourse, we're going to use other plug-ins that do a better job than these that were listed. Alright, so that's all for now. 20. (3.1) WooCommerce Dashboard Walkthrough: Alright, since we have our WooCommerce already now I can give you a quick walk-through of the WooCommerce itself. So let's go to the dashboard. And once you go down, as you can see, the very first step is WooCommerce. So if you would click right here and Home tab, it's kinda similar as it was, but Dashboard tab right here for WordPress itself, for home. So right here you're going to see various steps that you can take for adding various details, store details, How to Add products, setup payments at taxes, shipping costs and everything. But in this course I'm going to show you how that's done without needing to follow any of these steps. But if you are interested, you can explore everything yourself are always recommend everyone to explore all the tools, all the dashboards themselves. Because this way you're going to learn how to use particular tool much better. Alright, from here we can go to orders. This tab, you're going to find all the orders. So once a customer places an order and he buys something from you, this is where you will see this order. Alright, I'm gonna show you it looks real quick on my website. Yeah, and as you can see, this is how it looks and this is the list of orders that you're going to have yourself. Alright, let's go to customers. Obviously at a moment it is empty. We don't have any customers. But again, I will show you how it looks. As you can see, this is one of my stores and this is how it looks, how the list of customers looks. Right here, you'll be able to see how many orders are particular customer placed if it was his first-order or second-order bird. And here you will see the average value of order and so on. Alright, we can go to Coupons right here. You will be able to create various Coupons, as you can see, once we clicked here Coupons, it took us here into Marketing tab and we went to Coupons automatically. So basically this step Coupons and this tab Coupons is the same. Alright, let's click reports right here. You'll see various reports. The past I used to use this one to check all the reports before WooCommerce updated Plugin. Nowadays, they have this tab for Analytics. It is more in depth and yeah, I don't use this much anymore, but as you can see, this is how it would look if once you start getting orders and you can check how many orders Egon, how many sales you made. And you can check this by month. You can check customers, you can check stock, sales by product and all other things. So once you start getting orders or even before getting your first-order, you can explore everything yourself. So just understand what works for you. What doesn't, what information might be important or not. It's convenient to give a quick look how good you are doing a certain week, a certain month, or even a year. Alright, Settings tab. We're gonna go back in the next lesson. There is quiet, more things to talk about it. So we can go to status Add and status tab. Actually don't need to do anything. It just for checking status if everything is alright. Here you can check logs to see there were any issues and errors or anything like that. But yeah, usually don't use this status tab too often because once you are set, you are set. You don't really need to worry too much, of course in the future, you can check logs to see if there were any errors or anything like that. And again, don't be afraid to explore everything yourself. If you would go to Extensions tab, as you saw previously when we were setting up our WooCommerce plug-in. If we install some extensions that basically we are ligands. And here you will find some other extensions that are basically other Plugins. But again, I will show you the Plugins I use that are guaranteed to work and those options truly going to work and they not going to mess up your website. Alright, so this is for this WooCommerce step. Now we can go to Products, Alright? If you would click all products, you will have a category of products. So this is how it's going to look once you add products. And for now, our list of products is empty because we haven't added any product set right here. This tab is for adding products. So later on I will show you how to add products categories before adding products, of course, you're going to create categories for those products. Tags, again, tags are used to describe a products or even blog posts, but this time has focused on products. So for example, if you have a blue tiger print purse, than you might want to include tags as such as birth, blue Tiger brand, blueprint. And these would be tags that will help to identify a product by taking some specifications of this products. So once a service or clicks on that particular tag, for example, if that customer clicks on a per stag, he will go to all the lists of products that have this particular tag that is called births. If there are more products with other tags that I mentioned you before? And they're going to see those products in those stacks. So that's what tags are four. Alright, if I would go to attributes, attributes are basically specifications and that I use for your product. Let's say if you are going to have a product that has different sizes, it has large, small, medium, and all other sizes. Those attributes will be listed right here. So that's what it is, but you're not going to need to add those attributes right here yourself. It's basically, we're checking all the attributes you have on your website, but you will add those attributes yourself when you are adding products. And I will show you how that's done. So you won't need to focus on this tab right here too much. Every would go to reviews. Obviously we're going to have list of reviews, but since we don't have any reviews, we don't have any reviews. And as you probably remember when we were doing some changes right here in discussion tab, we activated to manually approve comments. So in this case, review is considered as a comments. And if you're gonna get a review, because sometimes there are spam or abuse as well. So once you get a review, you can approve it or you can delete it, or you can do anything you want because you're going to start getting spammy comments under your blog posts. There's a huge chance that you're going to start getting spammy comments, spammer reviews, not the comments under your products as well. You're going to need to delete those. Alright, in Analytics tab, obviously we're going to have various Analytics. So this one is for you to explore. We could say it's your homework. Don't be afraid to explore those tabs right here. Right now there's not too much information, so I cannot show you anything, but here you can check how many sales you made this month compared to previous month, this year compared to previous year and so on, right here and Products tab, you're going to see how many products you saw, how many items, how many variations and so on. So if you're able to go to Revenue tab here, you will see various information about the revenue, how many sales you got, how many coupons were used, and so on. So this one is all about the money orders. Of course you're going to see the orders, how many orders you made and so on. If we would go to variations again, you will see how many variations you sold off particular item and all other similar information. Here you will see sales by category. If we would go to Coupons, you will see how many discounted orders you made and pretty much that's N taxes. If you're going to activate taxes on your online store, this is where you gonna see information about the taxes, how much you made with taxes and how much you sold, and how much of that is taxed. So this is where you're going to see this information. Downloads. We are not using any digital products. We're not selling any digital products. But if you would sell digital products, this is where you would see this information. So this is where you would see this information. Start right here. You will see information about the stock. So you will see, but products are low in stock and so on. This is very useful if you have your stock and this helps you to check if you are low in stock. And in any case, once you add a product, I will show you where you can set Emails, Notification Emails that will notified that a certain product is low in stock. So you will never miss a product that is out-of-stock because you're gonna get Notification Emails and in Settings here you can do some adjustments to change how the data is presented for you. But I actually don't do any changes right here, Marketing tab. So if you would go to overview, we have this extension, Pinterest extension that we can set up. And then later lesson, I will show you how you can set up this extension, are probably going to show you how to set up Facebook extension as well and those for marketing. But basically you're going to use this extension to connect your product feed with Pinterest. That's gonna be much easier. And you're going to use this to connect your Pinterest profile With WooCommerce. So you wouldn't need to do this manually by adding any Codes or anything like that. Because just like Facebook, just like any other social media platform, they have their pixels that are basically used to identify your products and to identify your visitors. So you could run a successful marketing campaigns. You could do re-marketing campaigns and all those other things. Alright, then Coupons, as you said yourself, this is where you can create Coupons and yeah, that's pretty much it. So once you install WooCommerce, you're going to have extra free tabs added to your WordPress website. So this is the first, second, and the third. So this is it, this is it for this lesson. Now, you know WooCommerce a bit better and you should understand what those all taps out for 21. (3.2) The Essential WooCommerce Settings: In this video, I'm going to show you the most important WooCommerce settings that can be found around here. As you remember, let's click on the Settings tab and let's start with a general settings. So obviously you want to type your address line first right here, enter your city choose country, and zip code. If you did this when we are installing WooCommerce, then everything should be good. You want need to change anything, but this is where you have to enter your address of your Ecommerce Store. And using this address, this basically WooCommerce plugin will calculate taxes automatically. Alright, let's scroll down and here, selling locations, you can choose a selling locations where you want to sell your products. So if you're not selling products for a global audience, you are selling your products for specific countries, then this is where you can choose, sell to specific countries, select this one and just choose countries from the list. By typing the country, you will find that country and just add this country to the list. If you are selling to all countries except to some of the other countries, then you can do exceptions right here by typing the countries where you are not selling your products. Alright? I'm going to keep it as sell to all countries and the shipping locations. So you can keep this one as it is. And default customer location, you can keep this one as well like that. And right here, if you are doing taxes, you can activate this one and taxes will be calculated automatically. Alright, so let's scroll down and let's see what else we have. We can keep everything as it is right here. We don't need to do any changes. Right here. You can select your currency. So this is where you can do that. I'm going to keep it to United States dollars, so that's good for me. And you can change the numbers, how many numbers people see, but we don't really need to change anything right here. Everything is good as it is by default. Alright, so once we have finished doing those changes, once you added information right here, don't forget to hit Save Changes. Now every time you do any changes, don't forget to do that. Alright, from here we can move on to Products tab right here. And in a product stab, believe we are not going to change anything. But again, if you using any other measurement units, you can change those units right here. Just choose the units you use. Very you are doing your business. Alright? So right here, we don't really need to do anything else. So just choose your weight units and dimensions. Once you have done this, hit Save changes as well. Around here as you can see, we have some other tabs. Forgot to mention to you. Alright, let's scroll down and right here, as you can see, once the stock of your products is getting low, you're going to be notified with email notification. And this is the e-mail. So basically, this is the same e-mail that I used to login to this WordPress dashboard. So this WooCommerce plugin is using my e-mail address that was added to my WordPress website. So it's using it by default. If you want to change that, you can change that if you want. And as you can see right here, you can change a low stock threshold once the stock hits to Products, I'm going to receive a notification message if you want, you can change it to one. So simply just like that. And once you have done those changes, hit Save Changes. Alright, downloadable products, we are not selling any downloadable products. We're not selling any digital products, so we're not going to focus on those two. And if we will go to Advanced tab, once again, we don't need to do any changes right here. Alright, so from here we can move on to Shipping tab. And actually in this Shipping tab, we're not gonna do changes because there's more things to talk about Shipping Zones. I will show you in another video how to create Shipping Zones. And you will be able to choose different shipping methods. Those methods are going to be paid or flat fee methods is going to be completely up to you right from here. If you would go to payments a, you will see all the payment methods we have available right now. But in later lesson I will show you how to activate payments by cards and payments by PayPal. So those are to the most popular payment methods. Of course, it depends if you live in any other country. Depending on a country, you might have some other Payment Gateways. So I'm not sure where you are from and if you are creating this eCommerce store for your native audience, then probably the best choice for you to use Google Search to look for Payment Gateways that particular for your country is. So let's say like bank payments or anything like that. But in this course I will show you to the most popular ones. And I believe those two are more than just enough. So I'm gonna show you how to add PayPal and how to add payments by credit and debit cards. Alright, from here we can go to accounts and privacy. So right here, I usually like to allow my customers to create their accounts. This is just a common practice. It's good to have an account at to be able to create an account on eCommerce store. So I highly recommend you to activate this option. This option, and that option as well. Alright, let's scroll down what else we have. Of course, you can also remove your customer's personal data. So let's say once a customer is inactive for certain period of time, if it's months or years, or days or weeks, you can set this number right here. I usually like to do those adjustments, two cancelled orders. I don't like to retain any data of cancelled orders. So let's say if customer cancels his order and after one month, just delete this data. But I usually like to keep it to one week. So let's say Once customer cancels here is order, I don't need his data anymore. Let's say there was a failed order, so we can keep it to one day as well because this is a common practice and I think it's quite good. Alright, once we have done with those changes, like always don't forget to hit Save Changes. Alright, let's go to Emails. Right here. In Emails you will see all the Notification Emails that you have on your WooCommerce store. Those are the e-mails that your customers receive and you're going to receive some of the Emails yourself. So let's say the customer places an order on your store, you're going to receive a notification email that there was an order successfully placed on your store. And this way you're going to be notified that there's a new order as well. You're going to be notified if there's a failed order and if you're going to cancel an order, you're going to be notified as well. Your customer will be notified about that as well. So what is important right here, you can add a title, the name of your basically email address, the sender of this e-mail that your customer going to receive the name of the sender. That's going to be the center of this Notification Emails. So you can add just the name of your website and right here add your email address. As you remember, we previously created our business email address, and that created and business email address with support at a bag and avocados.com. So I usually like to use this type of female address in this bar because let's say if a customer is going to have some issues with his order, he could easily reply to this notification email and you will receive this message to your business email address. So this is what is important in this tab. You have to add your business email address, in my case, is gonna be Support at the bacon avocados.com. So that's exactly what I'm gonna do. Here. You can do some customizations to the template of the email. Now, these e-mails are not the best looking. Of course, there are some plugins that you can use to customize emails even more to make them look better. But for starters, for beginners, it's going to work completely. Still use this template almost on all my websites and I'm still in progress of changing those default email templates. But I think for beginners it's gonna be just fine. We can click right here and we can check how this email template is gonna look. So as you can see, these are the colors and right here we could add a logo. So to add a logo, you're going to need to base this logo right here. So how to add a logo? You might be wondering, it's quite simple if you would go to media and I'm going to open media library and a new tab. So I'm just going to open this one in undo tab and I'm going to upload my logo. So this is the logo one to use. I'm just going to click Upload or I just a second. I'm going to click Edit just to make sure that I have derived URL. Alright, so I'm just going to copy this URL of this logo right here. I'm just going to click update just in case if there were any changes. And now I'm going to close this one. And all I have to do is just paste this URL right here. That's all I have to do. And now we can hit Save Changes. And once you hit Save Changes now you can click preview the Templates. So as you can see now we have our logo right here. And of course you can change the colors. So this one is going to be completely up to you. Alright? So let's go back and let's see what we have an integration tab actually, right here. We're not going to need to do any adjustments because everything is good as it is by default. Alright, let's move on to advance them. In advance tab, probably the only thing that we're going to do is we're going to select our terms and conditions page. So as you remember previously, we added those all Important Pages. So I'm just going to type this page right here. And I'm just going to select from the list that, alright, so right here we have various endpoints. If your website is gonna be in English. So there's no need to change anything right here. Having is as good as it is by default. So you don't really need to do any changes right here. But if you are creating your website for a native speaking language, for native audience, then you will need to change those end points right here. So if that's the case, later in discourse, I will show you how you can fully translate your online store. And you can basically make your online store in any language. So I will show you the most important things you have to do. But for now, everything is Good. So now we can hit Save Changes. And basically pretty much that's it. Of course we have some other tools right here, but again, we don't really need to do any changes with those tools. So this is it for this lesson. Now you know what are the most important settings for your WooCommerce store? 22. (3.3) How to Add Shipping Zones: This lesson, I will show you how to create Shipping Zones. So in the previous lesson, we skipped shipping and delivery. So let's go to Shipping tab and arrived here. If you would click Add Shipping Zones, you will be able to create a new Shipping Zones. So you have a lot of different options to create your Shipping Zones. Of course, it depends where you are shipping your products. If you are shipping your products globally, then you can simply create a global Shipping Zones. So for example, I'm just going to type a global shipping. And once you type global shipping, you don't really need to select an regions because this Shipping Zones will be applied automatically to all countries. Of course is not the best choice and not the most convenient one because you are shipping is going to cause depending on the country, depending on the state, if you're doing this in United States of America. But yeah, it is possible to create a global shipping zone and I'm gonna show you how to do that. So once you add this name right here, now you will need to Add Shipping methods. So we can add a flat rate right here. If you would add flat rate, Let's click Add method, and now let's click Edit. And right here you can select if this is taxable Shipping. So if you have activated your taxes and the WooCommerce settings that I showed you previously had the tax will be applied to the Shipping as well. So it's up to you. If you are not taxing Shipping, you can select None. And instead of flat rate, we can call this standard shipping. Alright? And for standard shipping, just type the cost. So I'm just going to type the cost. Let's say it's going to be $5 and let's hit Save Changes. Alright, so now this Shipping Zones, this global shipping zone that is right here, has one Shipping method that is standard shipping, but we can add more shipping methods. So for example, if I would select flat rate one more time, I will click add the shipping method. And now I'm going to click Edit and I'm going to select that it's not taxable and I'm going to type right here, express shipping. And obviously express shipping is going to cost more, so I'm gonna type of $15. Alright, let's get save changes. And as you can see now, this global Shipping Zones that is applied to global audience has to shipping methods. So it has standard shipping and express shipping. We can also add another Shipping method that is going to be free shipping. So if I'm going to click free shipping, I can click Edit. And instead of making just the free shipping, I can set that a person needs to spend a certain amount of money on our online store so he could get this free shipping options. So for example, I'm going to type at. So that means our customer needs to spend at least $80 on our store to get free shipping. If you would click this apply minimum order rule before coupon discount a, you will be able to offer free shipping. But let's say for customer has a coupon code and he spent on your store every $5. And once he activates that coupon, he's just going to pay $70 than if you're going to activate this option, your customer will be eligible for this free shipping new info. He's just going to pay $75. So that's why I'm not activating this one. So I'm just going to keep it like that and I'm going to click Save Changes. Alright, so as you can see now, we have free shipping methods. We are shipping globally and these are free shipping methods. So we have free shipping, express and standard shipping. Usually it's more than enough. You can also add any other shipping methods. So for example, if you want so you can click Add Shipping method right here one more time. Let's select flat rate and just a second right here. And flat rate, you can also type that it's going to be delivered by UPS, for example. You can type the cost. The cost again is going to be up to you. You can just use a flat rate, just an average you would spend on UPS delivery or something like that. So let's say if it's going to be $1, something like that, and we can hit Save Changes. So as you can see, just like that, you can add various shipping methods so your customers will be able to choose those methods. You can also swap places with these methods. So for example, once a customer is at a checkout page, this is the order he's going to see shipping methods. So he will be able to choose any shipping method he wants to use. Once you have done those changes, don't forget to click Save Changes. Alright, now we can go to Shipping Zones right here. And as you can see, we have a global shipping zone. So this is for global audience. Basically, every single person who's using our store, no matter where they are from, they're going to have those shipping methods. But of course we can create other Shipping Zones. So instead of using this global zone, you could delete this one and not to use that one. I just wanted to show you how that's done, how you can Add Shipping Zones and how you can add the shipping methods. So now instead of just adding shipping methods, now we could add a Shipping Zones. For example, if you truly know that you're gonna do business only in United States of America. So of course you want to have a zone that is going to be us, alright? And now you can choose from the list United States. Of course, you can go deeper into all Shipping Zones. You can create Shipping Zones by regions. But for example, if I'm going to use United States, I can Add right here Shipping methods just for United States. If it's not gonna be for United States, if it's going to be four, Let's say English-speaking audiences, then you could add some other regions as well. So let's say you could add United Kingdom, you could add a Canada, and so on. And this is how you can create Shipping Zones. For example, I'm just going to create United States, so I'm going to Add us. And just like the previous time, I added shipping methods. So there is a flat rate method. So let's click flat rate. And now you will need to edit this and you can add standard shipping just like the previous time. Choose if it's gonna be taxable or not, and just type the cost. And just like that Add Shipping method just to this particular Shipping Zones that is going to be united States. If I would save the Zona would only have one Shipping method for this shipping zone that is going to be united States. So for example, if I'm going to go back to Shipping Zones, now you see I have to Shipping Zones, but now it doesn't really make sense because this Shipping zone is Shipping everywhere. So instead of shipping everywhere, instead of using this Shipping global zone, now we only have one zone that is United States. So for example, if a customer visits your store and he tries to buy something, but he's not from United States, then he will not be able to choose any shipping method. That means the products are not delivered to location because there's no Shipping Zones. And if customers from us now he only has one Shipping method. That is standard shipping method, of course, as you saw it yourself, you can add more shipping methods, different shipping methods with different flat piece. And of course you can add a free shipping method, wants customer spends a certain amount of money. And you can also create just the free shipping method if you are doing free delivery. So in that case you will only have free delivery, free shipping method. But again, Shipping Zones are completely up to you. But I believe now you understand how that works, alright, but before we leave this Shipping Zones page, before we finished with this lesson, Let's go to other tabs. So if I would go to Shipping options, we don't really need to change anything right here. But if you would go to shipping classes, you can create Shipping glasses. So for example, why this is important. So let's say you have products that are extremely heavy. Though obviously, those products is going to need more expensive shipping. And let's say you also sell some fragile products. In this case, those products is going to require some extra care and it's gonna cost extra. So in that case, if you're going to have such products, if you're going to have such unique products, you can create Shipping classes. So for example, I'm going to create a shipping class and I'm going to name this glass, have a product. And now once filled the old information right here I can click Save shipping classes. And as you can see, I have one Shipping glass. And there's no products added to this class because I haven't added any products do this online store yet. But once we add products to this online store, I will show you where you can set a shipping class to a particular product that requires some expensive shipping or some extra care when handling this product. But again, it's completely up to you want to do that. This is one unique situation, but it's good to note that such options exists so wouldn't get lost when looking for ways how you can charge more for particular products for a Shipping. Alright, so once I added this glass, now I need to add a price for this class, how much this Shipping method is going to cost. So for example, if a customer adds that heavy product to their cart and once they go to checkout page, they're going to see that price, that particular price for this product, the shipping price, I mean, alright, so now let's go back to Shipping Zones. And as you remember, we have one Shipping Zones. If we would click right here Edit. Now we will be able to do changes to this standard shipping. So let's click Edit. As you can see now we have some more information here. So let's say if a product has this Shipping glass, have a product. So it's going to cost our customers, let's say $25. And now if I would type $5 right here, and let's say for customer tries to purchase a product and that product has this Shipping class attached to that product. Then discuss Summary will have to pay $25. If there are some products that do not have this Shipping cost, They just going to need to pay $5 for basically standard shipping. So you probably now understand, if you want to dive a bit deeper into debt, you can check even more complicated changes, adjustments. But I think to have this simple adjustment is quite good. And of course, it doesn't mean that you're going to need to use Shipping glasses, but I just wanted to show you where you can do that. Alright, once you have done this, we can hit Save Changes. And basically pretty much that's it. Now you should know how to create Shipping Zones. Now you should know how to Add Shipping methods to those zones as well. And the last thing is going to be completely optional. You can create Shipping glasses for extra care requiring products if they're Shipping, going to cause more, something like that. So this is how you can create those extra shipping classes. And this one is gonna be completely up to you, usually talking from the personal experience. I usually have free shipping methods. So I have free shipping method. Once a customer spends a certain amount of money, if it's gonna be $100 or something like that. I have a standard shipping method that is usually around $5 and I have express shipping method that is $15. So those are shipping methods my customer can choose. And of course, when you are working with a particular delivery provider, Shipping providers, you can look for their Plugins and they usually have those plug-ins. But again, it depends where you are from and where are you going to ship your products. So this is a bit complicated, a bit more in-depth thing. But like I said, usually those free shipping methods do the job. And let's say if your customer chooses a standard shipping method, you can use any shipping provider, any dilutive provider, you have, any carrier and your customer just going to receive this product based on this standard fee that you have. So basically you're going to look for the cheapest delivery option. And if you are Customer going to choose, let's say express shipping, then of course you're going to look for a faster shipping method where you can deliver your product faster and wants the product is shipped, you will always send your customer and email notification with his tracking details. So no matter what the Plugins that other providers use, they just kinda automate this part of bits with sending tracking numbers. But again, usually this simple setup with free shipping zones is more than enough 23. (3.4) How to Add Payment Gateways (PayPal & Stripe): In this lesson, I will show you how to Add Payment Gateways to your WooCommerce stores. So in this one I'm going to show you how to add PayPal payments and payments by card and credit cards. If you would go to payments, as you remember from the previous lessons, as you can see, these are the methods we have right now, but we're going to change that by installing some plugin. So let's go right here. Let's click Add New. And the plugin that you want to look for, for PayPal payments. It looks like this. At this is the plugin you want to install. So let's click install now, and let's click Activate. Right. Now, we're going to install a plug-in for accepting payments by current. So let's go to Plugins one more time. Let's click Add New, and let's look for Stripe. Alright, this is the Plugin V1 to install. And let's click activate. Alright, so now we should go back to our WooCommerce Settings. And let's select payments one more time and let's see if there are any changes. Alright, as you can see, now we have way more Payment methods compared to the previous version. And the first method that we want to activate is just one. Alright, so make sure that this one is active. And then click right here, manage. And to be able to accept payments by PayPal, you will need to have a business PayPal account. So if you don't have one, I highly recommend you to create one. And when you're going to create this business PayPal account, I highly recommend you to use your business email address because this way your PayPal e-mail account is going to look a bit more professional. So I highly recommend you to do that. But if you already have a PayPal account, you can actually make your already existing PayPal account if you want to, and you can turn it into a business account. So to do this, you'll need to login to your PayPal account and then go to settings. And there you will see an option to upgrade your PayPal account into a business account. And once you have your business PayPal account ready, you will need to use briefings to activate this payment methods. So you're going to need to fill those fields right here, this one, that one and that one. So to find this information, you will need to login to your business PayPal account, not just a regular PayPal account, because if you're going to use just a regular PayPal account, you want going to have those settings. Just login to your business PayPal account, select Account Settings and in IP access, create new. In my case, as you can see, it's update because already have those keys graded for myself. But if in your case you're going to see update as well, then select Update, scroll down until you see Managed API credentials, and then select this one. And here you want to copy all the IP keys. So just copy those keys and you want to base those keys according to the name of a key. You're going to have IP username, password, and signatures. So you want to carpet dose and you want to go back to your WooCommerce store, to your website basically. And you want to paste those keys right here. So once you have done this, you can scroll down and hit Save Changes. And just like that, you activated payments by PayPal and you will be able to accept payments using PayPal. That's good because this is one of the most popular payment methods. Alright, so don't forget to hit Save Changes. And now payments by PayPal or active on your website. Alright, so now we're going to activate payments by card. And to do this, you want to go back to all the Payment Settings. And this is the option. This option is called stripes. So we want to activate this option right here. And of course to be able to accept payments by Stripe, you will need to create your Stripe account. Of course, the confirmation of your account can take a couple of days or maybe it's not going to take that much. Once you've got to start receiving payments, they might ask you to send them some proofs if your identification and other things. So just go to stripe.com, create your account or you can click right here. And once you have your account ready, you will be able to connect this account to your WooCommerce store by clicking right here. And as you can see, already signed into my testing Stripe account. And as you can see, I can connect my store. And before we connect anything, before you do all those things, I will show you a quick walk-through of Stripe, and I will show you another method how you can connect your account to your store. Alright, so if I will click right here, and turkeys, we're going to have some keys that we're going to need to enter. So I will show you how you can do that. And now you should go to Stripe. You should have your account ready, just login to your account. So of course, first things first, when you will be setting up your account, I believe you're going to have an opportunity to add your bank account to this stripe payments. So once you're gonna have enough payments received your Stripe account, you can always do a pay out to your bank account. But if you didn't have this option, I'll show you how you can do that. Alright, you should go to settings and you should go right here, external payout accounts. And as you can see, already have my account right here. But in your case, you will be able to Add a new bank accounts. So just Add New if you haven't done this yet. And basically now you are Stripe payment gateway is connected directly to your bank account and you will be able to receive payments from Stripe to your bank account. Alright, so now let's go to Homepage and I will show you how you can add IP keys, just like we did with PayPal option, we had to enter API keys and we're going to need to do the same with stripes. So now we need to find those keys. So to find those keys, we're going to have to go around here and developers. And you want to click right here API keys, and right here we have standard keys. So those are the keys you want to use. As you can see right here, this is the publishable key and this is the secret key. So you want to copy those and you want to paste those right here. Makes sure that you have live version activated. This is where you want to base those keys and web hooks. Secret is just an optional. You don't really need to add anything right here. So just paste your keys. That's exactly what I'm going to do myself. Alright, once that's done, you can click right here, save live keys, and now we have active payments by cards right here, you can do various adjustments if you want to. You can do some customization options. You can change what it's going to display on what your vista are going to see when he is in checkout page. And I usually like to keep everything as it is by default. Maybe sometimes like to delete this one Stripe and we can leave it just like that. And as you can see, of course, my account is disabled because this was a testing accounts. But in your case, everything should be active. So it's just so it yourself, you have two options. But first of all, I highly recommend you to set up your Stripe account first before you add this option. Because once you going to have it, once it's gonna be active if you want going to have any issues. So you will be able to use the first method to connect your store with Stripe. But the second option where you copy the keys, API keys also works. So now your store has to Payment methods. So the first payment method is gonna be by PayPal and the second one is gonna be payments by cards. And of course those are not the only options for Payment Gateways. There are plenty of them, but those two are the most popular and there's no doubt that they're going to work well and those options work globally. So if you live in another country, you might want to explore and you might need to explore other options. But those two options are usually good enough. Alright, so this is it for this lesson. 24. (3.5) Introduction to Products and Product Categories: This lesson we're going to start working with products. But before we add products, before we add simple and variable products, we need to have categories. So as you remember, all the settings, all the adjustments related to products can be found right here. So before we add our products, you have to create your categories. So let's select Categories. And there's one category that was created by default and we cannot delete this category. So instead of deleting this category, we can rename this category. So let's click Quick Edit and right here just given name and the slug to your category that you are planning to use for your products. Keep the name and a slug the same. The slug is basically the URL that you will see right here after a your domain name slash and so on. So this slug will be used in your URL offer category. So this time I'm just going to rename this category two wooden toys. And when you are adding your name and Slug, don't forget when you add slug instead of spaces in between the words, use dashes. Alright, so we can click Update category. And now instead of the category that was previously named under categorised, now we have our real category to add new categories. You have to go right here. For now. You don't need to add any thumbnail images for the categories. But later we're going to test with this option right here a bit later and you'll see it yourself. If it's worth, it can thumbnails two categories, but for now we can keep it as it is. We just want to have the full structure of our website ready before we work on customization options of the whole website itself. Alright, so just like that, I will add another category that is going to be called Montessori toys. Alright, so to add this category, just scroll down and click add new category. Just like that. I'm going to add another free Categories, some just going to skip this part because you already know how that's done. Alright, so I just finished adding the rest of the categories. And if you're wondering what is the parent category. So for example, if you are selling shoes on your store, so obviously you're going to have such category as shoes, but this category can be parent category to other types of shoes. So for example, sport shoes, sandals or any other type of shoes you can imagine. And shoes is going to be the parent category, the main category. And for example, sport shoes is gonna be subcategory. For example, just to show you how that works, I could add a subcategory or a child category two wooden toys. So we could add wooden blocks, something like that. And now you just have to choose your parent category in my case is going to be wooden toys. And I can click add new category. Just like that. You can add even more categories to make this category as a parent category or any other. But it's going to be completely up to you if you want to do that. I just wanted to show you how that works. Alright, so I'm just going to delete this child category because I'm not going to need this one, and this is it for this lesson. Now you should know how to create categories. And as you said yourself, it's quite simple. And if you want, you can also create parent Categories and child categories as well. 25. (3.6) How to Add a Simple Product: Since we have our categories ready, now we can start adding products to our online store. T add a product, you have to click right here, add new. In this video, we're going to add a simple product. The simple product is just a regular product that doesn't have any options like size, color, and so on. It's just a simple product. Variable product is going to be the product that has sizes or any other attributes. For example, if you are selling T shirts, you might have sizes and colors. Those are attributes. Basically, you're going to use attributes to create variations for that product. If it's going to be a T shirt, then you're going to have different colors or different sizes. Now let's focus on simple products that do not have any variations and they are just a simple products. The first things first, when you are here, you'll see that here, you can add a product name. This is where you want to add your product name, and this is where you're going to add product description. As you can see, you have a small text editor right here with some various tools, but I usually don't overcomplicate my descriptions. I just add descriptions. I maybe include some specifications in the list and so on. If we would scroll down Here you will see various information for your product data. As you can see now we selected simple product, and variable product is right here. When you are running a new commerce store and you are selling physical goods, there's going to be two options the most important for you, so this is going to be this one and that one. For now, let's keep simple product, and here we don't need to check any marks. Here you will be able to add price. As you can see you can add a regular price and add a sale price. You can even schedule your sale price when it's going to be active when the sales starts and when the sale ends. This one is up to you if you want to automate sales, But this is where you're going to need to add your price and sale price. In inventory tab, here you will be able to create SKU. Basically it's completely up to you if you're planning to track your stock, if you're going to have any other documents like Google Sheets or Office Excel or anything like that where you're going to track your products with SKU. Here you can add unique SKU for each product, and maybe you might want to use this for tracking your stock and doing all those things, and for identifying products as well. Here you can manage stock. As you saw it yourself when I disable this option right here, you can only choose that this product is in stock or is out of stock. If I would activate this option, you can add stock quantity and you're going to have a limited stock. Here you can also add a low stock threshold. Once your product reaches this threshold, you're going to be notified with e mail notification that your product is running out of stock. Also do some other adjustments like limit purchases to one item per order. Those are a bit more in depth, a bit more advanced, but I usually use SKUs to add unique codes for my product, so I could identify those products in my sheets where I track all information about those products, and of course, I add stock quantity right here. Those two are going to be the most important for you if you're going to decide to track your stock. L et's go to shipping tab. Right here, as you can see, you can add weight of your product, you can add dimensions for your product. It's completely up to you. I usually don't sell to large products to big products that might require me adding weight for any extra occasions. But if you're going to do this, this is where you can do that. As you remember, we created in previous lesson when I was showing you how to add shipping zones, we created a shipping class. Now we can select this shipping class that we created previously Let's say if this product is going to be extremely heavy product and it requires extra care, and the shipping is going to cost extra. Then as you remember, we had this class ready where the shipping is going to cost $85, if I'm not mistaking anything. Yeah, this class will be applied to this particular product. If your stor or a potential customer, let's say going to add this product to his card. At a checkout, he will see that the shipping is going to cost him more because we have created this shipping class. If you don't want to use a shipping class, you can disable this one. All right. If I would go right here in linked products. So if I would click right here on pSLs, as you can see here, we have an explanation what are ApsL products. So in the product page, your visitors going to see some recommended products. So once you add more products to your website, here you can look for the products you want to psil. You want to show to your visitors to your customers on that particular product page. Right here in cross sales. As you can see, if you would have again more products, you could add those cross sale products and those products will be displayed in your shopping card. This way you can increase the value of a shopping card and this way you can make even more sales. This one is very useful. I usually use this one every single time when I add new products, I like to choose the products that are best sellers, and I'm guaranteed that the customer is going to add this product and he's going to buy two products instead of one. That's what I use myself, and I highly recommend you to use apsees and cross sales yourself as well. Let's go to attributes. Attributes are just like information for specification of your products. For example, you could add information for a product. Let's say this the product that I'm adding right now is going to be a wooden train. I could add such attribute like just like that. I'm going to click add. I'm going to give name material, and I course I'm going to type that material is wood. Just like that, I can as many attributes as I need. Of course, it depends on your products, what products you are planning to sell. Again, this one is up to you. If you have any attributes yet, just don't ignore that. Once we're going to move to variable product, I will show you how you can convert those attributes. For example, you will add a size attribute and you're going to list all the sizes available. How you can use those attributes to create variations of a particular product. Let's go to Advanced tab. Here you can basically add a purchase note. Once a customer places an order, he is going to receive a notification e mail with a purchase note. This one is up to you if you see any need to add this one. Let's go to that one. You can do some adjustments to custom ordering position. This one is not extremely important. This is for everyone who are looking for a bit more customized experience for their customers, but I actually do not use those options right here. You will need to add some type of purchase note to a customer, if he's going to purchase, let's say this product, so he's going to receive a note to his e mail notification of successfully placed order. A good example would be, let's say if you are selling specified products that require some instructions. For example, you could have a PDF file with URL right here. You could pace this PDF file with instructions for your customer. It's just one way of doing it, but of course, there are multiple ways how you can do the same thing. But again, it's up to you how you want to use those purchase notes. This one is up to you, and of course, do not disable reviews. You want to have enable reviews because you want to allow your customers to leave reviews on your products. If you would go to get more options, basically, here you will find various extensions. That you can install to your Wo commerce website, to your online store. Those extensions, usually pay they cost money, they cost more than any other extension, any other plug in that you would find on FM force.net, the website that I showed you previously, where you can buy premium themes and premium plug ins. Here, this pinterest tab was added automatically when we selected that we want to install Pinterest for marketing purposes. Basically this one is part of a plug in. If we would go to Plug ins right here, and I would open this one in a new tab. Let's go right here. You will see that we have Pinterest. Just a second. Yeah, we have Pinterest for In later lesson, I will show you how you can add various pixels. I will give you an introduction, how you can do that. But for now, let's not focus on that. As you can see, this is a plug in. If we wouldn't have this plug in, we wouldn't have this option right here Pinterest. So we can close this tab right here. Okay, what else? Product short description. This is a short description that can be seen in your product page before you see the main description. So again, it's up to you if you want to use this. I usually don't use this. In some cases, I I have used this in the past when I was selling T shirts that came from China, and those T shirts were smaller sizes. So I left a message in this pot right here for my customers letting them know that they should choose one size larger, and it was clear message. It was easy to see, so it was just a message to my customers. So it's up to you how you want to utilize this product short description. So this is it with this part. Now we can jump right here. So product image, we're going to set a product image. That's going to be the featured image for our product. We will be able to add product gallery images. Our product is going to have more images, more than just the one, that is going to be the main image. As you remember, we created categories previously, so these are all the categories we have, and if you don't have any category here ready yet, you can add new category right here yourself, and of course, here you can add text. For example, I will be selling a wooden toy that is going to be a wooden train. I could add such tags as wooden toy, wooden train, train, wooden toys, those type of tags right here. Those tags are basically meant for describing your product, just like I told you in previous lesson, so probably you understand this by now. All right, let's start by adding a name. I'm going to give a name to my product and it's going to be wooden train. So I added wooden train toy. This is how it looks. As you can see, this is how my permalink going to look. This is the URL of this product, and of course, we could choose that it's going to be wooden toys. Because it's obviously wooden toy. Right here, I'm going to add description. I have description ready, so I'm just going to paste it right here. As you can see, I just added my short description, and as you can see, it's 111 words, right here if you want, you can do some customization options. You can bold some of the text. Again, it's complete two if you want to do those changes right here, but I usually like to keep everything simple. All right. So the next thing that we could do, we could go back to general tab, and I'm going to add a regular price. So I'm just going to add the prices right here. All right, as you can see, regular price is going to be 22 49, and sale price is going to be 14 99. All right. This is how it's going to look. In inventor tab, I will add a unique SKU code for this product. All right, I added my unique SKU code. Basically, it says product one. And once I add the second product is going to say b0002, it's going to be product two. This is how I'd like to do this. But again, it's up to you what system you want to use. It's tum. And I added stock quantity, and right here, I have low stock thresholds. It's going to be two products. Once it reaches two products, I'm going to be notified with an e mail message that this product is running out of stock. All right. Shipping. I'm not doing any changes to shipping. It's pretty small product. I don't really need to add any shipping classes or even add weight. It's going to cost not much. It's going to be cheap to send this product, so I'm going to keep it as it is link products. Right now I cannot add any link products because I haven't added any products yet. In the future, I will be able to do this once I have at least one product published. Attributes. In attributes, I'm going to add another attribute right here and I'm going to add one more attribute, and I'm just going to give names to these attributes and I'm going to give values. As you can see, I just added various attributes. The first one is material, so it's going to be wood content. And ages from three years and type Montesori Toy. So again, this is my situation. This is what I'm adding. In your situation, it's going to be a completely different thing because you already know what type of e commerce you are building. All right. So let's hit save changes. Don't forget to hit save changes before you move to any other tab because those changes will not be saved if you do not click right here. All right. So I just added this information. Now I can add tag. So that's exactly what I'm going to do. I'm just going to type tag, and I'm going to hit Enter. As you can see, once I hit Enter, this tag is added to the tag list. I could add another tag train, and I think I'm going to keep it just like that. All right. So the next thing, we can add our product image. So right now I have to upload this product image, so I'm going to click right here, and I'm going to select from the file. All right. This is the product image I want to use, and I'm going to click Set Product image. Right now I'm going to add some other images to the gallery. I'm going to select image one by one, and of course, I'm going to hold Control while clicking on each image. All right. Now I can click Add to Gallery. I can switch places with these images. Again, it's up to you, what do you want to do? Now before publishing this product, we can click Preview. Let's see how it looks. You can see, this is how it looks. It looks quite good. Of course, it doesn't look too fancy because we haven't added our theme, but now you should understand how to add a product. Yeah, this is how it looks. Now we can close this one and now we can click Publish. Once we publish, we're going to click view product just to make sure that everything works fine. Now we can click right here. Let's say, let's click on this URL. This is outlooks. This is our product. As you can see if I would click to Wooden Toys category. This is our category, and this is our toy. We have one product added to our store, and yeah this is it for this lesson. In the next lesson, I will show you how to add a variable product and do not get discouraged if you think that this doesn't look too good. Don't worry about that because we are in progress. We haven't done any customization options. We haven't installed any VM to our website, so this is the default version, but now we have some type of a structure. This is it for this lesson. 26. (3.7) How to Add a Variable Product: Alright, since you know how to Add a Simple Product, now we can Add a Variable Product to our storm. Show how that's done. It's quite similar, but this time we will need to create variations for Products. Alright, let's go to the dashboard. Let's go to Products right here, and let's click Add New. So since you are already familiar with all those settings right here and those options here, I'm just going to paste all the information. I'm just going to add the product name and I will add product description and all other information. Alright, as you can see, I just finished adding more information. This is the title for this product description. As you can see, I have product image and obviously I'm going to have two different versions of this. Customer is gonna be in black version and in blue. And right now, I don't have a category that would represent this products. So I can click add new category right here. And I'm going to type costumes. And I'm just going to click add new category. Just like that, the new category was created. So now I can uncheck this category, and now I can choose costumes. Alright, so let's scroll down what else we have N, as you can see, I added two tags, so don't overstretch yourself with tags. If you cannot come up with any tags, don't worry, you can leave it this one empty and you're not going to experience any issues. But let's say if I'm going to have more products related to Batman, and let's say if there's gonna be more toys, something with Batman, I will include this tag. And let's say once mvR clicks on this diagonal product page, you will go to a new page where he will see all the products with this particular tag. I will show you how that looks later. Alright, now, the next thing that we have to do, we have to choose that it's going to be Variable Product right here. You can type SKU, SKU for this product. And I'm not going to activate managed stock because we will do this on each product separately because I want to know how many products of blue version I have four certain ages and I want to know how many products that have of, let's say blue version or black version, four different range of ages. So basically my product, this product that I'm adding right now, is going to have two variations, two attributes for variation. So the first attribute is going to be Style, that is going to be black or blue, and it's going to have age. So it's gonna be for certain ages. So let's say 2-3 years, 4-5 years and anything like that. Okay, now we can go to link products because we don't need to do any changes in Shipping tab and now we can link products. So for example, if I'm going to type wooden, as you can see, I can select this toy that I added previously. So I'm gonna do the same with cross cells. And just like that, added a product for upsells and cross cells. And you can add more products, more than just one. I usually like to add 2-4 products to each of these sub cells and grow cells. And now we can go to attributes. Alright, so now I'm going to click Add and I'm going to type the name for this attribute. So it's gonna be Style. And now I'm going to have two styles, so it's going to be blue and black. So I'm going to type blue. I will separate this with this symbol. I'm going to type black arrow select used for variations because I'm going to use this attribute for variations. And let's quick save attributes. If I would expand this one, as you can see, this is how it looks. Alright, now I'm going to add another attribute just like that. And it's going to be H, and I'm going to add values. Alright, so I just had it two values, as you can see, those are my values. And of course, I'm going to click Save attribute. But before I do that, I'm going to select this one that I'm going to use this for variations and I'm going to click Save attributes. Of course I could click right here, add more attributes, but I could mention the fabric. And I guess that's exactly what I'm gonna do. I'm just going to give a name and I'm going to enter the value. And once I added this attribute add-on, want to use this attribute for creating variations of this product because fabric is not used for variations. So I do not need to check this one used for variations. Alright, so now we can click Save attributes, and again it's up to you what type of products you are adding. For example, if you are adding t-shirts and you only have sizes. So let's say you have a specific design of a t-shirt and you only have different sizes that are large, small, extra large and so on. So in your case, you're going to need to add just one attribute for variations. So let's say if it's going to be size instead of style here in values, you will list all values one-by-one that you have. Any just going to hit Save attributes. And just like it, you're going to use this attribute to create variations. If you have more attributes used for variations, Let's say you're going to have different colors, pink, yellow, or any other. And just like I did, you will have to add at this one right here. So in my case it's H. In your case, it could be impolite color or anything else. And of course, you can even add more attributes that you're going to use and variations. But in a lot of cases and most of the cases You probably going to use one or two attributes that you gonna do, variations with those. Alright, so let's save attributes one more time. Let's make sure that those are saved. And now we're going to create variations. Alright, so let's click right here and let's select this one and let's select go. Let's click. Okay. Okay. And as you can see now we have four variations. So we have a blue version that is for free to for ages, and we have another blue version and so on. So now let's expand all the variations right here. And now let's set an image for this variation. So this is going to be the image I want to use. Alright, right here, I'm going to type my regular price. If you are managing stock, you can activate this one and type Stock quantity. Alright, so let's scroll down what else we have. And of course you have low stock trash will just like we had with a Simple Product. You have weighed Shipping glasses. Again, you can select shipping classes for each variation separately. So this one is up to you if you want to do that. Okay, let's scroll down. And this is the blue version. Again, let's select the same image and let's paste the price so the price is going to be the same. So just copied the price. Let's select manage Stock. And again, I'm going to type ten. And as you can see, we have repeat all the things. So depends how many variations you're going to have. This is how many times you're going to need a repeat those things because you have to treat each variation as a separate product. Because as you can see, you can add all those things like weight. You can even choose a shipping class and so on. Alright, so let's add the last one is going to be black. And as you remember, managed stock. But before that, the price and the stock is gonna be ten. Alright? I'm gonna do the same with this one. Alright, once we have finished adding information, don't forget to hit Save Changes. If you don't gonna save changes, you're going to lose all information. Alright, now we can click Publish, and now we can click right here to view our product. Let's see how it looks. If everything works as it's supposed to work. Alright, so we have style. We can choose, let's say let's choose blue and let's choose H. We have different image. We can enlarge those images. We can close those images. Totally understand that it doesn't look too good. But like I said, we're going to install a theme. We're going to do customization options and our product page is going to look much better. Alright, like I told you with tags, let's say if I'm going to click on this Batman tag, as you can see, this is the tag and these are the products that I have under this tag. In this case, I want to have this product. Obviously I'm just going to see one product. Alright, let's go back. Before I go back, I guess let's open this product one more time and let's make sure that everything works. Alright, so right here is you can see we have description and additional information. We have additional information that we have Style, blue, black, age, and fabric. If you don't want to display those attributes right here, like Style, because we have style right here and we have age, we can do changes. So for example, I'm going to click Edit this product. And if you don't want to display those attributes, you have to go right here. And as you remember, we have Style. So we want to hide this one from product page, and we want to hide H as well. And let's click Save, and let's click Update. Alright, now we can click View product. Let's see if those attributes are hidden. Now, let's click right here. And as you can see, we don't have any other attributes. Those attributes can be seen only right here and that's good. Alright, here you can see people can leave reviews. And here you can see our previous product. If I would add this product to our shopping cart just a second. Let's click Add to cart. Alright, we can click View Cart and as you can see right here, we have a cross-sell. So as you remember, we added this product in a cross-sell tab and this is where it is displayed. This is how our shopping cart looks. It doesn't look too good. I completely understand because we haven't done anything with the customization part of our website. So alright, this is it with this lesson now we know how to add Variable Product, and you also know what our tags and how you can check the products that are added to those stacks. So this is it for this lesson. 27. (3.8) Coupons and Discount Codes: In this video, we're going to create a coupon for our store. So as you can see right here, we can type a coupon code, but we don't have any Coupons. Alright, so to Add a new coupon, I'm just going to open this one in a new tab just because I would have this tab right here once I have activated my coupon code or could use it right here. Alright, let's go to the dashboard. And as you remember, if I would go to WooCommerce, I can select Coupons. I could also go right here and select Coupons. So that's exactly what I'm going to do. Alright, let's click create your first coupon and right here you have Discount Tire. I usually use percentage discounts, you know, ten per cent discount, 15% discount, and so on. But you can use fixed card discount. So for example, you could type $5, $3. This is the amount you want to use. And of course you can choose fixed Product discount for products itself, alright? But like I said, I usually like to use percentage discounts. That's probably what majority of eCommerce stores do anyway. And right here, Let's say I'm going to type ten. So it's gonna be ten per cent discount. You can check this box to allow free shipping. Again, it's up to you. I usually like to keep everything simple. You can add coupon expiration date right here, just choose the date. And here I like to do some usage restrictions, alright? So you can choose how much a person has to spend or if he spends more than maximum amount that you enter right here, he will not be able to get this discount and those options are up to you. You can exclude products from the discounts. So if you don't want to give this discount for a certain product, you can exclude products right here. You can include particular products. So that means this Discount can only be applied to specific products and those specific products on, you can do the same categories. You can exclude categories. You can make this discount only available for certain categories of your products. So this is very can do that. Just simply choose what you want to do if you want to do any of those options and just type the product or type the categories. So this one is up to you. You can even allow email addresses. So for example, if you already have some customers that are shopping on your online store or you created a unique coupon for particular customer, then you can only allow this coupon for that particular email address. So you will have tensored this email address right here. But I usually like to do this option right here because sometimes when people find multiple Coupons, they tried to apply both Coupons. And if you uncheck this option, those customers will be able to use to Coupons when shopping on your online store. So I highly recommend you to use this one. And of course, by enabling this option, you can exclude sale items. So for example, if items are on sale and your customer adds those products, those items to their shopping cart, and they tried to apply a coupon, they will not be able to get a discount if you're going to check this box, alright, usage limits. Again, you can add usage limits. So you can add limits per coupon. Let's say I'm going to create this coupon and I'm going to have just ten coupons. So I will have to enter this one right here, ten coupons, you can do limitations to a certain amount of products. So let's say if you're going to enter here five and the person buys six products, he will not be able to get a discount usage limit per user. So if you're going to enter here one, that means this user or any other future user will be able to use this coupon once. It's up to you if you want to do those limitations. But usually what I do is I usually use percentage discount and I do restrictions that people cannot use multiple Coupons at once. And once you have done those springs, of course you have to create a coupon. So let's say I'm going to name this coupon testing. You can also click right here, generate coupon automatically. And here you can add a description for yourself. Maybe you're going to do special promotions so you wouldn't get lost and you would know for what reason this coupon was graded. Alright, once you have done this, let's click Publish and our coupon is live. So now we can go back to our cards right here, and we can type testing, and let's click apply a coupon. As you can see, Discount was applied successfully, and this is the discount, and as you can see, it's 170 and everything works. So this is how you can add coupons. So now we can close this one, and this is it for this lesson. Now you know how to create Coupons 28. Section 3 Summary: Fantastic. You just finished WooCommerce part. So now you know how to use a WooCommerce plug-in. Dad is responsible for adding eCommerce functionality to your WordPress website. So basically now you know how to create an eCommerce website by Installing WooCommerce plug-in. So now you know how to add products, how the WooCommerce works, what are the most important settings and all those things. So this is very important part in creating your online store using WooCommerce. So great job on dad's. And in the next section we're going to start focusing on the colors on the design part of your website. And yeah, that's great. Now, you know how WooCommerce works, you know how WordPress works. And you know, of course, what is Web Hosting, what is domain name? And maybe before starting this course, you didn't know anything, but now you know quite a lot of things. So congratulations on debt 29. (4.0) Getting Started With Customization: Alright, in this section we're going to talk about the customization of your website. So before we jump into Installing our famous of course, in this course, you're going to have two options to create your website. So we're going to have an option with a free theme, and you're going to have an option to create your website with a premium theme. So you're going to see it yourself, how those two options are different because with a premium theme, of course, you're going to have way more customization options, but with a free theme, you can also expect good results. But of course it's nothing compared to a premium option. The best thing is that the premium option is just going to cost you a one-time fee and that's it. There's no any hidden monthly fees or anything like that. So that's really great. Looking from this perspective and when talking about the whole customization thing. In this section, we're going to focus on making sure that your website going to look good and it's going to look professional, even though you might not have any experience in setting up your websites, in creating them. But in this section we're going to focus on making them look nice without sweating too much. So if that's the right way to express, so we're not going to focus on the things that we don't need to use, which is going to focus on the things that truly important. So like choosing colors. So this one is extremely important because I have seen a lot of websites that use random colors and they do not look good, and they do not look professional. So if you are a website isn't going to look professional, isn't going to look trustworthy, then you can expect that you're going to lose quite a lot of customers. Just imagine if you're a visitor lands to our website that looks horrible, not matching colors and anything. That website just screams right away that it's not trustworthy, it doesn't look good. And a lot of cases, that's a huge reason why customers do not convert because they do not see trustworthy website. The first impression is bad. So in this section we're going to make sure that we focus on this good first impression for our visitors. And of course, I'm going to show you some places where I get Stock Photos and where you can get them yourself as well. And I'm going to share with you free options and I'm going to share a paid option that they use myself. And you're going to need Stock Photos in any case, no matter what type of website you are creating because you want to look professional. So if you're going to use random Photos, it's not going to be professional. You gotta use Stock Photos. And of course I'm going to show you those two themes. You'll see it yourself. Day Look, I'm gonna give you a quick introduction into each Theme. And basically I'm going to show you the website structure. So what type of structure you should have. And it's gonna be up to you how you want to do this. But I'm gonna share my blueprint just like all other lessons. And it's gonna be up to you if you want to use this blueprint for The Structure of Your Website. So basically that's that this is going to be a short section. We're not going to have a lot of lessons, but it should give you a better understanding what makes your website to look professional 30. (4.1) Choosing Color Palettes and Style: Alright, in this lesson I'm going to show you how to choose matching colors for your website. So it's quite simple. You don't really need to know anything about a matching color palettes or anything like that. There are tools that are free tools that can do it for you. But I highly recommend you to do that because if you're not going to have a matching color palettes are good-looking Color Palettes, then of course, your website isn't going to look professional. So alright, what we have right here, so as you can see right here, I have my logo. Got myself this logo from one of the websites or purchase it myself. And it's up to you if you want to, BioLogos, if you want to create them yourself as sometimes like to save myself some time. I like to buy them instead of grading them myself. In the past, they used to do that, But again, nowadays, it's time-consuming and time is money. Alright, so I got this logo for myself, and as you can see, I have the colors right here on the right side. So this is the brown color. This is the color brown and I have electric color. So this is the electric color and adjust extracted the codes, the color codes. Of course, you have multiple options to do that. You can use Photoshop, you can use paint or any other program to extract colors from the logo or an image. So this one is completely up to you. Now a note that those colors, and probably I'm going to use those colors as my main colors because those colors in my logos. So probably I'm going to use this color for some of the texts, maybe this color for some sections or anything like that. But I do need some more colors. So because two colors are not enough and when you are creating a website, I usually like to recommend to use up to four colors, not more than that, because if you're going to use too many colors on your website, of course your website N gonna look professional. So how to find out what colors would match to those two colors right here, the ones that are brown and electric. This is the tool I use. So that's the tool I like to use. And I've been using this tool for quite awhile now, and it's a free tool and you can generate color palettes using this tool. And those panels is going to match and you're gonna look great. Alright, so you want to go right here and choose palette generator. And all you want to do is you have to add your colors right here. If you don't have any colors yet, you can choose right here from the picker. Just choose the color you want to use and just lock that color. And like I said, you should have up to four colors, not more than that. I usually go with three colors. In some cases I use four colors, but in majority of cases I do this just for extra separate buttons to add an extra color. But again, it's up to you. 3-4 colors. It's completely okay. So now we can remove one color because we're not going to need that. And since we have locked this color, now you can click space button. And just like that, you will generate matching colors to this one, right? If you're going to hit another time, alright, you just found a color that you want to use. You think that this color gonna match well with this one. Maybe you're going to use this one in your logo. Maybe you're going to use this for buttons in your website. So now you want to lock this color, and now if you would hit space one more time, you would get another two matching colors to dose two colors right here. And just keep hitting space as many times as you want until you find the colors you want to use in your website. And once we have found those colors, you can simply copied those codes right here, paste them to your notepad or anywhere else. If it's more convenient for you, you can paste it in your Google Docs or any other document file and just write down that this is the color and do the same at all colors. And later when we're going to customize our website, we will be able to use those colors to make our website with matching colors to make it look professional and basically appealing. Alright, so this is how you can do that. And just like I showed you previously, I had the code of my colors. So this was one of the codes for brown color. And you can paste the code if you want to do it this way. So as you can see, I just pasted this code and I'm gonna do the same where electric Color. And just like that, I actually got those two colors right here by using those two main colors are generated other two colors. And now I will use those colors in creating my website. Alright, so like I told you before, just go back and paste the code right here and make sure that it's locked. Again. If you're going to hit space, you're going to generate more colors, more matching colors to dose two colors right here. So yeah, basically that's it for this lesson. Now you know how to choose matching colors. And if you need for an inspiration, you can always do Google search, look for color palettes, just type color palettes. Let's say you could type red, brown color palettes or anything like that just to look for inspiration. But if you already have some type of an idea, how you want to make your website look what colors you might want to use. This is the tool you can use to generate matching colors. And don't forget, don't use too many colors. In most cases, three colors, more than enough. Nan four colors might be a bit more than you need, but it's still okay. And of course, don't go with extremely bright colors or any other marker type colors. So for example, don't go with those type of colors on your website. It's just not going to look good. You don't want to do that. You want to make your website as nice looking as possible. So try to avoid these extremely bright coloration colors. Alright, so this is it for this lesson now, you know how to generate colors and how to make your website look more professional. Later on, we're going to use that when we're going to be Customizing our website 31. (4.2) Where to Look for Stock Photos: Alright, so in this lesson, I'm just going to show you the places, the websites where you can get free stock images. And it's gonna be helpful for you, not just for creating this website, but for the future projects. Because it is important to have a nice-looking Photos, not just for your products, but let's say if you're going to decide that you want to add blog posts, your website, It's always good to have a nice featured images for blog posts. And of course, it's also important when you're going to create your homepage. Let's say you're going to want to add a hero image on your website. So the hero image is the most important image on your website. Basically this is the first image, the first thing your WR is going to see once they land on your website. So knowing where to get stock images is important. You cannot just use Google to look for images because you're gonna get copyrighted and you don't want that to happen for you. You want to use free stock images instead of that. Alright, so the first place where I get my Stock Photos is this one. This is how it's called unsplash.com. There's plenty of various images available for various purposes and have no doubts that you will be able to find some great Stock Photos for your website, for any website, not just for this one, but yeah, highly recommend you to use Unsplash because there's plenty of free stock photos available. The second option that I use quite a lot is this one, Pixabay. It also has a lot of free stock photos and I highly recommend you to check this one. I use this one quite often as well. And the last one that I use myself, I've been using this one for quite awhile now. And this one is really good because you can find even logos right here. So if you're going to look for logo inspirations, are you going to look for color palette inspiration or anything like that? You can use this one free pig.com. I highly recommend you to check this one out. It has a free version and paid version. With a free version, you will be able to find the three Stock Photos. And with a paid version is going to be around $15 per month. You can get a planned for one month and you can download as many photos as you need for your project. $15 for all the photos you need is they're cheap compared to other Stock photo of places where you can buy them. Usually you can pay up to $15 for a single photo, for one photo. So $15 for a month to download as many photos as you want. It's a good deal. So I just wanted to share this one which you as well. Of course, it's kinda limited compared to some other big players like Shutterstock or Adobe images or anything like that. But it's still good and it just cost $15. So if you want to make your reps that even more professional-looking, you might want to try some paid options for, let's say, Stock Photos. So this is what I like to use myself. And you can also use this one to download logos. So yeah, that's a huge advantage of free pig.com and I highly recommend you to check those free websites out. And I believe you will be able to find what you are looking for. So this is what this video, now, you know where to find Stock Photos, where to look for them and do not use Google just to download images from Google because you're gonna get copyrighted and you don't want to get compromised because it's just not good for your website. 32. (4.3) Choosing Your Theme: In this course, you're gonna have two options to create your website. So like I mentioned you before, you're going to have an option to use a free theme that is called Astra Theme. And you're going to have a premium option to use a theme that is called Flatsome. I myself, I like to use a premium option. I have three websites running using this theme. And I kinda like this film because it's highly customizable. It loads fast, and it has a huge community where you can ask any questions you want. It has a Facebook group. I think it's a really great choice. But like I said, it's important for me to show you two options based on your budget and to show you what are the possibilities. In this video, I'm just going to show you what are the possibilities of Astra Theme. So right now I'm going to open our website that was created using Astra Theme. So basically this is the Ecommerce Store that is using an Astra Theme. This is a WordPress website and as you can see how it looks, it looks quite good. It looks professional. And if I would click right here on this product, right here, as you can see, this is how the product page looks. It's nothing too fancy, nothing too big. And once you click on another product, you will see yourself that it is the same. Right here we can choose the quantity of an item. And if I would click Add to Cart, I can click right here view card. It's quite simple looking Theme and as you can see, it's not too fancy or anything extraordinary. It's simple, it's minimalistic and it looks good. So actually, when you think about it, what else do you need? So here you will be able to apply a coupon codes. It looks quite simple. And if I would click right here, proceed to checkout. As you can see, this is how the checkout page looks. Of course, we will be able to do some customization to this page. Not too much, but we will be able to do some changes. Alright, so this is how it looks, this is how checkout page looks. And if I would go to grocery category right here, as you can see, this is how the category page looks. It looks quite good. I cannot argue with that because it, everything looks fine. This is the footer of our website and it makes sense. It looks professional, except these colors right here could be white, but I guess it's some type of issue, but no worries about that. So we have social media icons right here, and most of all, the Homepage looks absolutely gorgeous. Have a nice Homepage. And this Homepage was created using another Plugin debt is Elementor plug-in. It is for building pages. So that's exactly why this ligand was user right here. It was used to create this page. So using this plugin, I will show you in the later lesson when I will show you how to work with this Astra Theme, how to use Elementor. Alright, so it looks quite good and it's quite simple, minimalistic looking design, but it looks good. Alright, and if I would go to our Flatsome Theme, that is a premium option. And then later section, after the Astra Theme section, I'm going to show you how to create your website using this theme. Alright, so as you can see, this is how it looks. This is a different looking website. It's a bit more interactive. As you can see. It has this quick review and it looks a bit better and it's like a completely eCommerce looking store. So if I would click on a product page right here, actually it's a category. So this is the category, this is how the category is gonna look and it looks cleaner, a bit more minimalistic, I guess you could say. And if I would click on the product, as you can see, we have a completely different looking product page. And the good thing is that we will be able to customize this product page and we can make it look a bit different. But if I would go right here, if I would go back to our Astra Theme, and I would click right here on this product. Basically with this product page, we are limited. We will not be able to do too many adjustments. So if this look is good for you, if you don't have more money to invest into your website, then of course you can choose Astra option. But if I would go back as you can see, it looks different. And if I click Add to Cart, as you can see, we have a bit more interactive website. And if I click View cart, the cart looks different. So this is the difference with this theme. And that's in basically this theme that I just showed you. I'm just gonna go back is more customizable. You're going to have way more customization options because of course, it is a premium theme. So compared to this one, you will be limited. You will be able to do adjustments your homepage, you will be able to create your own unique Homepage. You will be able to do adjustments to your header to add your pages Categories and so on. Of course, you will be able to work on the footer right here. And if it's gonna be enough for you, that's fine. It's still a good looking eCommerce store. But with this Flatsome option, you're going to have way more customization options. So it's up to you what option you want to use. But I highly recommend you to go through both options. I'm talking about the sections of discourse where I will show you how to set up your website using Astra Theme. And where I'm going to show you how to set up your website using Flatsome Theme and you will see it yourself. How different those two themes compared Astra to Flatsome, you will see that Flatsome going to have way more customization options. So this is it for this video. And hopefully now it's going to be easier for you to decide which team you want to use 33. (4.4) The Structure of Your Website: Alright, so before we move on to the next section of this course, I just wanted to talk about the structure of a websites. If you're going to know the structure of the website in the next lessons is gonna be much easier for you to work on your website because you have to understand the basic structure of the website. Alright, so let's start with the first thing that every single website has and your website going to have it as well. I just open a new website that are managed. And let's start with the first thing that all websites have. The first thing that all websites have is Header. So this is the header of your website. This is gonna be the header. So no matter what type of website you're going to create, no matter what type of project you're going to start. Every website has the header. In the header, you usually include such things as a cartel as login and registration option for your customers. And of course you include your categories. So it's gonna be up to you to decide what you want to include in your header besides those things like categories, like Search bar and all those things. And this is basically how it looks. This is basically how one of my website looks. And as you can see, also included blogging, this Heather. So it's gonna be up to you. If you want to start writing blog posts, I will show you how you can include this blog as well. This is the header and in HTML is gonna be called head. Of course, you don't really need to know anything about the coding aspect of the header, but it's called the head. So it is the head of your website. This header is going to be on every single page, no matter where you're gonna go, you're going to have the same header as well, going to be a sticky header. As you can see, it doesn't matter if I scroll, it still stays right here. This head are going to be on every single page no matter where you go. So this is the head of your website. Next thing we have body, so this is the bottom of your website. What's beneath the header is called bar, alright, so this is the body of your website. So every single page, every single product or blog post is going to have a different formation. In later stages, we're going to focus on the bad aspect of bit more when we get to work on the homepage of our websites. So the Homepage is going to be the front page of your website, basically where people land once they visit your website, is gonna be the storefront of your website. So this is the body right here. So what's beneath the header is your body. So it's similar to the human body structure. You have had, you have body. What's the next? Of course you have feet. So similar to that. This is the footer of your website. So this is the footer. The footer stays the same on every single page as well, just like the header, except it's not stick as you can see it yourself. In a Footer, you usually include information that is going to be important for your customer. So as you can see right here, we have some information about the website privacy policy returns and refunds, shipping and delivery, and so on. You can also include such things as your social media icons. And of course, you can include even more information like latest post if you're going to write blog posts, again, this one is going to be completely up to you. You will have an opportunity to explore everything yourself, to try out and see what works the best for you. But like I said in this course, I will share my blueprint that works, that works for me, that works for my customers. And it's gonna be up to you what type of Footer you want to build is gonna be as well up to you what type of Header you want to build. Alright, so this website was created using Flatsome Theme. So as you can see, this is how it looks. And if I would go to this website right here, it was created using an Astra Theme. So no matter what FIM you are using, no matter what's a type of website you are building, you're going to have the same structure. Of course it might look a bit different. But as you can see right here at the top, we have the headers. So this is the header. We have a logo, we have some information right here. As you can see right here, we have a store page, but Categories. So again, it's gonna be up to you what type of Header you want to have, what things you want to include. But in this case, as you can see, this header is a bit different because this eCommerce store is much smaller than that one. So it doesn't have too many products, doesn't have too many categories. So this is how it looks. Right here we have about us page Contact Us page my account page, and a shopping cart. This is how it looks. So this is the header and again, this is the body. As you can see, this header is not sticking. And this is the body like with the previous website I showed you. And if I were scroll down, it also has a Footer. So basically this is how it looks. And if you are looking for inspiration, how you want to make your Footer look. You can check some websites you like, and you can try to replicate the same structure. So again, it's going to be up to you. Alright, so now you are familiar with all the structure of the website. And from here we're going to start building our website. So this is where our website going to start taking its shape. Alright, so this is it for this lesson. Hopefully now you understand the structure of the website 34. Section 4 Summary: Great job. Now you know what it takes to create a professional looking website. Usually, less is more and less looks better. So now you know everything, you know how to match colors, where to look for stock photos. And that's very important. I see a lot of people who make the same mistakes. They choose not matching colors. They don't use stock photos. A lot of people just look up for images on Google, and they try to use that. Don't do that because you might get copyrighted and you don't want this to happen to you. Use stock photos, use the tools I showed you, and definitely you will be able to create a professional looking web So even though maybe you're going to finish this section, and you're going to move on on other sections, I highly recommend you to come back to this section and just look through it, try to understand everything better. Maybe you won't like how your website looks. This is where you will go through the old tools I just showed you, and this will help you to create a professional looking website, and professional looking website, a good looking website is very important for e commerce stores because you can expect higher conversion rate, and it's very important because if you're going to have a higher conversion, you can expect more sales. Imagine if you're going to have 2% conversion rate or you would have just 0.5% conversion rate. So that's a huge difference. So having a professional looking website is a huge thing because you can expect higher conversion rates, you can expect more sales. And of course, that's extremely important when you are creating your online store. So great work on that. And in the next section, we're going to dive deeper into giving looks to our website. So this is where you're going to have the first option, the free option to create your website, using free tools, and in the later section, we're going to use a premium them. So with the premium tools, and you will see it yourself how those two options are different, and you will be able to use the knowledge that you just learned in both of these sections. That's all for now, great job. 35. (5.0) Getting Started With the Astra Theme: Alright, so in this section, vegan a set up our website. We're going to create the website. We're going to basically design our website and it's going to take the final shape with the help of Astra Theme. So this is the theme that is called Astra. And probably you remember when I was talking about Themes, you might have seen this Theme. So this is a very popular theme and it's popular for a reason because we the free version, you can create a quite good-looking websites. So it can be an eCommerce store, a blog, or just regular business website to represent your brand or business. So this FIM is quite versatile and it looks quite good. So we're going to use this Theme. We're going to use the free version of this beam. And in this section, I will show you how to install this theme, how to install a Starter Templates. So basically the starter template is gonna be the template that's gonna help to give our website a structure. So it's gonna be a template, basically a Demo Content that's going to look like a complete website. But what we're going to need to do is we're going to need to edit this content. And then the next section when we're going to work with a premium theme, we're not going to use any templates because with this premium theme is gonna be a bit easier to start without any structure, but that's what we're going to do with this Astra Theme. Alright, before we install this Theme and Starter Templates, Let's look around the templates itself. So you want to go to this website right here, WEP astra.com. And if I would go to Starter Templates, I would be able to check all the templates this theme has to offer. So as you can see, we have free templates and we have premium Templates. So those are for premium version, for a pro version of this Astra Theme. And by the way, if you're going to decide to purchase a pro version, you're going to have to pay each year. So it's not like you're going to purchase this Freemans is gonna be yours. And not like with the next theme that I'm going to show you to build your website when. So this is on the early basis, but with a free option, we still going to have good results, except we're not going to have so many customization options. Alright? So those, that Templates is you can see we have over 240 Templates. And if I would go to this section, eCommerce, I can select that. I want to check all the eCommerce Templates. So as you can see, this is how it looks. So if I would click on this template, we can click live preview. So this is what you can expect to have using this Theme. So as you can see, those are the products. If I would click on a product, this is how the product page is going to look. It looks quite good. I wasn't going to lie. It looks quite good even though it is a free theme. But yeah, like I said, this theme is popular for a reason. So just look around all the options right here. Check free options. If you want, you can check premium options, compare those options to free options. And I highly recommend you to decide what Theme you would like to use. Because the next lessons we're going to focus on Editing this template. So basically we're going to replace the information that is in this template with our information basically that's all we're gonna do. We're going to edit this template, look around, try to decide what template you want to use, understand it. It might be different from the template I'm going to choose, but actually the whole editing part is going to be the same. So everything is going to be the same no matter what type of template you choose, except the different template has different information in it. May be different structure, may be different layout, but nothing else is different when we're looking into editing aspect of this template. So just look around, see what template you would like to use and basically just decided this is the template you want to use, but you can also follow the whole editing part, but the template I'm going to choose. Alright, so this is it for this lesson, I gave you a quick introduction into Astra Theme 36. (5.1) Installing the Astra Theme and Starter Templates: This video, we're gonna install Astra Theme and we're going to install a Starter Templates. Alright, so let's start doing this. We can close this tab right here, and let's go to our website. So we want to go to the dashboard of our WordPress website, and we want to go to Appearance. Let's select Themes. Alright, so we want to click right here, had new Theme and we're not even going to need to use search because this is the female want to install. So let's click Install and let's click Activate now, right? So the Astra Theme is active, and now we can visit our website and let's check how our website looks. Alright, as you can see, it doesn't look good at all and it's because we haven't install a template to our websites. So Astra Theme without a template, it just looks ridiculously awful because you will need to edit everything yourself from the bottom. But with Starter Templates, the whole Editing and the creation process of your website is much faster, so we want to install Starter Templates. So let's go to the dashboard and the Starter Templates is a plugin. It adds a new functionality your website. So let's go to Plugins and let's click Add New. Alright, now we want to search for Starter Templates. So just type Starter Templates, and this is the plugin we want to install. So let's click Install and let's click activate. Alright, so we successfully installed our Starter Templates Plugin, and now we have to choose a template. So let's click right here C library. Let's click build your website now and let's choose a page builder plugin. Basically a page builder plugin allows you to create a quite good looking pages without needing, of course, to code, without needing to edit everything to our complicated, because we're the plugin such as elementary, you just have to drag and drop various elements to your page. And this is how you create your pages, your homepage, or any other page. So let's choose Elementor since it is the most popular one. And now your goal is to choose a starter template. So like I told you before, it's up to you what Templates you want to use. But in this particular case and this course, I'm going to use this template because I feel that it's going to be the easiest templates for me to edit. And I'm not going to need to make too many changes. So I'm just going to click right here. If you have your logo, you can add it right here. Just remember that those are recommended dimensions. But in later lesson, I'm going to show you how you can upload your logo without needing to add it right here if you don't have one yet. Alright, so let's click right here, skip and continue. So now your goal is to choose your color palette. Because if you're going to choose it right now in the next lessons, you're going to have less editing to do, less customization to do to your website. So just choose your color palette. I guess I'm gonna go with this one. I feel like this one suits my brand the best and choose your fonts. So those are going to be the main text fonts. As you can see, if I'm going to choose this one. We have the changes right here and actually feel that this font looks the best and I'm going to keep it to this font right here. Of course it's up to you what type of wants you want to use. Let's click Continue. Here. You do not need to add anything. We can click right here and just wait a minute until your website is ready. And after that's done, we're going to check how it looks. Alright, fantastic. Our website is ready. And now we can click right here, view our website. Alright, since we opened our website in a new tab, we can close this previous tab. And as you can see, this is how our website looks. It looks quite good, doesn't it? Of course, you're going to need to change this whole Demo Content, but now you have fully functioning website, to be honest, of course it doesn't have your products yet. But as you can see, you have a professional-looking website and you're just paying $8 per month for this website later on, of course is going to cause $10 per month. But of course it's much cheaper than running your website on Shopify or using almost any other option. So as you can see, this is how it looks. And if we would go to our shopping cart, you will see that we have our previous product that we added to our shopping cart and the previous lesson. So if I would click on this product right here, as you can see, the product page looks completely different compared to the previous version we had. And everything looks much better than it used to look with a default theme. And this is how it looks. And later on we're going to do more changes to make this website to represent our brands so we can even check some of the pages how they look. So if I would go to cookie policy, as you can see, it looks a bit different. It looks much better than the previous version. And if I would go back to my homepage, this is how it looks. So congratulations, you have a fully functioning website. Of course, we still need to replace some information. We're going to need to do some customization options. But as you can see with a free theme, with a free tools, you can actually create a good looking website. 37. (5.2) Working With Demo Content: When we install the Astra Theme and we installed Started template, it also came with a lot of Demo Content that we're not going to use at all. So this Started template installed some products that we actually don't have on our store. We are not selling those products. And this Started template as well installed some pages that we're not going to use at all, as you can see, be even have some duplicate pages. We have to fix everything right here. We have to delete some of the pages. We have to delete the products we're not going to use. And I believe it also installed some categories. Alright, so before we add our content, we have to make sure that we don't have any of Demo Content that we're not going to use. So let's go to the dashboard and let's see how our dashboard looks now. And as you can see, our dashboard looks a bit bigger with more tools because this Astra Theme and Starter Templates install some plugins to install this plugin. It also added this tool right here. So it is tool for customizing your Astra Theme and we have Starter Templates. Alright, so now our goal is to find out what Demo Content we're not going to use. So let's start with pages. Let's see what pages we have and we don't really need to use. Alright, so we have about page. So this About page was added by this Starter Templates so we can click View and let's see how this about page looks because right now it's a different about page. So as you can see, this is how it looks. It looks better than the previous version we had, but we actually created the previous About page just because we needed to add some information. I just wanted to show you how to add those pages that you need. Alright, so we actually don't need this About page, but if you want, if you like the design of this page, you can keep it and later you can edit it. So it's going to be up to you, but I actually going to show you how you can do that yourself. If I would go back, we can check how our previous About page looks. So I'm going to open right here. It should be just a simple page and as you can see, it looks a bit better. The design looks better. If you are fine with this one, you can keep it. But again, I will show you how you can work on some other pages to make them look more appealing. Alright, so now we can close this tab and now we can actually delete this page as well as you can see, this page says Elementor, so that means this page was created using Elementor, but we're gonna talk about that more in depth in the next lesson. Alright, so we're not going to use this page. We can delete this one because we're not going to use duplicate ID card page since this template installed this page for us, alright, we can keep this page. We don't really need to delete it. We can delete this duplicate page. We can delete this one. We can keep our previous page. Let's keep cookie policy. Of course we're going to keep our homepage and we don't need my account page since it's a duplicate page. As you can see, privacy policy, Let's keep this one. We can delete this one because it's a draft from the previous lessons. Let's keep shipping and delivery. Let's delete Shop since we have a new shop pages, you can see right here. And basically those are the pages we don't need. So once you have selected those pages, Let's choose move to trash and let's click Apply. Alright, the next thing that we have to remove is products, since we're not going to use those products that this Started template added for us. So let's go to all products and let's see how many products we have. So as you can see, we have two products that we added ourselves. We have quite a lot of products that we don't really need. In total. We have 12 products that were added with this Started template. And we don't need those products, so we can select those all products. Let's deselect our products that we added ourselves. Alright, let's do that. And now we can click right here, Move to Trash. Alright, let's move those products to trash. Alright, Next, let's make sure that we have all the categories that we created previously and we do not have the categories that were added with this Started template. This is the category I created, this one as well. That one, That one, This is not a category I created, so we can select this one, that one. So those two categories were added with this Started template. And now we can click right here, delete just like that. We're going to delete those categories just a second. And we actually don't need this and categorized, so we can delete this one as well. Alright, so now we have all our products and we have all the pages we need. And let's take a look how our website looks now, I'm just going to open this one in a new tab and let's see how it looks. Alright, so now we do not have any categories right here. We do not have anything here basically, but later we're going to add information. Alright, so if I would scroll down, as you can see, we don't have any best-selling products because we removed them all. And we don't have any trending products as well. Let's see what pages we have. So we have all the needed pages. We do not have any duplicates anymore, and that's great. So this is it for this lesson. Now you know how to fix how to remove all the Demo Content that came with a Started template. And from here we're going to start working on our content. We're going to start adding our images. We're going to start working on the Homepage. And this is basically where we're going to create the final form of our website using Astra Theme. So that's all for this lesson. 38. (5.3) Introduction to Elementor Page Builder: Alright, so we removed all the Demo Content and now we have to start working on the pages. As you start yourself, some of the pages had Elementor next to the page. So let's go back to our dashboard and let's click pages right here. Let's select all pages. And then we're going to show you real quick. What is that? So as you remember about page had next to Elementor. So it basically means that this page was created using Elementor. So our Plugin Starter Templates imported this page, and this page was created using Elementor. As you remember when we were creating those pages, I'm just going to open this one in a new tab and let's go to this page. So to create this page, we used WordPress text editor. We used some of the Gutenberg blocks right here from the list. And this is how we created this page. We dragged some of the blogs right here. And that's how basically we created this page. And Elementor is a different type of editor. So right here we have a WordPress text editor, and right here we have Edit with Elementor. So if I would click right here, I would edit this page using Elementor instead of using WordPress text editor. That's how it works. Alright, so I'm gonna close this one later on. We're going to edit this page to make it more appealing. And the right now as you can see, all other pages just like card page, checkout page there, just a regular pages. So it's a cart page. It doesn't have anything. Next it's saying Elementor, but our homepage that is frontpage of our website was created using Elementor. So this is what Elementor is. It is a page builder using elementary, you can create a much better looking pages then you would be able to create using WordPress text editor. So that's the purpose of this Plugins. So now you know what is a mentor and now we should check how it works. So let's go back to our homepage. This is the homepage of our website and this page was credit using Elementor. Elementor is not the only page builder plugin. There are quite a few page builder plugin is available like Beaver Builder, like WP bakery and others. But now let's focus on Elementor. Alright, let's click right here, Edit with Elementor because this page was graded using Elementor. And before we start diving deeper into this plugin, I just wanted to tell you that I highly recommend you to create every single page using elementary. You shouldn't focus on creating every single page using this plugin because it might slow down your website. Of course, it is possible that this one happened, but it's better be safe than sorry. So if you are using Elementor, just create your homepage about page, maybe some other pages, and it's going to be more than just enough. Alright, so now we are editing this page where Elementor. So as you said yourself, when we were editing page WordPress text editor, we had a different panel. But now when we are editing this page, the whole information that is on this page via editing this page using Elementor page builder. So there's no such thing as WordPress tags Builder anymore. Alright, so before we're going to edit our homepage in the next lesson, you have to understand how this Plugin, how this page builder works. So on the left side we have elements. So we have various elements, just like we had with our WordPress text editor. It had blogs, but right here we have elements. So as you can see, we have some basic elements like heading, like intersection, like text editor. So it's basically the paragraph. We have image, we have videos, we can embed videos, buttons, spacers. The wider is Google Maps, icons. And right here we have some pro elements, so those are only available with a paid version of Elementor, not with the paid version of Astra Theme, but with a paid version of Elementor. So those are all locked elements because they come with a paid version of this Elementor plug-in. And if I would go down right here, we have some other elements. Those are three elements to use. And as you can see it yourself, we have quite a lot of elements. And talking from the personal experience, I can definitely tell you that with a free elements you can actually create quite good-looking pages are really good looking pages actually. And you don't really need to use those probe elements because it's not going to change much. Even for this plugin is offering you a pro option, there's a huge chance that you will never need to use that. Alright, so right here on the left side, we have various elements. Alright, so those are all the elements. If I would go right here, you would have your favorite elements. If I would click right here, global elements, as you can see, we have to upgrade. But like I said, you don't need a paid version to create a good-looking pages. So let's go back to elements. If I will click right here. As you can see, we have some settings, we have some global settings. Those are up to you to explore if you want to do some adjustments through Style, right here we have various other navigation tools. And if I would click right here, we could view our page. Alright, let's go back. And if I will click right here, as you can see, this is where I am already. So if I click here, I'll click here. I would go to the whole elements. So those are elements right here. Alright, right here we have some other settings. So those settings are for the whole page itself, right here. We don't need to change anything. Here. You can do various pairing adjustments and so on. And here we have some advanced tools, but those are only for pro version. I usually don't change anything right here because everything is as good as it is by default. Alright, so let's go back to all elements. So right here we have all elements to add an element, just drag it and drop it anywhere you want. So that's how you add elements. On the right side, right here we have a navigator. So as you can see this page, this whole page was created using sections. So as you can see, this is how many sections we have. And if I would go up, as you can see, this is the first section. This section is even marked in this blue line right here. You can delete this section. You can do adjustments to this section, to this whole section right here that is marked in blue. And you can do various changes to this section. As you can see, we have layout adjustments. You can do some structural adjustments right now, The Structure of this section is two columns, 50 by 50. If I would go to style, you can do various Style adjustments to this particular section. This is this section we have selected. This section is marked in blue. And if I would go to Background Overlay, as you can see, we have this image set. So this is the image, this is the image that you can barely see. As you can see, there are some opacity adjustments. If I would change this opacity, as you can see, this, this outlooks, if I would go back, it doesn't show up that much and this is how it looks. So this is the first section. If I would go to Advanced Settings right here, we can do some layout adjustments, alright, so you can change padding. As you can see, it changes, it's moving down and up. If I would do change this right here, as you can see, it's shrinking and if I would go back, it's getting bigger. So this is the first section. Every single section has the same adjustments. So it has regular layout adjustments, it has Style adjustments. And in Advanced tab it has a bit more advanced, let's say layout or Style adjustments. Alright, if I would hide this section right here, it just disappears. So like I told you, that section was marked in blue line. This is the second section. So this is the section that is also marked in blue line. And as you can see, if I would hide this section, it disappears. Let's unhide those both sections. And let's talk The Structure of this section itself. So this section has, as you can see, some elements in this section. So it has an image element right here. It has some other elements here. So in this column right here, it has an image element, it has a heading element, it has another heading elements with some text and it has a button. So like I told you before, to add an element to a section or two or column, you just have to select it, drag it, and drop it just like that. So that's how it works. If I would expand this section, as you can see, we have two columns. So when you are adding sections to a page using Elementor, you can choose how many columns you want this section to have. Because with columns, when you're section is divided with columns, it's much easier to work on this section and it's much easier to add information. This is the first column, as you can see, it's marked in this dotted line. And if I would click on this column right here, it's also marked in this dotted line. If I would hide this column, it disappears. If I would expand this column, as you can see, like I said, it has image element in this first column. Like I told you before, once you click on this section, once you click on column, you can do adjustments to these things. So when I click right here, I was doing various adjustments to this whole section. If I would click on this column right here, here on this gray marked icon, I'll be doing adjustments to this column. Only. If I would click on this image itself. I'm doing adjustments to this image on. So I'm not doing any changes to column or the section. I'm doing changes only to this image. So as you can see, there's a structure when you click on a certain element, when you click on the column and you click on this section, you are doing changes to your selected item column or this section. Those settings are very similar. Alright, so this is the column it has, as you can see image, if I click on this column and that would expand, as you can see, it has more things. So it has an image right here, it has heading element, it has image box. So it is an image box and it has a button. Alright, so that's how Elementor works. First of all, when you are editing your page, you add a section. When you add a section, you choose how many columns you want to have in your section. Once you add this section with the selected number of columns, then you start adding elements from this list right here. Alright, so now you should understand how it works. I hope I explained this in a simple way to understand darn thing, to over-complicate it, it's actually simple. You just have to select the structure and then you just drag the elements you want to use in this particular section. Once you have added this section, you can add another section. As you can see, we have quite a lot of sections. And when we're going to work on this homepage, we're going to delete some of these sections and we're gonna do adjustments to other sections. Alright, but before we leave, I just wanted to show you how you can add a new section. So you can either click right here to Add a new section or you can scroll down, of course, until you see the bottom. And as you can see, we have the same window right here. And we can start working on this section. We can start creating this section. But let's go back up and let's start doing changes to this section we're about to create. So once you are here, you want to click this Plus button and like I said, select your structure. So it's up to you what structure you want to use if it's going to be just a single column, if it's gonna be two columns, three columns, four columns, or any other structure. And this case, let's choose two columns. Alright? So as you can see, this is how it looks. So we have two columns, basically, this is the same section, alright, this is the same section except the newly created section doesn't have any information. For example, let's go to all items and let's try to replicate this section. So let's drag and drop the image. Alright, and now to select an image, we are already selected this image elements. We have to choose image. Let's click on this one, and this is our media library. So if I would glyburide here and certain media, this is how it looks, alright? And if I would like to do some padding and margin adjustments to make this section, the whole section itself a bit larger, I would have to click right here Edit section, as you can see, the blue mark line. And that would have to go and Advanced tab. And now I'm just going to unlink dependencies. And as you can see, if I keep going like this, this section expands. So for example, let's keep 70 and I'm going to add 70 to bottom as well. And this section just got bigger. Now, what we could add, we could add an image element right here, just like that. And this time, let's choose a smaller image. So let's scroll down just a second. Let's see, this is the image we would like to use. Let's click Insert. And as you can see, this is how it looks. You can also change the alignment of this image. So if I click right here, this is what we get. If I would go to all elements, Let's choose heading element. And I'm just going to drag it right here underneath this image element and just type your text. So as you can see, just like that, you can create sections. You can add elements to the sections. And basically, when adding sections to your page, you basically create a page. So simple as that. Don't think to our complicated because you just have to drag and drop elements. So you, first of all, you start with this section and then you choose how many columns you want to have. And then you start adding elements to this section. And once you add all the elements, you can do some adjustments like layout adjustments, advanced adjustments to play around with Style, to play around with layout. And I always like to say, don't be afraid to explore everything yourself to get used to this tool, to this Plugin. Because this way you're going to learn how to use this tool much better. Alright, So now we can delete this section because we're not going to use and now you know how Elementor works. So in the next lesson, we're gonna start editing our homepage and we're going to create our own unique-looking page. We're going to replace this all information here with our information 39. (5.4) Let's Edit the Homepage (Elementor): In this lesson, we're going to start working on our homepage. And as you probably know, the Homepage is very important page because it's basically the front store of your physical store and the leaving a good first impression for your visitor is important. Alright, so as you can see now things look a bit different. It's just because I updated Elementor plug-in. And now instead of having this blue line right here that marks our section, it's now in purple color. So probably that's the biggest change we had after updating this plugin and lack. I mentioned you before in the lesson when I was talking about themes and plug-ins, it is important to keep everything up to date, so do not ignore updates. Tried to keep everything up to date. Alright, so we're going to work on our homepage. And when I'm working on a homepage, I like to have my blueprint for Homepage, basically the layout. So this is my layer that I usually use a format online stores, this is the same layout I used to use when I was building online stores for customers. And it's quite simple layout. So this is the first section. We're going to have a first section where the hero image and click to action button. So basically we have right here the same, which is going to do some changes. So basically we have our hero image and we have some texts and click to action button sharp now. And as you can see right here, I'm planning to have another section with best-selling products. So I'm going to show for products right here. And after this one I'm going to have a section where the showcasing some advantages of my online store. So I'm going to offer free shipping, low prices, fast delivery. So I'm going to have this section right here. After that, I'm going to have a section with categories. So I'm going to show the categories that I have on my online store. I'm planning to include only four categories. And I'm going to have the last section that is gonna be with trending products. So in total, I'm planning to have one or 2345 sections. If we would go to our homepage that we have right now, the current version, as you can see, we have quite a lot of sections. The first things first when working on pages, unlike to identify not just working with pages, but when I'm working with templates, I like to identify the sections that I'm not planning to use and the sections that I'm planning to keep, the sections that I'm not planning to use. Of course I'm gonna delete those sections. Alright, I'm gonna keep this first section. This right here is gonna be my other section. It's gonna be third section where I'm going to showcase the advantages of my online store. So I'm going to keep this one, I'm going to keep this one best-selling products. And I'm going to keep this one as well, except now I'm going to have four categories. So as you can see around here, we have categories of our products. That's just basically the template that had a free categories, but now we're going to have four. So we're gonna do some minor changes to this one right here. Again, it's up to you how you want to make your homepage look, but I'm just going to show you how I'm going to do this, but my blueprint with my layout, so I'm not planning to use this section, so I'm going to delete this one just like that. I'm not going to use this one as well. So I'm going to click around here. And just like that, I deleted this section. I'm going to keep trending products section. And what's next? I'm not going to keep this one because I don't have any customer reviews yet and I'm not planning to use it this section right here because it just doesn't make sense. It was added with a template. Alright, so I'm going to delete this section. And as you can see, how many sections we have right now, we're supposed to have five sections, 123456. So let's find this section that we're not going to use. Oh yeah, this is the section. So this image was added as a section. So let's delete this one. And now we have five sections to work on. Alright, so let's make that we have the structure looking for. So the first section is gonna be this one where the hero image, so it's in place. And as I can see, this section is supposed to be below this best-selling products section. So as you can see, this is the section and we can move this section down underneath best selling products section. Alright, so now we're getting closer. Alright, then let's check what else do we need to change? So we have first section, it's in place. We have this section in place. We have the third section in place as well. Now we're supposed to have Categories and trending products. So let's check what we have. So right, we have Categories. This is gonna be our Categories. And right here we're going to have our training Products. Alright, let's see what we have to change. So right here, I'm supposed to have four categories instead of three categories. So you might be wondering how you're going to add another category right here. It's simple. Just click on any category right here, on any column, the right mouse button, and let's click duplicate. Alright, so now I have four categories. So this is where I'm going to showcase my categories. Right here. I have more columns than I'm supposed to have. So what I'm gonna do, I'm just going to simply click the right mouse button on this column right here. And I'm going to delete this one. Alright, so now we are getting closer. What's next? I don't want to have this image right here, so I'm just going to click the right mouse button and I'm going to delete it. Alright, I'm gonna do the same with this one. Let's delete it and let's scroll up and let's see what else we can change. Alright, so I'm not going to use this right here, so I'm gonna click Delete. So my first task is to find the things that I'm not planning to use. Identify the sections that I'm not planning to use. And I'm going through the sections itself and that tried to locate the elements that I'm not using as well. Alright, so now my goal is work on this first section itself. So I want to change the image right here. And I don't like this image because it doesn't represent my brand and my goal is to add an image. So I have multiple ways to do that. But instead of replacing this image right here, I'm just going to add a background image for this section itself. So I'm going to click right here. And once I click on this button here, I'm doing changes to this section. So those are adjustments right here. And when I'm doing some changes, no matter what tab using, if it's layout style advance, I'm doing changes to this whole section and not two separate columns or separate elements, but to this whole section right here. Alright, so my goal is to add a background image. So those changes are done right here and Style tab. And the right now I want to add a background image so as I can see, we have background overlay. Alright? I don't want to use this background overlay, so I'm just going to delete this image right here. And let's change the opacity because I'm not planning to use this overlay at all. And actually we can disable this overlay by clicking on this button right here on this paintbrush. And now I just want to add a background image. Alright, so I'm going to click right here. I'm going to select Classic, and I'm going to choose Image. I've already uploaded some images, so I wouldn't waste your time. Those images that I'm using right here are downloaded from one of the Stock Photos website that I showed you previously. Alright, so this is the image I'm planning to use. I'm just going to select this image and I'm going to click Select. All right, so it doesn't look good, understand, but just bear with me. Alright, so let's choose that position is going to be center, center. So now let's choose display size. So let's click Run here, and let's choose color. So now it's covering hold this section. Alright. Now we're not going to use this image. So let's click the right mouse button and then let's delete this image right here. Okay, this is how it looks. Alright, now, this whole section is a bit narrow. I want to make this whole section right here a bit wider. So I'm going to click right here once again. And now I'm gonna go to Advanced Settings. Alright, so as you can see, we have some padding adjustments. So if I'm going to move this up like that, alright, I'm gonna make this 1145. And I'm going to change bottom to 145 as well. And it's a bit bigger right now. So right now, I'm just gonna replace the text right here. I'm going to add some of my texts that it's going to say that it's a toy store, and I will add a short description about my toys store. So that's exactly what I'm going to do. Alright, so I just added my text and this is how it looks at. Again, your situation is probably completely different, so it's going to be up to you what you want to include. But I usually like to include something interesting and funny. And now this is how it looks. Alright, what's next? Alright, so right here, this is the button and we should do some changes to this button because I don't like the style of this button. Just click on the button right here. And as you remember, all settings related to style can be done right here. But Lanka always like to say don't be afraid to explore everything yourself and try various different settings adjustments to see what works for you the best and do not be afraid because all changes are reversible. Alright, so let's go to style adjustments and I can add the color. I can change the color of this button. So if I would click right here, I can choose the color and I have one color prepared for myself and advance. As you remember, we had this coolers tool that generates colors, matching colors. So I have this color copied to my note, and I'm just going to paste this code right here. And as you can see, this is how it looks. I feel like it looks quite good. And now this button looks good, but it's not functional. Alright, so if I would go right here, as you can see, link is said to hashtag and it just means it's inactive. So let's add a link to this button. So once our visitor clicks on this link, I want him to go to all the products I have. So basically to a sharp page. So to find your shop page, just go to your website. So in my case, it's Bacon avocados.com. And I can tell you that the default version of the shop page is supposed to be slash shop. So that's exactly what I'm going to enter. And let's hit Enter and let's see if it's our shop page. Alright, so this is our sharp edge. And as you can see, the permalink says, instead of sharp, it says sharp dash T2. So that means we should do some changes to this page. So as you remember, we should go to our dashboard and it's a page, so we have to do changes to a page. So if I would go to pages, I would select all pages. Of course, it's not crucial or anything like that, but I like to make things look professional and good and I don't want to anything look unprofessional. So in my opinion that having this number two at the end of this page, it just doesn't look good. Maybe in your case, it's not going to show up like that. But let's say if it's going to show up just like that, we can do changes. So as you remember, we have our shop page, and this is our shop page. It even says that it's set to display products. So it says shop page. So let's click quick edit and let's see what we have. Alright, we have the slug that it's sharp dash two. So we can delete the end of this slug and let's keep it like that. And let's click Update. Now we can click view and it looks good. It looks as it's supposed to look. Alright, but just in case you experience some issues, I know it has happened to me in the past. Once you click View, you might see that it's just showing an empty page. So if that happens to you, your solution to this problem is you should go to the dashboard. You should go to your pages 1 more time. And then you should click on this page right here, Edit, and then you should click preview. Alright, let's click Preview and new tab and everything should work. If that doesn't help, I'm going to show you another solution. You should go to your dashboard. You should go right here and you should click Burj, all cash. And that should solve your problem. I'm not saying that this is going to happen to you, but if this happens to you, you will know how to solve this issue and you shouldn't have this problem. I know this happened to me once in the past and I know one person who might help to build an online store. This happened as well. So I just wanted to show you how you can solve this issue, but it doesn't necessarily mean that there's going to happen to you as well. Alright, so now let's go to All Pages 1 more time. And all we want to do is we want to know the URL of our sharp edge. So let's click view one more time. And now we can copy this URL right here because we're going to use it for our buttons. So now we can close this window and we can go back to our button right here. At the moment, it's inactive, but once we based our URL of our sharp, it becomes active. Alright, so now we're done with this section right here. But before we move on to the next section of our page, Let's make sure that everything looks great on other devices, not just on a desktop device, but on mobile devices and on tablets as well. So if I would click right here, responsive mode, I can select if I want to check how it's going to look on mobile device. Alright, it looks good, but it's hard to read texts. So we have to do some adjustments to this section right here one more time. But now when we are doing those changes here, we only doing changes to the mobile version of our website. So alright, let's go back to Style and now we can select our image. So let's select our image one more time. It is going to be the same image. So let's click Select. And now we have to change the position. So let's select position and let's choose system. Alright? So now let's play around with this axis. Alright, so I'm just going to keep zero. Let's move this one to the left and it looks like that. Alright, so now it makes sense, it looks much better. Okay, let's make sure that it looks good on tablets as well. On tablets, it looks good. So we can keep it as it is. We don't really need to do any changes right here. Alright, let's go back to our desktop view and alright, let's scroll down what's next. So we have best-selling products section right here. And actually we're not going to do too many changes the dissection because it's quite a simple section. And our main goal is to change padding the margin of this section because as you can see, it's a bit too low compared to this section right here. So if I would click right here, I will be doing changes to this whole section right here. So let's go to Advanced Settings. And as you can see, padding top, it's set to 140 and let's make it 90. Let's see how it's going to look when we're going to set this one to 90. And I think it looks much better. And what's next? Now we have to feature our products. So let's click on this area marked in grey color. And as you can see now we have this short code. It says that products limits, so it's going to display only for products, and it's going to display on the four columns and visibility featured. So it's going to display featured products and I'm going to show you how you can feature your products. And it says that it's going to take products from the category groceries. So as you remember, this category came but our starter template, and now we have different categories than the ones it came with. So let's go back to our website one more time and let's check our categories. What categories do we have? So let's go to dashboard and let's go to Products. Let's select Categories. And as you can see, those are the categories we have Simply all you have to do is just copy the categories you want to use. So for example, I'm going to copy this category right here, just a slug. And I'm going to go back to our homepage here, and I'm going to paste this category right here instead of groceries. This is the category I'm going to use. And now once we save everything and once we set that, we want to display a certain products. I will show you how that's done in later stages. We're going to display only products from the would entice category. You can add more categories, just type comma space and add another category. Just a second. Let's make sure that I'm not mistaking anything. Let's go to this one right here. And as you can see, all categories are separated by commas. So just like that, you can add more categories. Now let's work on this section, on this part right here. Let's fix both parts for featured products. So again, let's add wooden toys. And now let's add another category. So I'm just going to copy costumes category Ryan here, I'm gonna go back and I'm going to paste this category here. Alright? And just like that, I can actually add more categories. Let's say I could add bath toys as well. So I'm just going to copy this slug will go back to this window right here. I'm going to add a comma. I'm going to make a space, and I'm going to paste this category as well. So now in trending products we have three categories set. And once we select that, we want our products feature dried here from those categories. And like I said in later stages, I will show you how that's done and those products will be displayed right here. If you would go back right here. Now we only have, in this part only products from the category wooden toys. So once we select that we want feature twice from that category, dose twice and those stores on from this category will be displayed right here. In later stages, we're going to play around with those adjustments. But right now, I think everything looks good. So we are actually done with the second section as well. So as you remember, this was our second section and it has four products to display. Later I'm going to add more products actually, I'm just going to duplicate some of the products just to show you how that works. In your case, you will add all of your products yourself, and you will be able to play around with those adjustments. Alright, let's go back and let's play around, not play around. Let's work on this section right here. So in this section I'm going to showcase that are offer free shipping. And I'm planning to offer free shipping for orders above 50 on. So all I have to do right here is just type zero. Alright, so now it's good. And what else, What else? Planning to showcase that huge savings? Alright, I'm just going to keep this one huge savings because I'm planning to have low prices, so it's basically the same and fast deliveries. So next to free shipping, I'm going to include fast delivery. So I'm just going to replace this text right here. I'm going to add fast delivery. Alright, so I just changed the text and as you can see now, I say that I do free shipping, fast delivery, huge savings. But again, this all Editing part, the information you want to include is all up to you. It's just like in my case, I like to offer free shipping for orders above, let's say $50. And I usually focus on fast delivery are usually products within 24 h, if that's possible. And I usually don't charge my customers much for products. I'm not too greedy. But again, it's up to you how you want to do this, what way you want to go. But I just wanted to show you that this is how you can do it. And all settings, all the texts there, everything like that will be up to you. But as you now, we're practicing right now. So your final work is probably going to be different from mine. Alright, so now what is that add-on like? So as you can see, this icon right here doesn't represent that it says fast delivery. So we can replace this icon. If I would click on this icon right here, as you can see, I have some options for this icon so I can click icon library and I can look for Shipping. Alright, I think this icon will work. And I'm going to select this icon. I'm going to click Insert. Alright, so now it makes sense. But now I don't like how this section looks. It's too dark, it just doesn't look too good. But my general design, so I'm going to click right here to do changes to this whole section. And the style adjustments are done here is you remember, and as you can see, we have background color. It's a bit too dark. I want to change it and want to make this colored the same as this one. So I'm going to take the color sampler. I'm going to click around here, and I think I'm going to use this color. Alright, it looks much better. And now what's next? What could we do next? We could change those columns, the style of those columns because they are too dark. Alright, let's click on this column. Of course, we can click the right mouse button and we can click Edit Column. And as you know, adjustments to style are done in this tab right here. And now it's activated as a background overlay. So I'm going to expand this one. And as you can see, it's set to 0.9. And if we would move this A bit to the left is 0.4. I think it looks better, but now our icon doesn't look too good. It's hard to see what it is. Let's click on this icon. Let's go to Style and we can change the color. So if I would use color picker, I think I could go with this color. Let's see how it's going to look. Alright, it looks much better. Okay, let's keep it this way. And I'm gonna do the same with Discount. So I can click right here. And I can go to Style. And as you remember, Background Overlay and set it this to 0.4. So yeah, just like that. Alright, so I'm going to click on this icon. I'm going to go to Style. I'm going to choose the color. I'm going to select color sampler. I'm going to choose this color bone and this is how it looks. Okay, I'm gonna do the same. So I can click here or I can click the right mouse button Edit Column. And I can go to Style. And again, Background Overlay 0.4. Yes. And let's change the color of this icon. Alright, let's change the color right here. Let's choose it just like that. And boom, this is how it looks. Alright, now feel like it looks much better. Like I said you before, don't be afraid to explore everything yourself because this way you will learn how to use Elementor much butter. Alright, so what's next? Now I'm planning to showcase my categories right here. Alright, so how I'm gonna do this? It's very simple math. First mission is I have to change the text right here. So I'm just going to type that this is wooden toys right here. Montessori toys, educational toys and bath toys. And right here I'm going to add some texts. So as you can see, once I click on this section, not section, but on this element right here, I can click on this element itself. I can click right here. And as you can see, I can change the title. The title is here, farm fresh fruits descriptions. So instead of using those descriptions right here and the titles, I'm going to add my own to represent my stock, to represent my categories. Alright, so as you can see, I replace the text and now it's kinda represents my brand, my business, my online store. So we haven't done yet because we have the images around here that do not match the things that we say right here. To replace the image, Let's click right here to edit this whole column itself. Let's go to Style, and let's go to background overlay. Probably it's set for background overlay. Yes, it is. So let's click on this image and wooden toys. So I'm going to use this image and I'm just going to click Select All. Alright, it looks good, doesn't it? And let's do the same with this one. So let's click right here. Let's go to Style, and let's go to background overlay. Let's click on this image. And now let's select this one right here. Alright, let's click Select. Alright, it looks good. And let's do the same with the third one. And let's go to style. Let's choose the image. And this time the image is gonna be this one. Let's click Select. Okay, Just a second. Why it's not updating. Just one more time. Let's go to this image. Maybe let's try this one. It's not saving for some reason, but it's supposed to save. Alright, let's click right here one more time. Let's replace this image here. Let's choose the image. The one I'm planning to use. Just a second. Let's select that we want to work on our positioning. For some reason. It's not updating, but no worries about that. You're going to fix that right away. Alright, so for now let's keep it as it is. And let's go to work on the last column that is right here. Let's go to Style and background overlay, and let's choose the image. This time. This is going to be the image I want to use. Alright, so now it works. So our goal now is to make this image go a bit lower. Alright, so right now let's choose position. Let's select Custom. And let's play around with this axis right here. And I think it looks good. Alright, let's try one more time to work on this right here. Alright, let's make sure that we have selected the image. Alright, It doesn't work, but no worries about that. Sometimes things like that can happen, but it doesn't mean that we will not be able to solve this issue, alright, before we do any changes, let's make sure that everything looks good on other devices. Alright, let's click right here. Alright, it doesn't look too good. But again, we will be able to do changes. Alright, let's click right here. I end on a tablet. Everything's gonna look great. As you can see, everything's gonna look great except maybe ride here. We could do some changes. So as you can see right now, it's displaying like this and it just doesn't look too good. We could make everything to display in one line. So let's go right here, and let's go to Advanced Settings here. And just a second. If you're going to play around with bottom. Now, it's not helping So let's go back. Let's keep 225. So things like that do happen. And sometimes when you are building a website, it's all about problem-solving, but no worries about that. We can fix this issue. So if you are doing a changes to the section and it's not helping, the things are not changing as you wish. They were changing. So that means your second option is to start doing changes two columns before you do any adjustments to let say, not columns but two elements. So first you do changes to this section right here. And if it's not helping, then you go to the column right here. And that's exactly what we're gonna do. Uh, let's select the first column here, and let's go to layout adjustments. So let's change the column size instead of 50. Let's make it, let's say 100, Let's do 100. Alright, so let's make it 100. And let's go to this column as well. And instead of 50, let's make it 100 as well. And I think it's going to look much better than the previous version. Alright, 100 looks good. And now we have to do the same with this one. Alright, let's go to layout adjustments and let's set it to 100. Alright, let's make it 100. And now everything looks much better. Alright, So now we have done some changes to the desktop version. As you can see, desktop version stayed the same no matter that we did some changes to tablet. And now it looks good except this image is right here the same. So we're going to fix that a bit later. And let's go to tablet. Let's make sure that everything looks good. Alright, everything looks great. And let's go to mobile view. Alright, and mobile view, it looks good as well. But right now just a second, Let's scroll down. As you can see here, we have some issues with our categories. So before we add URLs to these buttons, Let's make sure that everything looks good on each the y's. So what we want to do here is we want to click right here. And let's go to layout adjustments. And just a second. Now, let's go to Advanced tab. And here we have to do some padding adjustments. Alright, just a second. Let's make this one. Just let's keep going. Let's keep going up. It's just too much right now. Alright, let's make it 60 and it still doesn't look too good. But again, no worries. Like I said, sometimes when you're building a website, it's all about the problem-solving. So obviously, what's, our next step is we want to unlink values and let's see what we can get if you're gonna do some adjustments to bottom right here. So if I'm going to keep increasing this value right here, as you can see, this column is expanding and I think I'm going to keep it to 160. And I'm gonna do basically the same with each other column. But before I do that, I just want to make sure that this image right here is properly positioned. So as you remember, the changes that are two images and anything like that I've done right here and Style tab. And as you remember, we set this image right here. So it was set as background overlay. And let's make sure that we have the same image set. So this is the image we want to use. Let's click Select, and now let's choose the position. So let's choose Custom. And now let's change this axis, just, Let's keep it, this one as zero. And let's do changes to this one. Alright, now, everything looks much better. Alright, so next we have to change this column right here. So let's click right here, and let's go to Advanced. And as you remember, first of all, we set everything to 60. So let's do the same right here. Let's make sure that we have set the value to 60. Let's unlink other values. Now bottom adjustments are supposed to be 160. This way we're going to fix every single column right here, and everything is going to look just great. Alright, So instead of 100/6, Let's make sure that it's 116th. And now once again, we can do changes to the image. So let's go to background overlay. Let's make sure that we have the same image right here just in case it just disappears. And now we have to change the position. So let's select Custom right here. And as you remember, we have to change the numbers here. And I think it looks good. I think it looks good. And we can do the same with educational toy. So let's click educational toys right here and the image is set. So just one more time. Let's try this one more time. Let's try to set this image right here. Let's see if it's going to change. Now it's not changing. But like I said you before, I will show you how to fix decision. Alright, so now our goal is to change padding. So just like the previous time we set it to 60, Let's make sure that it's set to 60 as well, every single value. Now we can unlink values And now we can actually set this one to 160. So instead of increasing the number, I'm just going to add one, and now it's set to 160. Alright, so now let's work on this last column. You see in my case, this image is not changing, but I will show you how you can fix this issue. Maybe in your case, everything is gonna be fine and you want need to do any changes. But in my case, as you can see, we have some bugs. Alright, so let's select the last column or in year, let's go to Advanced tab. And as you remember, we must have 60 to each of these values. So we have to add 162 each of these values. And now it looks much better. Let's unlink this one and bottom is supposed to be 116. Okay, so now everything makes much more sense. But before we leave, we still have to do changes to this image. So let's go to style background overlay just like the previous time. And let's make sure that we have selected the right image. Let's select this image one more time and position. Alright, so the position is supposed to be here just like that. I think it looks good. If it doesn't look too good for you, you can still play around with various adjustments. And like I said, don't get discouraged. Don't be afraid to play around with various tools, very Settings, because this way you will learn how to use this editor much better. So let's make sure that everything looks good. So the first section, yes, it looks good. Best-selling products. Later we're going to showcase our best-selling products. We have this information right here that is properly displayed. Now we have our categories. Everything looks good. And right here we're going to have our trending products. So we are almost done with all the Homepage Editing. And let's go back to tablet view and let's make sure that everything looks good right here. And almost surfing looks here good. But right here we have to do some changes to this image. As you can see, it's not properly aligned. Let's go to style. Let's make sure that we have this image selected. And just a second, Let's click this image. Let's select this image. And now we have to set to customers, so it's already set to custom. And now we have to change this axis right here. Alright? Now everything makes sense. Alright? Except maybe we could change this right here. Instead of showing everything you're not in the new line, we could delete the space and we can show everything like that. So just a second, Let's make sure that this looks like this as well. Everything's properly aligned and everything looks good. I think everything looks good. I liked the way everything looks. Let's make sure that every single column is properly aligned because as you can see, this column has space in between this column, this one as well, but this one doesn't have it. So let's check what is the issue. So let's start with the first column right here. And let's go to advance and let's see what we have margin. We don't have any margin adjustments here. How about this one? Let's check if this has any marginal adjustments. It has 15, 15, so I think it's good. And how about this one? It doesn't have any adjustments, so we should try to make, now, let's keep it zero. And I think this one should have some other changes, other value, so this one should have 50. Alright, so this one didn't have 15. And bottom we could also set to 15 as well. Alright, so now everything looks properly aligned. And how about on mobile view? One more time. Let's check if mobile view looks good. Alright, so now everything looks quite good. And yeah, if you don't like the way it looks, the sizing and everything you can do changes as well to make everything fit perfectly. But just because to save you some time, I'm going to keep everything as it is. And yeah, actually, I'm just too picky. I cannot leave this one like that. So I'm going to go back to Style and I'm going to go to overlay. And I'm going to change the positioning. Alright, I think this way is going to be much better. Alright, let's go back to desktop view. So let's make sure that every single view looks as it's supposed to look. Alright, so now everything looks good. We have our first section that is right here, as you remember, it has a hero image and everything. But actually we're not done yet because we still have to do some adjustments. Alright, so before we leave and save everything, we still have to add buttons right here. As you can see, the things are not properly aligned for some reason. Just a second. We can actually, you know what, we can actually delete this right here, Montessori, it's kinda obvious that it's going to be Montessori toys and educational toys. Maybe let's change this for education. Alright, so now everything is properly aligned. Just a second, Let's make sure 40. (5.5) Let's Edit the Contact Page (Elementor): In this lesson, we're going to create our contact page. So we are done with our homepage. Later on we're gonna do some style adjustments, but those Style adjustments will be done globally for this website. So those adjustments will be done not just to Homepage, but for all other pages as well. So now we can close this layout. Since like I said, we are done with our Homepage and let's scroll down to our contact page. So this is our contact page. This is how it looks. And it doesn't look good because it doesn't have any information in it. But we're going to change that right away. So we could add some contact details like our phone numbers, social media icons, and maybe your address if you have a physical store, but if you don't have, It's gonna be up to you what information you want to include. And of course, I usually like to include a Contact Form tomorrow Contact page. So my Wooster smart customers can easily leave me a message without needing to go to their email inbox and send me a message. Alright, so what we want to do right now, we want to go to our dashboard and I want you to install one plugin. This plugin will be used to Add Forms. So let's go to plug-ins right here, and let's click Add New. And the plugin you want to look for is called fluent forms. Alright, so this is the plugin we want to use. I've been using this plugin for quite awhile and I know that it works well. Alright, let's click Activate. And now before we create our first warm, I would recommend you to delete a plugin that came with our Starter Templates with our Astra Theme. And this plugin is called WP forms. It's also quite good option for creating forms, but it's very limited and there's a huge chance that you will need to purchase a paid plan just to get all the features of this Plugin. Alright, so we deactivate this plugin and now we can click Delete. Let's click Delete. And now our flu and forms plugin is active. So to find our forms, we have to go right here. And what we want to do right now is we want to go right here, new form, and we're going to create a new Contact Form. It's going to be as simple and straightforward Contact Form. So we're going to use this form, we're going to use this template. And now it's gonna be up to you what fields you want to include. But I usually like to include just the name field. I don't like to include the lastName. And of course, as you can see, our users will have an option if they want to add their firstName or not, but they're gonna need to add their e-mail address and their message. It's just because this is how things work, because you will need to reply to them. Alright, so now we have this form already, but we should do some changes. We could change the style of this button and we could change the color of this button if we would go to Advanced Settings. No, not Advanced Settings button, Submit button. And we should go to button style and let's select Color. Alright, so if we're going to select know Style, if you're going to select red button. And yeah, I think the red color will look great with our theme, but our style. And if it's not the option you want to use, you can use any other option that will work for you. I'm gonna go with red and I think it looks good. So before we save this formula, Let's make sure that we are done with. Alright, let's stay on this page. Let's click Save. And before we leave this warm, Let's do some settings right here. So right here, as you can see, confirmation Settings, once our visitor wants our customer or potential customer types a message and he sends us a message. He will see this message. Thank you for your message. We will get in touch with you shortly, alright, so we can keep it as it is right here, Email notifications. So right here you want to be notified once a customer leaves you a message. So let's activate this one. And now we have to do some adjustments right here. Those are very important. And you want to go right here, send two emails. So it's up to you what email you want to use, but I highly recommend you to use your business email, the one you created previously from the previous lessons where I showed you how to create your business email address on Zoho. So just type this email address that you create it because right here you don't want to use your WordPress administrator email address because in this case, the forums won't work and you will not be notified to your email address that someone left you a form. Just type the email address you created previously. In my case, it's going to be Support at a bacon avocado is.com. Alright, so once you have done this, we can scroll down save changes. Alright, let's go up. And now let's go to all forms. And just a second. Yeah, this is the form we just created. And we can copy this short code right here because we're going to need this code a bit later. And just a second, Let's preview this form one more time and let's make sure that this is the form be graded. Yes, it is. This is the form. And now we can go to our pages. Let's go to All Pages and let's find Our contact page. So this is our contact page and you want to click right here added. And since we have Elementor installed to our website, we can create this page using Elementor and that's exactly what we're gonna do. Our contact page is going to look much better. So let's click Edit with Elementor. And the big advantage of having an Astra Theme and Starter Templates is that we can import a pre-made templates so we wouldn't need to create everything ourselves, like by creating sections and dragging elements. We can actually click right here, and we could select blogs. And now let's choose that. We are looking for Contact. Let's choose Contact. And now it's completely up to you what type of form you want to use, what type of layout you want to use. But in this case, I believe I can go with this one. Let's choose this one and let's select Import block. Alright, so we successfully imported this contact block. And as you can see, this is how it looks, but just in case it didn't work for you properly. Sometimes in rare occasions, the things just gets stuck. And instead of waiting, you can simply refresh the page itself, the whole page itself, and everything should work fine. Alright, so now we have this block right here and we have to add our contact form. So this is where we're going to add our contact for men to add this warm B12. Look for elements that is called short code. Just a second, let scroll down. This is the element we want to use, so just drag it and drop it. And right here, just paste the code that we basically copied previously when we created our form. Alright, so this is outlooks. And right here we could replace the text and it could say send us a message. Okay, it looks great. Now you can replace the phone number. And if you don't have address to display or you don't want any address to display. This second thing that is important and that I like to display myself is my email address, so my business email address. So I'm just going to type email address. Alright, so I just added my email address. Always like to include the my email address just in case the customer weren't able to contact using this form, but it doesn't really happen, but it's good to include your email address, alright, social icons right here, you can add your social profiles. So simply click on those icons right here and here. Once you click on Profile, you can add your URL of your profile. So simply paste it right here. If you have a Facebook page, just paste the URL of your Facebook page. If you want to include LinkedIn, you can base your profile right here. If you don't want to use LinkedIn and you want to use, let's say Instagram. You can click on this icon and just use Search to look for Instagram. Alright? Just like that, you'll find Instagram icon. Let's click Insert. And this is how it looks. If you don't like this size of these icons, you can change that right here and you can adjust the size, alright, just like that, you can make your icons much bigger. And I think it looks good. You can also change the colors of those icons. It's gonna be completely up to you. Alright, let's click Update. And once we have updated this page, we can click right here and let's select View Page. Let's see how it looks. Alright, and as you can see, this is how it looks. This is our fully functioning Contact Us page. So using this page, our visitors will be able to reach out to us and we will be able to help them out with any questions. Before we leave. Maybe we could change the text, Ryan here, instead of saying submit form, we could say Send message. Alright, let's go right here, the dashboard one more time. And as you remember, we created this Contact Form using flu and forums and we want to select all forms. And now let's click Edit right here, and let's click right here submit form. And instead of submit form, let's say Send message. Alright, let's click Save Form. And let's go back to our side and let's see how it looks now, let's click Contact. And as you can see, Send message, everything looks great. And I could actually test this format so we could type the name, email, address, subject and message. That's exactly what I'm gonna do. Alright, let's hit Send message. Alright, so it says, thank you for your message. We will get in touch with you shortly. So it should work. Right now I'm going to open my email account and I'm just going to test if this works to see if I received a notification alpha submitted form, then as you can see, we successfully received a notification email that someone left as a form. So don't forget that it is extremely important to add your other e-mail address instead of using WordPress administrators email address. So just a second, we will go back right here. Let's go to our forms just to make sure that you have entered other email address. Because if you haven't done this, those forms will not work. And by the way, once someone leaves a form, you will see right here, not right here, but here as well in entries. Here, in entries you will see that someone left you a form, but you will also be notified it to your email address. So most importantly, don't forget that and all forms once you're here, this is the form we just created. And once you go to settings of this form, don't forget that you want to be notified to other email address, not the same as you use to login to your WordPress dashboard, otherwise it will not work. So once again, let's make sure that right here, send to Email is your business email address. Because in any case, it's the best to keep everything in one place, in the same place, and to receive a notification email alpha placed form of a message to your business email address is just a good practice because once you get a message, once you notified that someone left you a message, you can easily copied this email address and you can reply to disperse and right away, Simple as that. Alright, so make sure that you have added your email address right here. Alright, so basically that's all for this lesson. Now you know how to create your Contact Us page with an active Contact Form 41. (5.6) Creating Menus: In this lesson, we're going to create our main menu. And I usually like to include my Product Categories and the main menu and displayed this main menu right here in our header. So that's exactly what we're gonna do in this lesson. We're just going to create our main menu. And in this menu we're going to include categories, Product Categories, because this is a quite simple layout and it's very easy to understand for our visitors. Alright, so let's go to the dashboard. And before we create our menu first, we should know the URLs of our categories. So let's go to Products and right here, and let's open Categories in a new tab. Let's go to the Categories. And as you can see, this is our category tree. This is what categories we have. And we just going to copy the URLs of these categories and we're going to add them to our menu. Alright, so let's go back to this tab right here. And now we should go to appearance right here. And let's select menus. As you can see right here, we have menu editor. And if you would go right here, as you can see, we have more Menus, not just the one menu that is right here. Main menu, we have quick links, secondary menu. And if you would click right here, you could create as many Menus actually as you want. It's completely up to you in this course and in this lesson I'm going to show you how I do it myself. And if you will ever want to create a new menu, you can simply click right here, and this new menu will pop up here and you can add any type of menu. If I would go right here, managed locations, we're not gonna do anything here because once we are going to edit our header and our footer, we basically be able to access all those settings right here, but in a different location. So we don't need to do anything here. And okay, let's go back to Menus. And as you can see right here, if you would select menu locations, so you can select menu location, but right now, everything is good as it is by default. So our goal right now is to create a new menu items so we can add this menu item to our menu. Alright, so let's use custom links. So right here, you want to add the URL of your category. So let's go back to Categories, and let's open this category in the new tab as well. Let's click View, and now we want to copy this category. And let's go back to our Menus and just paste this URL right here and add the title of your category. Alright, let's click Add to Menu. And as you can see, we successfully added a new menu item. Now, we can actually delete this menu item that was created by default because we're not going to use it. We can click right here, remove. Alright, so let's go back to all Categories. Now we can close this category and let's open bath toys in a new tab, just like we did with wooden toys. And again, let's copy this category. That's go back to our menu editor and right here and just paste the URL and give the title to this category. Alright, let's click Add to Menu. Alright, there's, you can see we successfully added to menu items. And if you will ever want to create any different type of menu, you can also include pages right here from the list. As you can see, you can even include Blog Posts. You will ever want to do that. And you can also include WooCommerce endpoints. Again, this one is going to be up to you. Maybe in the future you will decide that you want to do some changes to your current menu version. But for now let's focus on adding custom links. And just like I added those to run here, I'm going to finish adding all the rest of the categories to my menu. Alright, there's, you can see I just finished adding all Categories to my menu. And this is how it looks. If you don't like how it looks, you don't like the positioning of each element. You can swap places if you would move, let's say this element right here, it's going to be the first element. You can also create categories and subcategories. So for example, let's say if you have educational toys or maybe not educational toys, let's say, let's go to painting right here. So let's say our painting would be the main category. And you're going to have subcategories like child Categories, four brushes for paper or something else similar. And you want to make this category right here, the main one. And you want to create a drop-down menu. So in this case, you would have to take your Sub-Category. Let's say this is the subcategory with paintbrushes. And if we would move it to the right side, just like that, we will be able to create a drop-down menu. Let's not do this right now because we don't have any parent and child categories. Everything is good as it is, so we can move it back. I'm just going to swap places with this one right here and I'm going to make this one the last. And I feel like it looks good. I feel like it looks good. And now we can click save menu. Alright, let's click one more time saver menu. Alright, so now we can preview how it looks. So I'm just going to open this one in a new tab one more time. And let's click and let's see how it looks. And as you can see, now, we have our main menu ready. So this is how it looks. And later stages when we're going to edit our header, we're going to change the positioning of this menu right here. We can position this menu to the right or to the center. It's going to be completely up to you. But for now is you can see we successfully, we created our main menu. So if I would click on costumes category right here, as you can see, our go-to ma, costumes category. Alright, let's go back to the homepage of our website and just to show you an example how the drop-down menu works. So let's go back to our menu editor and let's say I'm going to make costumes category, my parent category and child category is going to be bath toys. In your case, of course, it's going to be different categories and subcategories, but I'm just showing you this how it's going to look. Alright, so I'm going to take educational toys as well as a child category for costumes. That is a parent category in this case. I'm going to move this one to the right side. And now I'm just going to click save menu and we're going to check how it looks and use it yourself. That by moving many elements to the right side, we can create drop-down menus. Alright, let's check how it looks. And if I hover over costumes, as you can see, we have a drop-down menu. So just like that, you can also create a drop-down menus. But in this case I'm just gonna go back and I'm going to make it as it was previously. Alright, so we're back to the first version of our menu. And as you can see, everything looks great and just like that, you can easily create your Menus 42. (5.7) Customizing the Theme (Astra): In this lesson, we're going to start customizing our WordPress theme. So to start customizing it, you have to click right here, Customize. Alright, so as you can see, this is how our customization options to look. And sometimes in rare occasions, once you click on Customize, freeze and it might not load. So in this case, try closing your browser and opening it one more time. But I think it shouldn't happen to you. But again, if this happens, if once you click on Customize, you are not seeing anything and just freezes. Try refreshing your browser or restarting your computer and it should help. It just happened to me a couple of times, but probably it was the fault of my computer. Alright, so let's check the sidebar of all customization options. So as you can see, even have this notice right here, if you would use Astra Pro version, you will have more customization options. So this is the biggest downside when you are using free themes is that you are lagging customization options. But in any case, no matter what type of FEM you are working on, you still can squeeze out at this femur and you can get good results. So that's exactly what we're gonna do in this section. And then later section where I'm going to show you how to edit everything with a premium theme. You will see yourself how many customization options you're going to have. Compare it to this Astra Theme. Alright, so let's start with global settings right here. And as you can see, if I would go to typography tab, I can change the font on my website. So as you remember, when I was Installing a Starter Templates, I had an option to choose what fonts and what color palette I want to use. So if you chose a font and you don't like it anymore, this is where you can change it. Alright, let's go back and in colors. So in colors, of course, you will be able to change the color palette of your website. So if you don't like the color palette you chose previously, you can change it right here. Okay, Let's go back container. We're not gonna do any changes in container because everything is good as it is by default. And once again, I like to say that you should explore everything yourself and try out two different options, different settings. Maybe you will decide that you want to make your website look different. Not just to follow this course that are making, not just following my lessons, but maybe you will want to make something different. So don't be afraid to explore everything yourself. Alright, let's go back. Buttons. Obviously right here you will be doing changes to the buttons. And here you can find various different style adjustments for buttons. You can change colors and do all other adjustments. So this one is up to you, but I feel like everything is good as it is by default. Alright, if I would go right here and that would activate, this one enables scroll to top. Just a second, I'm going to scroll down once it's active, as you can see, it activates this option right here. If I'm going to click on this icon, I will go to the top of my page, so it's up to you if you want to activate this. But I usually like to keep everything simple and I do not use too many features on my website. Alright, let's go back. Accessibility. We don't need to change anything because everything is good. Let's go back. And if you would go to blog, get the door, you don't need to change anything right here as well. Okay. Let's go back here, actually right here. We're not going to need to change anything as well because everything is good. Okay, Let's go back. So now you are a bit more familiar with all the global settings. So global settings are basically related to Style and it's up to you if you want to make any changes. Let's go back. And Heather, Builder, we're not going to do any changes right now because I have a completely other lesson for working with your header that is right here. And of course I'm going to have a separate lesson for working with your Footer debt is right here. Alright, let's go up and breadcrumbs. We don't need to activate any breadcrumbs because it will mess up the way our layout looks. So for example, if I'm going to click on this product right here, and if I would activate breadcrumbs, so let's say just like that, as you can see, we have breadcrumbs. Basically we have short map of our page, the current page, we add the category and the Homepage. But again with eCommerce stores and do not use that, and you don't really need to use that as well. Okay, let's go back. Alright, just a second. Let me see. Let's go back to global settings. And I just wanted to check something with colors. Oh yeah, so something is important here after all, even felt like I said, those settings are completely up to you. Again, don't be afraid to explore offering yourself. But here, the one thing that is important to me is that adult like this gray color right here, as you can see, my image is with a white background and I would like to have this gray color and white as well. So this is that option side background. I'm going to click right here, and I will choose this option and I feel like it looks much better. Yeah, it looks much better. Alright, so let's go back. And if you will need to do this change, to change the background, just remember that all settings related to two colors are done right here. Alright, let's go back. So breadcrumbs, you're not using We're going to skip blog tab because we haven't added any blog posts. We haven't set a page for displaying blog posts, so I have a completely separate section for working with blogs. So again, it's gonna be up to you want to start boasting blog post, but are always highly recommend to pose blog posts because this way you can attract more visitors to your website. Alright, let's go to Pages. And right here, if we would do any changes, we would make changes to pages. So as you remember it, pages that were not created using Elementor. So those pages are cookie policy, returns and refunds and all other legal type of pages. Alright, so here we're not going to need to change anything because everything is good. So let's go back again. Let's go to sidebar. So this one is optional if you want to activate sidebar for your website. So for example, if I would activate this sidebar right here, as you can see, I have a sidebar. And in this sidebar I can include some information, but I don't really do that. Sometimes I activate this option when I'm working with business websites to represent brands. But when working with eCommerce stores, like to keep this option right here without a sidebar. I think it looks much better. Alright, let's go back Footer Builder. So I have a completely separate lesson for this. So now we can skip it custom post types. If I would go right here. We do not need to change anything because we haven't added any blog posts. And actually the current layout that we have right now is gonna be fine. And later once we start adding blog posts where I'm going to show you how that works. Maybe we will come back to this option right here to check what options we have. And we're going to test out some different layouts. But for now, we do not need to change anything because everything is just great the way it is. Alright, if I would go to WooCommerce. So obviously right here we will be doing changes to the WooCommerce part of our website so we can do changes to Product Catalog right here. We can do some general adjustments. If I would go to general adjustments again, we have some layout adjustments that we do not need to change to work on. So if I'll go to Product Catalog just a second, it's going to open our product catalog. So this is our catalog and this is how it looks. So we can change the layout, we can change how many columns we want to display, and you can do various other adjustments you can hide, let's say price. If you do not want to display the price of your product, you can activate prize bag, you can activate Add to Cart if you want to. Just a second. This is how it's going to look, but I usually like to keep everything simple, so I'm just going to deactivate this one and we're not going to change anything. So we can go back. Alright, just a second. If I want to go back to this product catalog tab, and if I would go to Design tab, as you can see, I can change the alignment, but we are limited right here because we're not using a pro version of Astra Theme so we can go back and single products. So if I would go to single product, I will be doing changes to a product itself, to the product page. So for example, I'm just going to open this page. And as you can see, this is how it looks. And if I would do changes like layout, I can disable and enable some of the elements, as you can see right here, I just enabled that. I want to show category. So in this case, I could disable meta element right here. And as you can see, it disappears. And now we only have category, but I usually like to keep it this way and I can disable the category because if we're going to show everything this way, but matter enabled is you can see we have category and we have tags for this product payments. We can enable this one. You can let your customers know what type of payments you accept. And as you can see, we have Visa, MasterCard and all other options. You can even add other options, like if you type PayPal, you could add an icon. So for example, if I'm going to look for PayPal icon, as you can see, I can add a PayPal icon just like that. Alright, just a second. And this is how it's going to look. So we can keep it this way. It should increase our trust to our customers. We say that guaranteed save checkout, usually such simple tricks work and you could expect increase in conversion rate. Alright, let's scroll down what else we have. So we could disable free shipping. This text right here is you can see we have plus free shipping. So of course it depends if you are offering free shipping. So in this case, you might not want to disable this option. In my case, I'm not offering free shipping. Do offer free shipping, but my customer has to spend at least $50 on mass store to get free shipping. Alright, so this is how it's going to look and let's go to Design tab. And yet we don't have any options right here because once again, we are using a free version of Astra Theme. Alright, let's go back. And if I would go to card page, obviously right here, I will be doing changes to the cart page. So I should go to my cart page right here just a second. Alright, so this is my card. And if I would activate this option, I could change the texts right here, proceed to checkout. I could add any other texts I want, but I usually like to keep this way. I think it looks good. Alright, let's go back and right here we have various adjustments for the checkout page. So once again, let's go to checkout page. And as you can see, we have company named field enabled right here. And we don't really need to have this field, because obviously it's just too confusing for hours, just for our customers. Unless you are doing business to business, then you might want to have this option enabled. But in my case, and in most cases, you should disable this one. And once again with street address, you can keep a two fields right here. But I usually like to disable this field. And I wanted to like to keep one field for street and address because it's just easier for visitors for customers to understand everything. Alright, so I think everything looks great. And other than that, we don't really need to change anything here. We can go back. And right here, we're not going to activate any options. I think everything is good as it is by default. So let's go back. Product images. Here you can do changes to the product images, to the size and everything like that. But I feel like everything is good as it is by default, so we don't need to change anything. Store notice. This one is completely up to you if you want to activate it. So for example, if I'm going to activate Store notice here, as you can see, this is how it looks and now we cannot see our header. We should activate this option right here. And as you can see, this is how it looks and it doesn't make sense. We do not need to show this message, but I usually like to include that offer free shipping for all your silver $50 or something like that. So in this case, I'm just going to type exactly that. And as you can see, this is how it would look. I can also change the color. This is where I'm doing, changes to the text color, but I can change the color of this bar right here. So I think this color should fit my style. You know what, Actually I, how color ready? So I'm just going to paste the code right here. Alright, as you can see, this is how it would look. And once again, it's completely up to you if you want to display this message. But it's one of the ways you can do that. And you can say that you are offering free shipping. But in this case I'm just going to disable it and I just wanted to show you how it works. Alright, let's go back and what else we have. We don't really need to change anything here because this is it actually we don't have any more options, so we can go back and inside identity, we're going to add a site icon. So this is quite important. Site icon is shown right here, because right now we have a WordPress icon. And I'm just going to upload the a site icon. So I have my file already. Alright, so I just uploaded my image, and this is the dimensions 512 by 512 pixels. And let's click Select. And as you can see now we have my icon. Alright, let's go to site, title and logo Settings. Let's change the logo. So let's click right here. And this is the logo, uploaded, this logo previously. And let's do some cropping right now. Alright, let's make this a bit bigger and let's click Crop Image. And now we can do some adjustments to logo size. We can make it a bit Berger. I think it looks good. And here you can check some other settings, some other options. But I think everything is good as it is just now, as you remember, when we are doing some general settings to our WordPress Settings itself, we added site title and we added tagline. So we have the same things around here so we don't need to change anything. Alright, let's go back. And this is the header builder. So we're going to come back to this Heather builder in the next lesson. Alright, if we would go to Menus, as you can see right here, we have our main menu. So basically this is the main menu and you can change the locations where you want to display this menu. But right now, everything is good as it is and we don't need to change anything. But you can explore this tab yourself if you'll ever need to add more Menus. So this one is up to you how you want to approach this. But I'm not going to change anything here because everything is good. Alright, let's go to widgets. So right here in widgets, Let's go to WooCommerce sidebar. We can add some widgets. So here I like to display categories I have widgets are basically small pieces of content or information you could add an image, let's say if you would click right here and you could click Browse all. And if you would look for an image, Let's say you could include an image that that you are offering some type of sale is just one way you can do it. This is just the one of the widgets you can add, but I usually like to include my category. So I'm going to scroll down as you can see, we have WooCommerce widgets. So just a second. Where is this featured category? Just a second. Yeah, this is the widget, so I'm just going to click right here. And as you can see, this is how it looks. So we can keep it just like that. And now we have this widget and our visitors is going to see how many products each category has and it's gonna be easier for them to navigate our website. Alright, so it just like that, Let's go back Homepage Settings. So right now, we're not going to change anything in later lesson when we are going to talk about Blog aspect of our website, this is where we're going to do some changes. So right here we're going to create a blog page and we're going to set this blog page to display blog posts. But for now we're not gonna do anything if you would go to additional CSS, this is where you can do changes to Style by using CSS code. And this is for advanced users who know a bit of coding, but we're not going to do anything here. Alright, so once we're done with all those changes, don't forget to click right here, Publish. And now we can close this sidebar. Alright, this is our website looks now and it's starting to look better, much better. And right here, as you can see, it maybe would be better to have this that says sale and white color and in this electric Color bubble. But we don't have those adjustments is just because we have three Theme. We are using a free theme. We could go do some changes with the CSS code, but it's still good, it doesn't look that bad. And in later section where I'm going to show you how to customize your website using a premium theme. You will see yourself that those changes like changes to sell bubble. They are easily done with the premium theme. Alright, so let's make sure that everything looks good. Let's go to our product. Let's see how our product looks. And everything looks good to actually be getting quite good results even for we are using a free theme. So basically this is it for this lesson. And now you know how to customize your theme. And just so you know that each beam usually has different customization options. So you'll see it yourself that in the next section of the scores at the other theme is going to have different customization options. So that's all for now 43. (5.8) Editing Header (Astra): This lesson we're going to work on our header right here. Just like a told you in the previous lesson, we're going to come back here. And as you can see, I'm back to my customization options and to start working on our header, Let's click right here, Header Builder. And before we start working on various settlements right here, I just wanted to explain to you what is transparent header. So if you're going to click right here, transparent header, we can activate a different kind of header that is transparent because right now we have a classic Header and actually think that classic heather works very well with eCommerce stores. And maybe transparent header is a good option when you are working on business websites to represent a brand or business. And for example, if I'm going to activate type of header right here, as you can see, this is how it's going to look. So basically our section with a header just disappears and goes on top on this first section. So when you activate a transparent header, you got to take an account that you have to change your image, the background image for this section, you gotta adjust this image to make it work with your transparent header. So like I said, usually this works very well with business websites. But when I'm working with eCommerce sites, I usually like to keep the classic heather N right here. You can also enable or disable this type of header for various different pages. So for example, you could disabled for blog posts or pages. You could also disable it for WooCommerce product pages. Because if we would go to our product page right here, so for example, I'm just going to open this product, Ryan here. As you can see, it doesn't look good. And if I would disable it, this transparent header just for my product page, we would go back to our classic type of Header. Again, it's up to you what type of Header you want to use. But I usually like to keep everything simple when I'm working with eCommerce stores. And I like to disable this option, but before I disabled this option, I also wanted to tell you that you can choose if you want to enable this particular transparent header, just like this one right here on mobile devices or just that sub devices, or for desktop or mobile devices together. This is how it's going to look, but let's disable this one. I just wanted to show you how that works. Maybe in the future you will decide that you want to work a bit more on the style of your website, and maybe you will want to activate a transparent header. Alright, let's go back. And the first things when I'm working on my header, I just liked to make sure that everything is in place and everything looks good. So as you can see right here, we have three levels for our header. We could create multiple layers for our header, but I usually like to keep everything simple and easy to understand for my clients, for my visitors. And as you can see right here, we have our secondary menu added to this header, but we're not using such fingers secondary menu. So we can remove this one. I believe it's going to look much better if I will move our primary menu in the center right here. And I feel like it's going to look much better if I'm going to move the cart page to the right of this header. And now it doesn't make too much sense because if we cannot see our account elements, so let's work on this element right here. So this element, we'll let our visitors, our customers to login to their account. Alright, so instead of using avatar, let's use sex. I like to use text because it's straightforward and easy to understand. And right now Account URL, it just doesn't make sense because we don't have such URL on our website. If I would go to login URL, it's a completely different URL from my website. So we have to find out what is our URL, what is our URL of our account page? So to do this, let's open our website in incognito mode. So I'm just going to open this in a new private window. I'm just gonna go to my website. Now, as you can see at a moment, this is how it looks. And if I would click right here, this is my account page. So if I'm going to click on this one, as you can see right here, we go to a completely different website that is not ours. So let's go back and we have to fix this issue right here. Our goal right now is to find our account page, as I remember I saw it and the footer, this is our account page, so I'm going to click on this My Account page. As you can see right here, it says my account dash T2, just like we change this with our sharp page. Let's do this, but my account page, because it just doesn't look good. And let's minimize this window later. We're gonna go back to this window and let's open a new tab and let's go to our website. We want to make sure that everything looks as good as it can look. So we have to do changes to this My Account page. Let's go to the dashboard. So as you remember with sharp page, we went to Pages. And now once we're here, let's scroll down and this is my account page. So let's click Quick Edit, and now let's delete this dash two. Alright, let's click Update. And now to make sure that everything works, we should go to WooCommerce. Let's go to Settings and let's make sure that we have the right page set for our account page. So let's go to Advanced tab. And as you can see right here in my account page, we have page that has ID 9.9. So this is the same page that we did changes to and now we want to save changes info. We didn't do any changes. Let's do this because this will help us to put all changes in place. Alright, before we leave, let's purge all cash. And now we can close this tab here. And let's go back to our incognito mode. And now we can go back to our homepage because we want to repeat the whole steps. So let's refresh this page before we go to my account page, and let's scroll down and let's select my account. And as you can see, now, the dash two is gone. So now we want to copy this URL right here because we're going to use it for this element here. Let's close this Incognito mode. And now we can paste this URL here. Just a second, just like that. And now you want to copy this part slash my account. Let's copy this one here. And let's paste this right here. So make sure that it looks just like that. Alright, so now once our visitors, once our customers click on this, My Account elements, they're gonna go to their account page. And if they don't have an account on our website, they will be able to create one. Alright, let's go to Design tab and let's change the color of this element because I don't think that is going to look good in this color. So let's go right here. The next options. Let's choose the color. I think gray color will look great. Alright, I think it looks good. Okay, so now, once we're done with this part, let's go back and we can click here to do changes to our cart right here. But instead, we can click here. It's basically the same. Alright, so here you can choose what type of car do you want to have? I think this icon will look much better. Alright, it looks good. And here you can add card label. As you can see, this card label says how much worth is our cards right now it's 69 to seven. So you can change that here. You can even hide car total label. So for example, if I'm going to activate this one and nothing happens and it's completely normal. It just works when your card is completely empty. So this one right here, one show you zeros. So instead of doing this, I usually like to keep everything simple. I'm just going to delete this cart label and it just disappears. Alright, if I would click right here, could choose any different types of labels. But like I said, I usually like to keep everything empty because this way it's going to look much better on other devices as well. Alright, what could we do? I think we could change the color of this icon right here. To do those changes, we have to go here, design and let's change the card color. I want to make cards colored the same as my logo color right here. So I have this color ready. I'm just going to open this one here, and I will paste this color right here. Alright, this is how it looks. You can barely see changes, but I think it looks better. Alright, count color. We can change the color to white. I think it's going to look much better. Alright? So if I would our, our this element here, as you can see, it turns black. So I could change this one here as well into white color. And if I'm going to hover one more time, nothing happens. So we could actually change the hover color. So if I would click right here and I will choose this color. As you can see, it's a bit different than this color here. And just a second. And if I would hover over my cart icon, as you can see, this is how it looks. I think it looks quite good. I usually like to keep this type of minimalistic and simple header because I usually like to make everything as easy and simple to understand because I think this helps for our customers and like to keep things simple. And before we leave, before we publish all the changes, let's make sure that everything looks great on other devices as well. So if I would click on tablet view, as you can see, this is how it's going to look. Of course, I can see that it doesn't look too good. The whole Homepage layout, it looks quite messy. It doesn't necessarily mean that it's going to look on tablets. Sometimes it just freezes and you have to check on the tablet itself or on mobile device. And if you see that it's not working, it doesn't look good. The whole layout, just like the Homepage layout that we worked on previously, doesn't look good. As you remember, you should do some adjustments in your homepage like we did on sections like we did with columns. Because sometimes those changes, they just disappeared, they do not save. And like I said, it's the biggest downside when you are working with a brief Themes. And because you are lacking a lot of customization options and you have to work on those settings, on those changes a couple of times, alright, but before we leave, let's make sure that we have good layout. The layout I like to use, I like to keep my site logo in the middle, just like that. And on the left side, I like to keep my menu. I think it looks good. We could change the color of this menu. So if I'm going to click on Toggle Menu, as you can see, we can choose the icon style. We can change the style, but do not expect big changes. So for example, if I'm going to choose Outline, it's not going to look too good. But like I said, we are working with a free theme and we are limited with customization options. Alright, so let's go to Design and let's make sure that we have the same color as we have for our card or our logo. Because I believe it's going to look much better. Alright, So I have this color ready, so I'm just going to paste it here. Alright? And I feel like it looks better. Alright, let's check how it's going to look on mobile devices. And as you can see, this is how it's going to look on mobile devices. Maybe doesn't look too good. Because once again, we're working with a free theme and you shouldn't expect extremely good results because we are working with the free tools and you shouldn't forget that such tools, they have premium versions for reason, because when you are limited with customization options, usually people tend to get the pro version. Alright, so let's go back to our desktop view. Let's see how it looks. It looks good. So once you're done with those changes, Let's click Publish. And once again, when you're working on any part of your website, do not be afraid to explore everything yourself. If you do not publish any changes, you will not mess anything up so you don't need to worry about anything. Alright, so we're done with those changes and now we can close this sidebar. Alright, so I feel like it looks quite good. And before checking all the changes, let's go to the dashboard and let's click right here, purge all cash. Let's make sure that all changes Live. Alright, let's go back to our side. And now I'm just going to go back to my website in incognito mode. And I'm just gonna go through some of the buttons to make sure that they work. Alright, so this is how it looks and it looks much better than the previous version. And right here, we do not have texts, my account. So to have this text, first of all, you have to login to your account, your users, your customers will have to login to their account to see this text. Alright, let's click on this icon here to make sure that everything works. Yes, everything works. So our users can use this page to login to their account or they can register. So as you can see, we have a functioning Header. It works. And if I would go to any category, everything works. Alright, so I'm just going to close this one. And this is a, now you know how to customize your header. And if you do not like this layout that I showed you, you can try to come up with any different type of layout, but I usually like to keep things simple. Alright, that's all for this lesson. 44. (5.9) Editing Footer (Astra): Once again, we are back to our customization options and this time we're going to work on our footer. So we can click right here Footer Builder, and as you can see, this is our footer. This is our footer Builder. As you remember, our header had a similar structure and this time we are working on our footer, so it's kinda similar but except this one is at the end of your website. Alright, so as you can see right now, we are using two layers out of purine. And once again, it's up to you how many layers you want to use. But I usually like to make everything look simple and easy to understand. But if you want to experiment, you can try out some different, look, some different structures of your Footer. If you need some inspiration, just visit some of the websites you like and check their foot tourists and try to replicate their settings. But once again, in this course I'm going to show you a probably the easiest way to make a Footer, and it's gonna be a kind of clear Footer. Alright, so the first things, when I'm working on Footer, I like to use four columns. So right now it's using free columns. So we should click right here, and this is where we're going to work on this row right here. So as you can see, it's set to free and we want to set it to four. And right now we have to move this widget right here because in this column and had two widgets. So we want to make one widget per each column. Alright, so we are getting there, but it still doesn't make too much sense. Understand? So let's start with the first widgets. So when you want to add information to your widget, you have to click right here, just like that. And right now we are working on widgets. Widgets are small pieces of content that can be displayed in various places of your website. Sometimes if you want, you can display widgets and the sidebar of your website if you have activated the sidebar. But I think the sidebar works very well with other types of websites and not particularly where eCommerce websites. Alright, so now we have to add blogs. So it's similarly to adding blocks to your page, to a blog post. So right now we have to add a heading blog and just click on this block. And simply just like that, you will add it to your Footer. Alright, so I usually like to start the first column with information for our customers, with the help information, helpful information like Contact Page, shipping and delivery payments and other. Alright, so I'm just going to type help right here. Alright, right now it's a bit too large, so we should change the heading level. So I'm going to choose the third level and I think it looks better. Alright, So now we should add another blog, and this time we're going to use blog that is called list. If you cannot see this blog, just use Search type list and you will find this block. Alright, so I'm gonna choose list, and right now I'm just going to list the pages I want to display right here. So I'm going to include contact, shipping and delivery, refunds and returns. And if you will decide that you want to add such page as payments, sometimes it's a good option to add this page. It just some extra information for your customers so they would know what's payment options are available on your website in this course, we haven't created this page, but now you have enough experience to create this page yourself. You can either create this page using WordPress text editor or you can use Elementor. This one is going to be up to you if you want to have this page at all. So I'm just going to list the pages I want to display here. I'm going to hit Enter. I'm going to list another page. And just like that, I'm going to list all the missing pages. Alright, so I just added the Pages I'm planning to display. And like I said, you can also include such page as payments. You can create one. It's kinda helpful for your potential customers. And now we have to add URLs to these pages right here, because right now they are inactive. This is just the text. So to add URLs, we should go to our website. And as you remember, we should go to all of our pages if we want to know the lengths of those pages. So let's go to the dashboard of our website. Let's go to pages. Let's click All Pages. And I'm just going to show you one example how you can do that. So once we are in all pages, we want to find the pages we want to include in particular columns and our footer. So we have Contact page, so I'm just going to click right here view. I'm going to open this one in a new tab, and this is our contact page. So we want to copy this URL right here. I'm gonna go back and I'm going to select contexts. And right here I'm going to choose this option. And I'm just going to paste my page and I'm gonna click this one right here. Now, this is an act of page, alright, so just like that, I'm going to finish adding those to other pages. Alright, so we're done with this widget right here. We have all the needed pages. Later on we're going to do some adjustments, Style adjustments, but for now we can leave it as it is. Alright, let's go to the second widget right here. So let's select this widget. And before we add our information, we have to delete all the previous blogs that this hat. So simply select a block and click right here and click Remove paragraph. In this case it was a paragraph. Let's click right here. Now it's a column. So let's remove this column and just repeat this procedure Let's remove this one. Let's remove that one, and we have to remove this one as well. Alright, so now let's add our heading elements. So let's select heading. And as you remember, we are supposed to select the third level of our heading. And right here I'm going to type information. Alright, so as you remember now let's click right here and we want to choose list. So let's choose list. And here I'm going to list such pages as about US privacy policy, terms of service and cookie policy. And as you remember to add pages to make those links functional, we have to go to our pages and I'm just going to open about page in a new window. Just like that. I'm going to copy this link right here and I'm gonna go back. Now I can close this tab and I'm going to select about us. And just like that, I'm going to paste it right here. And as you can see, we have an active link. Don't worry if the color isn't matching. Later we're gonna do final changes and everything's gonna match just fine. Alright, so just like that, I'm going to finish adding all the other URLs to these pages. Alright, so I'm done with this column right here with this widget, and I'm going to move on to the next widget. So let's select this widget. And once again, we have to remove blogs that were added previously. So this is the block. Let's select this block and let's click right here, and let's select Remove. So let's remove this one as well. As you remember, once again, let's select heading element and let's choose the third level. And right here in this column, I like to include the information pages for customers. So that's exactly what I'm going to type right here. Alright, let's add the final block. It's going to be the list. And right here, I like to include such pages as my account, my orders and account details. That's exactly what I'm going to type. Alright, and now we have to add those pages. So to find those pages, those URLs, let's go to our website, Let's go to our homepage. Let's click right here my account. And obviously this is the page, this is the URL we want to copy because this is my account page. So let's copy this one. Let's go back. Let's double-click on this text right here. Let's choose this option and just paste this URL here, orders. So let's go back to this page and let's click orders. So we want to copy this one right here. Let's go back. Let's select my orders. Let's add the URL and let's click Enter account details. So let's go back to this page and let's select account details. And just like that, we can copy the URL. Let's go back. Let's select account details. Let's add our URL, and let's select this one. Alright, so now it's gonna be more convenient for our users, for our customers, potential customers to access this important information. Alright, so we are done with this one. Now we can move on to the last widget. And in the last widget, in the last column right here, I usually like to include newsletter subscription form. So that's exactly what we're gonna do. We're going to click right here. We're going to add heading and we're going to type newsletter. Alright, so now we want to change the level of this adding. Let's choose the third level. And now we have to add a subscription for dad, this subscription form, we're going to use the same plug in, the same form builder that we used to create our contact page. So let's go to our website. Let's go to the dashboard. And as you remember, the plugin was called fluent forms. So we want to click right here new form. Let's choose this form. I believe this form will look great on our Footer. Alright, so now we have to do some changes. So let's start with this button right here. Let's choose here. And this is the minimum width. And we want to change that instead of using 100%, Let's make it 30%. I think 30% will look great on our Footer. And now we could change the color of this button, as you can see right here in button style, once it's set to custom, we can actually add our color. So now I'm just going to add more color that previously generated using coolers generator. And this is going to be the matching color. So I'm just going to paste this color code right here. As you can see, this is how it's going to look. And now I want to change the border color as well. So I'm just going to paste this code and I'm going to click, Okay, so let's go to hover style and let's change the text color. So let's choose the same color because I think it's going to look good. Just a second. I'm going to click right here paste. And I'm gonna do the same with a border color. I'm going to paste it right here. And I feel like it's going to look much better. So we have Subscribe button and now we should do some changes to this field, to this input field And right here, Emails. So we can actually disabled this one required because we don't want to show this star here. And in any case, our visitors will know that they have to enter their email address to subscribe to our newsletter. So we don't need to activate this a required field. Let's add element label. This label will be displayed above this form and now Footer. So I usually like to encourage our visitors to subscribe to our newsletter. I usually don't call this as just a newsletter. I like to call this as a special members clubs, something like that, because newsletter doesn't sound too good and we want to be a bit creative with this one. I'm going to add a label. Alright, I believe it's going to look good. And now we should change the title of this form so we would know that it's Footer newsletter form. So we can add the title Footer newsletter. Let's click Rename. And now we should go to settings and Integrations. Just a second. Stay on page and we want to click Save form. So before we move to Settings and Integrations, Let's save this form. Alright, let's go to settings and Integrations and we want to change. Thank you message. So thank you for subscribing our newsletter. Alright, I believe it's going to look good. Now we can click Save Settings, and now you just have to remember that this is the number seven form. This is the idea of this form. And now we can go back to our Footer Builder. And right here, let's click plus, and let's use a search to look for fluent. Alright, let's choose this one. And everything should position properly. If it's not going to work, we're gonna do some changes, so no worries about that. Alright, so now we should do some changes to the style of these widgets right here. But before we do that, I just want to change the background color of this footer itself. I usually like to go with a neutral colors. So let's click right here, and let's go to Design tab. And a neutral color is going to be a light gray color. So let's go right here. Maybe let's choose this one here. And I feel like it's going to look good. And now we should do changes to these widgets because I don't like the colors. So let's do some changes to this widget right here. So to do changes to this widget, let's click right here. Design. Alright, so now let's go to link color, and I guess we can choose this color. Alright? Once we hover, we can choose this color. Let's see how it's going to. Now actually, we could choose this color. Yeah, with this color is going to look better. Alright, so let's do the same with this widget. Let's click right here, design. And let's choose link color. So the link color is gonna be this one. Our color is gonna be this one. And let's see, yeah, this is how it looks. Let's do changes to this widget. Just a second. Let's select design. Let's click on the link color. Let's choose this one and let's choose our color. It's going to be this one. Alright, so now everything is looking much better and now we should do some changes to the bottom part of our footer. So first of all, let's change the color of this one. We could go with a bit darker gray color. So let's go right here. Let's choose background. And I think if I'm going to choose this color, I could go with a bit darker version just like that, and I feel like it's going to look good. We could also change the color of the copyright if you want. If this color doesn't look too good, we could go to Design tab. And as you can see, we can change the colors. So if you would go with this color, it's not going to look that good. Alright, with this color, it's going to look a bit better. Alright, we could actually change this color to a bit lighter gray. So let's go to Design and let's choose a lighter gray. I think it's going to look perfect. Alright, so now we can add our social media icon. So let's click right here social and simply just add your social media icons. If you have Facebook page, you can add this URL right here. If you have Twitter profile URL right here, same goes but Instagram. If you don't have the help, of course you can disable this one. We are not going to display this one. If you want to add any other profiles like Reddit, Pinterest or anything like that. Just select, click Add and just add the URL right here. And we could actually do some changes to design because we can barely see our icons. So let's choose the icon color. Alright, I think this color will look great. And what's next? We could change the size of these icons as well. So let's make them a bit bigger. All right, I think it looks great. Alright, so now everything should look great. And we can actually click Publish. And let's close this sidebar. Let's scroll down. Alright, as you can see, it doesn't look too good. Subscribe to our newsletter. So we should do some changes to this STX. So we want to go back to our form Here, let's do some changes. So let's go to our Footer newsletter editor right here. And you know what, instead of displaying this label right here, we could delete this label because as you saw it yourself, it doesn't look too good. So we can copy this label. Let's delete this one right here. Let's click Save form. And as you see yourself sometimes when you are building a website, it is about problem-solving, but no worries about that. We're going to solve this problem right away. Alright, let's go back to our homepage. Let's click customize. Let's choose Footer Builder. Let's go to this widget was the last widget. And we want to add another block. And this time we're going to use a paragraph block. This block, Let's paste our texts. Alright, so this is the texts we were supposed to have. Just a second. I'm going to type this text, join our members club and get the best deals and offers. Alright, so I just entered the texts and now we can move this block a bit up, and let's click right here on this formula. Let's make sure that we have selected this form newsletter. And now we can click Publish. No worries about the texts beneath this form because it's going to disappear. Alright, so we published all the changes. Now we can go back to the all customization options. And you know what, I'm just gonna go to my homepage in this tab right here. And let's refresh this page one more time and let's see how our changes look. Alright, so as you can see now, it looks this way. I think it looks a bit better. And just like that, you can edit and create your footer. It might not be the best looking version just because we are working with a free tool, but it's helpful, it's helpful for our customers. And this is the most important thing. And let's say once your visitors subscribes to this form right here. So let's say I'm just going to show you how it's going to Look. I'm going to type my email address. Let's click subscribe. As you can see, we got this message and now we can go to our dashboard and I'm going to show you where all those emails go. Alright, so if you would go to fluid forms right here, Let's select all forms. And as you can see, these are all the forms we have. So this is the Contact Form. If you would click right here, you could see all the Contact messages that you're visitors left to you. But as you remember yourself, you're gonna receive those messages to your email address, but it doesn't work with Footer. Those entries stay right here. So let's click on entries here. As you can see, we have one entry and this is the e-mail entered. So once you are going to have more emails, you can select them all just like that. And you can export those email addresses by clicking right here. And later you can use those email addresses for Email Marketing. For this, you're going to need to use email marketing tool, select male or light or any other. So this one is going to be up to you. Alright? So here you will see all the emails, all the subscriptions, and now we can close this one. And yeah, so basically we are done with our footer and we are almost done with this section where I show you how to create a website using free tools. 45. (5.10) Final Touches (Money Savers Method): Alright, before we finish with this section, we have some final touches, final things to take care of before we finally done with this section, where we were working with a free theme called Astrium. Alright, so since you via and the customization options, you know what, we could actually add one thing to our header. It might not be so important if you have a small website and you don't have too many products to display. But if you have more products, man, maybe in the future you're going to add some more than it would be a good thing to add a search option for your customers where your visitors. So usually I like to include this one and the header. So let's click on the header. Alright, let's click right here just a second. And right here we could add a search option for our visitors. So let's click here and let's choose Search. And just like that, you can add search to your website. If I'm going to move this the derived side, this is how it's going to look. Alright, I feel like it's going to look good if I'm going to click on this one, alright? Alright, now it's not functioning, but no worries about that. Later. It's going to function just fine. Alright, design, we could change the color and it's completely up to you if you want to change colors. But as you can see here, it works. Now. Just a second. Wait, I'm doing changes to the header, so I'm supposed to click on Search right here. And if you would go to Design, you can choose the color. So I'm going to choose the same color as I'm using for my logo. Alright, so I'll just paste it my color. And as you can see, this is how it looks. And if we would click Publish, we can close this sidebar. Let's click on the search. And as you can see, we can look for products. It's fully functioning. So it's up to you if you want to include this. But I believe it's very useful for customers. And especially once your store grows and you're gonna need to have this search option. Alright, so now we are totally and absolutely done with our header without Footer. And the next thing that we should take care of, Let's make sure that we have activated some options for our visitors to create account. So let's go to WooCommerce right here. Let's go to settings. As you remember, all settings related to WooCommerce can be found right here and WooCommerce tab Settings. Alright, let's go to accounts and privacy, and let's allow our customers to login into an existing account during checkout. It's gonna be very convenient for them if they're going to have an account. And let's allow our customers to create an account during checkout. So this one is also quite important. And other than that, everything looks great. Now we can click Save Changes. And while we are here, we could actually go to our Plugins just a second right here in Plugins. And let's go to Installed plugins and this beam, but Starter Templates, they actually install some plugins that we do not need at all. So we can disable some of those Plugins just like this one right here. It's called card flows. It is quite useful plugin if you use a paid option, but this plugin cost quite a lot as we not going to use this one. Obviously we're not using this one. So let's scroll down what else we have. You can keep this one spectra. It might be convenient for you when you're going to create blog posts. This one adds some more blogs to your WordPress text editor. It's convenient but it's not necessary to use. You can actually deactivate this one as well. I usually don't use this one at all. But if you want to explore things, you can keep this plugin. And later when I'm going to teach you how to add blog posts, you will see what blogs you can add. This one is going to be up to you. You can disable this one and you can delete this one. Alright, we're not using this one as well, so we can deactivate this and now we can select the Plugins. We're not using this one, that one and spectra. And once again, it's up to you if you want to explore this one. But to be honest, you don't really need it just adds some extra blogs and default blogs of your WordPress text editor. You will be able to create a fine blog posts. Alright, so let's select this one. Let's go right here. And let's select delete, and let's click, Apply. Alright, let's click. Okay. And while we are here, we could actually update this plug-in right here. Alright, fantastic. We deleted all unused Plugins. And if you're not using any plug-ins or some Plugins, just delete them. There's no need to keep them on your website, especially if you're not using them. Alright, so we're done with this part. And now the last thing that we could do, you know what, we could actually go to our pages. Let's select all pages. And right here we're going to practice Elementor one more time, but this time we're going to do things a bit differently. Alright, so as you remember, we created the about page using WordPress text editor. So let's click View and a new tab because we're going to copy the information right here that we have here As you can see right now, this page, it just doesn't look good. And as you remember when I tried to move around this image, it just didn't work for some reason. Sometimes this can happen, but it doesn't mean that it's going to happen to you. But once again, we want to make our website look as nice as possible. And now this about page just doesn't fit our design. So we should create this page using element or so right here we're going to practice element or one more time. But this time we're going to do things a bit differently. Alright, since we have created this page and we already published this page, it has a bit different styling options, so we should create a new About page, but before we do it at, let's change this page a bit. Let's add the slug, let's say 21, and let's hit Update. And we are doing this because if we want to create a completely fresh about page, so if we're not going to change the slug in this all page, our newly created Page going to have slug not about but it's going to be about dash two, just like we had with some of the other pages. Alright, so now we can click right here, Add New page I'm going to type about. And let's click Edit with Elementor. Alright, so now we're editing this page using Elementor. And if I would go right here is you can see we have some texts that we're going to copy. So let's go back to our newly created about page. And it's up to you what you want to use if you want to create everything from scratch. But this time I'm going to use templates. So let's choose a template. Let's go to blogs. And if you would look for about blogs, this is what we get. So right here, it's actually up to you what you want to use to make your about page better. This one is gonna be your homework and it's for you to create your about page and just practice Elementor. And this About page is quite simple. So work on this one. In my case, I'm just going to use this block right here. I'm going to click Import block, and I'm going to import another block. Just like that. I will go to blogs one more time. And this time I'm going to use this one. Alright, so just like that, I'm going to import another blog. And here I'm just going to replace this information. That's all I'm gonna do. Alright, there's, you can see I've finished adding information and this is how it looks. Instead of using images or delete those images. And I added overlay to this column. As you remember, if I would click on the column, I would go to Style and I chose background. Now, instead of choosing overlay, I chose backgrounds. So as you can see, added background image. And this is how it looks. I select the display size color, and it fits perfectly right here. I did the same with this one as well. And now we can click publish and let's click, have a look. And as you can see via an about page, as we are supposed to be. And this is how our page looks now. And as you can see, it wasn't so difficult, it was quite easy. We just imported some pre-made templates, blogs, and we replaced the information. Let's compare it to the previous version. Yeah, it looked horrible and this version looks much better. It's cleaner and it's easy to understand. Alright, so since we are here, alright, just a second. Now, we can close this one. We can go to the dashboard. Let's make sure that we don't have this page, the previous page that we renamed. Yeah. This is the page we can delete this page. This is all about page. As you can see, it doesn't have next it Elementor. Alright, so now we have all the needed pages. We have fully functioning website. Let's check our website one more time. And as you can see, this is how it looks. This is what we were able to squeeze out using a free Astra Theme. Of course, there are more customization options with this theme. But to access those options, you would need to get Astra Pro version. Astra Pro version is going to cost you on the early basis or you can purchase the lifetime license, that cost over $200. So that's quite a lot, but you're gonna get more customization options. But I believe with a free version, we were able to squeeze out quite good results. We have fully functioning website and let's check one more time if our about page functions, Let's go to costumes category. And as you can see, this is how it looks. If I would select this costume right here, I can add it to cards. So let's make sure that everything functions as it's supposed. Let's click View Cart and we can select our shipping methods. We have some cross cells. Let's go to the checkout and everything works and everything looks great. So yeah, this is how it looks. And just like that, we were able to create a website using a free theme. The next section, you're going to see how the premium version looks, how many customization options it has compared to this one. But I believe with a free theme, if we were able to create a quiet, good-looking store? 46. Section 5 Summary: Great progress so far. So if you finish this section and now you have your final version of your website, if you will decide to use a free theme. So in this case, we use the Astra Theme and we use Elementor as our page builder. So as you saw it yourself, you could get quite good results by using this a free theme. And of course, free themes are quite limited. Why else they would offer you premium themes? Because with premium themes or with a paid option of this Astra Theme, you will have more customization options, but as you saw it yourself with a free theme, you can also have good results. And a trust me, I have seen even worse looking eCommerce stores. I am making a lot of sales. But as you saw yourself with a free theme, you are limited. But most importantly, in this section you'll learn how to use Elementor, that is page builder plugin. And this Elementor page builder plugin is the most popular page builder plugin. So if you will ever decide that you want to create any other type of website and you want to use Elementor to create your pages. So this is where you're going to have some solid information, solid foundations working with Elementor. So that's another great thing that you learned in this section. But if you didn't like the way your website looks, maybe you want to try something different. The next section is gonna be all about the premium tools about a premium theme that I use myself and I actually use the same theme for free of my eCommerce websites. I really liked that Theme and it works just well. It loads fast and it looks great. I highly recommend you to watch this section that you just watch. Of course you watched it and the second one. So it's gonna be much easier for you to decide which option you want to choose. But of course, you can start with a free theme and later you can upgrade to a premium version. So it's gonna be up to you. So congratulations. Now you have a fully functioning website 47. (6.0) Getting Started With the Flatsome Theme: Okay, So in this lesson we're going to start customizing our website using a premium theme, a premium option. And you will see it yourself, how different it is and how many customization options it has compared to Astra Theme. I'm not going to install the WordPress or anything like that. I'm just going to download the Theme. I'm going to replace my current Astra Theme, but the new Flatsome Theme, I'm going to deactivate some of the Plugins and you will see it yourself, how that works, just in case maybe in the future you will decide that you want to switch Themes. It's gonna be a good practice for you. But like I said in this lesson, I will show you how to install a theme. You already have a Theme installed. But if you don't have installed Astra Theme to your website and you decided that you want to go with this option Flatsome, everything is going to be easier for you. So you will see yourself how that works, and that will make sure that everything looks the same info you haven't installed Astra Theme to your website. Alright, so the first things first, you want to go to this website right here, Theme forest dotnet and look for a film called Flatsome. So this is the theme that we want to use. And as you can see, this is number one best-selling WooCommerce theme. It's mobile and speed optimize. So do really like this beam. I use it for free of my websites and I highly recommend you this theme. Alright, so just purchased this beam. And once you have purchased this beam, you want to go right here to your profile, select Downloads. And as you can see, I have quite a lot of things. Alright, so this is the one of the license I could use, but I have the other license that I have the activated and I can activate on this current drops it. Alright, so this is the Theme in your case. You just going to see it, this only one option right here. So you want to click right here, and let's select install BLE WordPress file on. So you want to download only installable WordPress file. And you want to download license, certificate and purchase code. So this is the code of your theme that you're going to use to activate your FIM. So right here and item purchase code, you will see the code that you will need to use to activate your theme. So remember that. And of course, before we go back, if you want, you can actually check how this beam looks. You can check some of the demo websites if I would click right here, as you remember, you could check how this website looks. So we have various Demo websites. You can check out and see what our possibilities of this beam. So it's up to if you want to do that. But I just wanted to show you that such option exists. Alright, let's close this tab right here. Let's go back to our website and let's go to the dashboard. Now, we're going to need to install this theme. Like I said, no matter if you followed my previous section where I showed you how to use Astra Theme or not. The whole steps are going to be the same. So just go to your dashboard. Let's go to Appearance tab. Let's select Themes. And now let's click Add New, and let's click Upload Theme. Let's choose Browse and just select the file you just downloaded. So this is the file. Let's click Open and let's select Install now. Alright, now we can activate this theme. Just click right here, and here we have a setup wizard. Alright, so let's click, let's go. Now, we will have to enter our purchase code here. So let's go to our PDF file we just downloaded and you want to copy this one item purchase code that is here. So that's exactly what I'm gonna do. I'm just going to copy this code. I'll go back and before paste this code, I can close this tab. And I can actually close this tab as well. Alright, so I'm just going to paste this code here. I'm going to select Confirm, and I'm going to click register. Alright, so the registration was successful. Now we can click Continue. Let's create a child theme. Alright, let's click Continue. Here you can install some plugins, but actually you don't need to install this first Plugin Contact Form seven because we are using another plugin for adding Contact Forms. And right here next and social login, I'm not using this Plugin at all because I usually like to keep everything simple like I said, and just a regular login with email address and password works just well. And if you want, you can actually install racialist your customers, your potential customers will be able to create their wishlist. So it's quite good, especially if you have more products, but if you're planning to create this website and other language not in English, then you will have some problems with this plugin because it's going to be quite difficult to translate some of the English words. And if you are grading your website for a native speaking audience, then your website might look quite messy. But if you would like to have this wishlist and you are grading website for English-speaking audience, then you can click right here. Just install this plugin. It's completely up to you. And once you have this plugin, you don't really need to change anything. And no matter what way we go, I'm going to choose to install this plugin or not. We're not going to do any changes to it. So just to be safe. Because in later sections I'm going to show how to translate your website. I'm not going to install this plugin, but if you want, you can install it and have wishlist. Alright, so we can click, skip the step. Alright, so here we do not want to install any Demo Content. And the previous section when we worked with Astra Theme, it was quite convenient because we were just starting out. We didn't have any experience working with Themes and the various Plugins. Now after you have watched this previous section, I believe you have enough understanding and this time is going to be much easier to set up your website without installing any Demo Content. It's gonna be much easier for us. So let's not install any Demo Content. Let's click skip this step and if you want, you can select any preset, is just going to create you a header. It's just going to add the style to your theme. But actually you don't need to do that because like I said in this section, I'm gonna show you how to customize how to give your website a good look without needing to install ended Demo Content. So we're going to start from the bottom-up and we're not going to need to use any Demo Content. We can also skip this step. Here. You will get some Customer Support if you're going to need any of this support. But I believe you ain't going to need any support from the Theme developers because once I show you how to create your website using this VM, I believe you will not have any issues. Alright, let's click Agree and continue. Alright, so now we are done and we can click view your new website. Alright, so in my case, as you can see, what am I still have? So I still have this menu right here, the main menu that I created previously. And in later lesson I will show you to create a menu one more time, just in case you didn't watch the previous section where I showed you how to create a menu using Astra Theme. It's basically going to be the same, but we're going to go back and work on that a bit just to show you how it works as well as you can see, we have our homepage. So this Homepage was created using Elementor. It's from the previous section where I was working on Astra Theme. So we're not going to use this homepage at all. And as you can see right now, we have different sale buttons, different style, and you can customize those sale bubbles, not buttons. And it's extremely customizable, this famous customizable. So that's the huge advantage of this Theme compared to Astra Theme. And let's scroll down. What else do we have? So we have our Footer and right now it doesn't look good at all and no worries about that. And even doesn't matter if you're Footer looks different because in later stages when we're going to edit our Footer, I will show you how to create it. And no matter what's a type of Footer you have right now, you will still be able to follow this lesson. Alright, so right now we should do some changes. We should go to our dashboard. And I just want to make sure before we move on to the next lessons that I have disabled the plugins that I'm not going to use. In this case, let's go to Installed plugins. And the first plugin that I'm going to disable is going to be Elementor. We're not going to use Elementor at all. We can click, Skip and deactivate because this Flatsome Theme has its own page builder and it's quite good. It's quite flexible as well, so we're going to work with that as well. We can disabled Starter Templates Plugin because we're not going to use it as well. Alright, so now we can select those two plugins here. And let's click Delete. Let's select Apply. Okay? Alright, so now those Plugins gone, and I really liked that. We do not overcrowd our website with too many Plugins. Because if you're going to have too many plugins on your website, there is a chance that there's gonna be some issue. I'm not saying that it's going to happen, but there are some cases that's some Plugins can slugger your website. And if you are using not too many plug-ins, especially if you are using, let's say, the same type of plug-ins for the same purpose, like to Plugins for creating pages, then I highly recommend you to not do that because it's just not how things work and it might slow down your reps it, but right now we have eight Plugins and that's just perfect. Alright, let's go to our site and let's see how it looks now. Alright, as you can see, we don't have our homepage, it's completely gone. Still have best-selling products, we still have trending products, but we're going to replace this homepage with a newly created in the Homepage. So like I said, no matter what you see here, maybe you see a different information. Maybe you have different menu here. Maybe your homepage is completely empty. It doesn't really matter because you will still be able to follow this section through. Alright, so this is it for this lesson. Now, you know how to install a premium theme, and as you saw it yourself, you have to download it from Theme four is dotnet, and you have to upload it to your website. And of course you have to activate it. And if you would try to use search in WordPress themes in your dashboard, you wouldn't find this theme. Alright, so that's all for this lesson. 48. (6.1) Introduction to the UX Page Builder: In this lesson we're going to add Shaq UX Builder. So just like in a previous section when we were working with Astra team, we were working with Elementor page builder. And right here we have a page builder as well, but this Builder comes together with the Flatsome Theme. It's their own Builder, and it might not have so many options as Elementor, but it's still flexible. And in this lesson we're going to explore this page builder. Alright, so let's go to the dashboard. Let's go to All Pages. And in this lesson we're not going to do any changes, which is going to go through the Page Builder itself to show you how it looks. And as you can see, previously, we had an option to edit pages with Elementor, but now we have option to edit page with you eggs Builder. And if I would click on this About page, as you can see here, we have option to edit this page that you eggs Builder. So instead of using this WordPress text editor right here that we have here, we can use UX Builder, just like we could use in the previous section, Elementor. So let's select UX Builder and just keep in mind, we're not going to change anything here. I just want to walk you through the UX Builder itself to show you how it works. And we can keep the texts, we can keep the information here, and we're not going to change anything. I just gonna walk you through this Builder. Alright, so this is how it looks. On the left side, we have our navigator. So this is our navigator. We have sections, we have elements here, and on the right side we have different modes. So we can view our website on tablet mode, on mobile mode. And when we are doing changes, we can do changes to separate the y's. Not just do changes to all devices globally, but to separate the y's. So for example, I could do some changes to desktop device. I can move around elements than I can switch to tablet mode. If I don't like how the layout looks, I can do some changes to the tablet mode layout and I can do the same with mobile. Alright, let's go back to desktop view. If I would go right here, I can do changes to the page itself, but you usually don't need to do any changes here actually, to be honest, I have never done any changes right here because everything is good as it is by default. Alright, let's go back. And as you can see right here, we have texts elements. So in elementary you usually have sections, and then once you create a section to this section, you add elements. But it doesn't apply to UX Builder. You can just add elements without creating sections. It's simple as that. Alright, if I click right here, I could add another element. So as you can see here, we have layout elements, so we can add row here. So if I would click this one, we would add some rows. And in those rows we could add elements like images, buttons, text images. Let's say here you could showcase your categories or something like that. You can also choose how many columns you want to have, what layout itself you want to have. But we can close this one. And as you can see, this element was added successfully. And now when I'm doing changes to the row, I'm doing to this whole part right here to the row changes so I can work on some layout adjustments, Style adjustments, and it's for you to explore everything yourself to try out different changes just to check how it works, how everything functions. And in later stages when we're going to work on our homepage, when we're going to work on Contact Us page and when we are going to work on about page, we're going to take everything into practice and we're going to take care of the layout of the Homepage, of the about page of the Contact page with all those adjustments. But for now, you can explore everything yourself. You don't need to save anything. Just try to add different elements, see what settings they have, and try to figure out how everything functions and work. Alright, let's go back. And as you can see, now, I'm in my navigator. So here we have text elements, and here we have row. This row has 1234 columns. So in those columns you can add images. So let's say here you can add an image button. So if I'll click add elements right here, as you can see, I can choose from the same list of elements. Here. All elements are free. So unlike with Elementor where you had to purchase a pro version to get access to some better elements. Here all elements are free to use and it's up to you to explore all those elements. Alright, so let's close this one. And as you can see, this is the row with various elements. And I can delete this row. If I'm going to click here, I can do options. I can duplicate it, copy options, copy a short code, and do all other adjustments. I usually don't focus here too much and I get good results without focusing on those other options. So I'm just going to delete this one and let's click right here and element one more time. So like I said, here we have layout elements. Here we have various content elements. We have buttons, text, HTML codes, banners, accordions. So I'm going to choose accordion as you can see here, you can expand this accordion. You can add a heading right here and you can add texts. Alright, so for example, how much the shipping cost? Right here. And once you expand, you can explain how much the shipping costs. There are many ways of using this accordion, so it's up to you how you want to use it. But let's go back. And as you can see, this is the Navigator, this is how it looks. If you would click right here, you can add another accordion. And just like that, you can do changes to this accordion. Alright, we can delete this one. And the last thing that I wanted to show you, Let's go to Add elements is going to be not here, but just let's scroll down through all elements. And as you can see, here, we have very sharp elements. We can add products, custom products, and bestselling progress. So for example, if I'm going to click this one, we're going to have best-selling products. We can do adjustments, two columns to the number of products we are displaying. And once again, this one is up to you to explore. And we can delete this one and we can go to Add elements and here and import. We're not going to use that. Let's not over-complicate ourselves with too many adjustments. So let's go back to elements. And if I would go to Flatsome studio, as can see here, we have various precreated layouts. So if you've watched my previous section where I showed you how to create websites using Astra Theme and Starter Templates. You saw it yourself. That from the Starter Templates, you can import pages, you can import the whole website itself, or you can import blogs. The same goes with this theme. You can import various eCommerce pages. So you can import about sections, and you can import various other things. So it's up to you to explore what you would like to use. In later lessons. You're going to use some of them. But once again, it's up to you to explore everything and no worries about anything. If you're going to import something and you're going to delete something or even a save anything you want, mess up your website in any way. If you have any questions or any struggles, join my Facebook group and I'm always here to help you. If you're going to have any questions, don't hesitate to ask and just shoot me a message and I'm going to help you right away. So as you can see right here, we have various pre-designed layouts and it's up to you what layouts you want to use. And like I mentioned you before in later lessons, we're going to use some of these templates, but once again, you can click Import. So for example, if I'm going to select Import, I can choose if I want to import with images, but why do I need those images unless I want to see how it's going to look. So I'm going to import this one, but now the images and I'm going to click Start, as you can see, just imported this precreated layout. So as you can see, it has sections. So just like with Elementor, this template was created using sections. And then to those sections we have some elements that we have row, this row, we have columns. And right here, if I would expand, as you can see, we have tags and all other things. If I'm going to minimize this one, just goes like that. If I'm going to click around here, delete. As you can see, this section disappeared. And this is the second section. The reason why it's on top the text, it's because of layout adjustments. And later, once we are going to work on those settings, I'm going to show you where you can take care of those adjustments if you want to go over top of some other elements. But let's click right here real quick and options. And if I would scroll down just a second, no, it's not this one. So it's just done two separate column right here. So I'm going to click on the row just a second. On the columns. Just a second. Yeah. Yeah, and the row on this one, if I'm gonna go to options, it should have some adjustments. Alright, it doesn't have, but I should go right here and I'm gonna go to the column itself. Yeah, as you can see, we have padding adjustments and that's why it looks this way. So explore everything yourself. Try to decide what will work for you. What maybe you would like to use yourself. And it's going to be up to you if you want to go my way or if you want to try something different, but if you're going to have any questions, do not hesitate to send me a message and I'm going to help you out. Alright, so hopefully now you understand this UX Builder a bit better. And now it was a quick walk-through. But in later lessons, once you're going to start working on the pages, you will see it yourself, how it works. Once we have finished with the first section of a page, you're going to have Good understanding how everything works. And if you watched my previous section where I showed you how to work with Elementor, trust me, this time it's going to be much easier than working with elementor. Alright, we can close this one right here. Let's not save any changes. Alright, let's go back to all our pages and basically that's it for this lesson. Now, you know how UX builder works. It's a simple page builder. It's much easier to use then Elementor, but it is flexible as well. Alright, so that's all for this lesson. 49. (6.2) Let's Edit the Homepage (UX Builder): Okay, In this lesson we're going to create our Homepage. And this time we're going to use UX Builder to create our homepage in the previous section when we were working with Astra Theme hours using Elementor and if we would go to our homepage. So I'm just going to open this one in a new tab just to see how it looks. As you can see, this is how it looks. It looks quite messy, and it's because it was created using Elementor and now we are not using Elementor at all. So no matter what is your situation, maybe you have the same looking page. Maybe you have a completely empty page. You will still be able to follow this lesson because we're going to create a completely new page for our homepage. Alright, so I'm going to close this one. And if you forgot, this is our layouts. So this is the same layout I used to create our homepage when I was working with Astra Theme and I was working when Elementor. So as you can see in the first section, we're going to have our hero image with Glick to action button. And for this we're going to use banner right here we have products. So for this, we're going to use products element. This section we're going to import from Flatsome studios. So we're going to have a precreated Templates, so it's going to help us to work more efficiently. And right here we're going to add categories. So for this we're going to use category element and the last settlement is going to be products as well. Alright, so now we can go back to all of our pages. Let's click Add New. Let's give a title to this page. Let's call it Homepage, and let's click edit with UX Builder. Alright, so right now we have a completely empty page and let's click Add Element. Let's choose banner. So before we do any changes, let's make sure that we have all this sections. We need to make sure that this is the layout we have. So let's go back. Let's close this one here. And now let's go back one more time. And now we have to add a title. So let's click Add Elements. Let's choose just a second. Let's choose title. Just a second. Where is the title? Yeah, this is the element we want to use. Alright, let's use title. And let's center this title right here. And let's go back to our layout. So we're going to have best-selling products. So let's dive right here. Best selling products, alright, I think it looks good. We can change the size, let's make it 120. I think it's going to look much better. Alright, let's go back and now we want to add a new elements. This element is going to be proud. So let's use Search to look for Products. Alright, this is the element we want to use. Let's select this element and let's click Apply. And now to display the best-selling products, we have to scroll down just a second. Let's scroll down and now let's select Order By sales, creasing from the best-selling to-do list selling products. So this is how it's going to look once you're going to start getting orders. This is how it's going to be displayed from the bestselling product to the least best selling product. Alright, so let's keep it just like that. Let's click Apply, and now we gonna add another section. So let's go back to our structure and now we need to add this section right here to showcase our advantages. So let's go back. Let's click add elements. And now instead of using any of those elements right here, Let's select Flatsome studio and don't be afraid to explore everything yourself. Maybe you'll find some elements that you would like to use yourself to make your online store a bit more unique-looking. So this one is up to you. You can explore everything yourself. But in this lesson we're going to use this one, Services icons. And just a second, Let's choose this one right here. Let's select Import. Let's import images as well. Let's click start, and this is how it's going to look. Alright, so what's next? Let's go back and now we're going to showcase our categories. So before we add our categories, we need to add a title so we can use this title right here. So we can duplicate this title just like that. And let's type Categories, and let's click Apply. And now we can move this element right here, just down beneath this section here. And this is how it's going to look. Now, let's click add elements, and now let's search for Categories. Alright, so this is what we want to use. Let's click Add, and this is how it's going to look. And now we don't have any images right now, but later we're going to fix that so we can keep it just like that is going to look good. Alright, let's click Apply and what's next? What's next? We have to add trending products. Alright, so let's go back. And now let's duplicate this title one more time. Let's click Duplicate and we can add trending products. Alright, let's click Apply. And now let's move this title just down below are Product Categories element. Alright? So now we have to add products element. So we can duplicate this previous element. Let's click duplicate, and now let's do some changes. Alright, so instead of ordering by sales, we can select random. So it's going to display random products. And again, it's up to you what type of filter you want to use. I usually like to go this way. Let's click Apply. And now we have to move this product element just below this title right here. And this is how it looks. Alright? So now we have everything in place and we have to do changes to the first section. So this is our banner, so this is our hero image. Alright, so let's click right here options. So once I click on Options, I'm doing changes to this whole section right here to disband itself. So now I want to choose a background image. So the background image is going to be the same I used in the previous section when I was working with Elementor. So just a second, Let's look for this image here. This is the image, and I'm gonna click use this image, and this is how it's going to look. And now I want to make it full width. So to do that, we should do some changes to this whole page itself. But before we do that, Let's make sure that we have the right size selected. I want to use this size, let's say, because I want to use a better quality of this image. Alright, so this is how it's going to look. And I can change the height so I don't like that. It has 500 pixels instead of a debt. I'm going to use 600. Alright, I think it's going to look better. Now I want to make this full width. So I'm going to click right here to do changes to this wall page itself. So I'm going to choose template. And this is the template I want to choose. This is how it's going to look. Alright, so we're not done yet because it doesn't look too good right here. So let's do some changes to this text element. Let's move it to the right. And here, let's just a second. I'm going to move it a bit up. Here. I'm going to change the text, so I'm going to click right here, open text editor. And here I'm just going to replace this text, but my text. Alright, so this is how it's going to look. Now I'm going to click Okay, and I don't like the size of the texts, so I can change that right here. So I'm going to move this a bit to the right. Just like that. I can expand this area right here a bit more. Just a second. I can do some changes to this text a bit more. So I have to change the heading element right here. Let's choose number four. Alright, this way, I feel like it's going to look better, alright? So we can increase the font size. And I think it's going to look good. Just a second. I'm gonna go back to text editor. Okay, I think it looks better and now we can change the color. So if I would click right here, I can change the color of this text. I feel like this color will look great. So let's keep it just like that. And now I want to add a button right here. So to add a button, let's go here. We can click, Add textbox, and let's choose button. Alright? So this is the button we're going to use. You can use another preset if you want. So I'm just going to click Apply. Alright, so now I need to Add text. I'm going to Add sharp now. Alright, let's do some style adjustments. Let's choose the secondary color. At the moment, the secondary color is set to be this orange color. But later, once we are going to work on the customization options of this theme, we're gonna do changes. We're going to replace this orange color to red color, and the same color is displayed right here for sale bubble. So we're going to work on that in a later lesson. What else we could do? We could add a URL to this button. So let's make this button active. So this time I want to include a URL that takes our visitors to our shop page where they can see all of our products. So if you remember, the shop page is slash shop. This is the page we want to use. So let's copy this page right here. Now, we can close it and we can paste it right here. Alright, we can also add an icon. If I would add arrow, right? This is how it's going to look and I can choose a visible on our, alright. So this is how it's going to look. Okay, I could also do some other adjustments. I could expand this button as well, and I could change the size of this button. Let's make it large. Alright, I feel like it looks good. And I can change the radius as well. So if I'm going to move this one a bit too, right? This is how it's going to look. And I feel like it looks good. Alright, so once again, everything is up to you. Those all changes, Style adjustments are up to you. But if you're going to follow my lesson, you're going to have a solid foundation and you will understand how to create your homepage by following this lesson. Alright, so let's make sure that everything looks good. So now we can change the text right here. So I'm offering free shipping for orders over $50. And we can keep free returns. Again, it's up to you and Customer Support. So I'll offer Customer Support 24-seven Customer Support, so I can add that right here. So I'm gonna click on this text here, and I'm going to open this one in a text editor, and I'm just going to replace information right here. Alright, we can click, Okay, and this is how it's going to Look. We can go back. So we did changes to the texts. Alright, here we can also include free returns. So let's keep just like that. I'm just going to open this one in a text editor and I'm going to add the information right here. Alright, let's click, Okay So the next one is going to be this one. So I'm going to let now our visitors that are offer great customer support, some gonna type 2047 support. Alright, we can click, Okay, and right now this icon here doesn't make sense because we are offering support so we can change that. So if you would click right here on this icon, you can replace this icon. So I'm going to click right here, change media and I already uploaded my icons. So this is the icon I want to use. I'm going to click use this image. And if you are using SVG images, you can change the color of these icon. So right here, I can change the color of this icon, as you can see, I can make to look similarly to this color right here, just like all other icons. So it's up to you what type of icons you want to use. And I'm going to show you the place where I like to get my icons for free. So the place where I like to get my icons and just a second, I'm going to paste this URL right here. And as you can see, this is the place where I like to get icons. You can find any icon you want to use and just select the icon. You can use Search to look for those icons. And you can download SVG file, and you can use this file right here. So this one is up to you what type of icon so you want to use, this is where I found this icon right here. So it's up to you what I consume want to use. You can explore that website and just check the icons. Maybe you'll find the icons you would like to use instead of those. But right now, let's keep everything as it is. Alright, so this is how it looks and I feel like everything looks quite good. But before we leave, let's add some gaps in between some of the elements. Because right now this product element is right above our first term and we want to have a gap. How to Add a gap you might be wondering. So let's click right here at elements and let's type gap. And this is the gap we want to use. We can select this gap and we can change the height of this gap. So I'm going to type 50 pixels and I feel like it's going to look good. Alright, so we can click Apply. And this is how it looks. And we could actually add another gap right here. So we can duplicate this gap that we already created. Alright, let's desk bit of 50 pixels. Let's see how it's gonna. It's gonna be just below our banner. Alright, so this is how it's going to look and feel like it looks much better. I could also add another gap, Brian here. So I can duplicate this gap just like I did previously. And right now, I can take this gap just a second and I can put it right here. So this is how it looks. I feel like it looks better. Alright, Before we leave, before we publish everything, Let's make sure that everything looks great on other devices. So let's click to see how it's going to look on tablet devices. Everything looks great. So we have our slider, it's properly functioning. And let's scroll up. Let's see how it looks. Alright. Now, our texts doesn't look too good. So we can change that. We can expand this text just like that. We can move it a bit up. I feel like it looks better this time I did those changes. Those changes only applied to tablet device. Let's check how it's going to look on mobile devices. Alright, it doesn't look good at all. So we can re-size this one just like that. Alright, I feel like it's in the center. Now we can do some changes to this image so we can barely see our texts. So let's move this one just like that. Alright, I feel like it looks quite good. It's easy to understand and it looks much better. So if I'm gonna go back to desktop view, nothing changed. So this is a huge advantage of this Flatsome Theme because it's highly customizable. So as you can see it yourself. Alright, so I feel like everything looks great. We have all the sections we need. And now we can click Apply. Alright, let's click Publish. Alright, now we can close this one here. Alright, so this is our homepage. Let's click right here, View All Pages. Now we can close this tab right here. And now we have our home that was created previously, and we have our homepage. We have to replace this with our homepage. So to do that, you want to go to settings right here. Let's choose reading and right here in Homepage, Let's select the page we just created. So this is our homepage. Let's click Save Changes. Now we can go back to All Pages and you will see it yourself that now our homepage is set as the front page. So now we don't need this page. We can click Trash. Alright, let's go and check how our website looks now, N is, you can see this is how it looks. I think it looks much better than the previous version. But actually, we are not done because right now we don't have any images right here. So to add images to our categories, we have to go to the dashboard. Let's go to Products tab. Let's choose Categories. And right here and the wooden toys, I can click Edit. And once I'm here, I can select thumbnail. So I'm going to click around here, select the thumbnail, and I have already uploaded some images. So those are the images I'm planning to use. Some, just going to select this image right here. I'm going to click use image. I'm going to click update. Alright, let's go to Categories. Alright, so this image is now active. So I'm gonna do the same with all other categories. So I'm going to add thumbnails. Alright, there's, you can see I just finished adding images, thumbnails to my Categories, and this is how it looks. Course, I get it that for a costume, so maybe use the wrong image, but it doesn't really matter much. We are working on this homepage just to show you how it looks, how it works. So in your case, of course, you're going to use different images, but in my case, these were the images decided to use. Alright, so now we're done with adding thumbnails. Now we can click right here and we can check our homepage. Let's see how it looks. Alright. So this is how it looks. We have categories. Those categories look this way. And if you don't like how those categories look, because right now, this category here doesn't look too good. I get it. So we can do some more changes. If I would click right here. No, not here, right here. Edit with UX Builder. Let's make sure that everything looks great. Alright, so let's make sure that everything looks great. Alright, so if we have some style issues, we're going to fix that. Alright, so let's select this element right here, Product Categories. And now, if I would scroll down right here just a second and height, we can select one-by-one and it's going to look perfect. Alright, I feel like it looks great. Okay, We could also do some changes how it looks. So to style to batch, we can select label. With label. It doesn't look too good. If you're going to select bush. I think it's gonna look much better. We can keep it just like that. I feel like it's going to look much better. And we can click Apply. Let's click Update. Now we can close UX Builder. And just like that, we created our homepage and compared to the previous version when we were working with Astra Theme, I feel like this homepage looks much better. We have a functioning button and everything looks great. And later in other stages when we're going to work on the customization options, we're going to do changes to the colors here, but right now, everything looks great. So that's all for this lesson. 50. (6.3) Let's Edit the Contact Page (UX Builder): This lesson we're going to create our Contact Us page. So if you've watched my previous section where I showed you how to create Contact Page using Astra Theme and Elementor. This sum is gonna be similar, but if we would go to the page that we created previously in just a second, we cannot find this page right here. Oh no, this is the page we created previously. As you can see, it looks quite massive. So instead of using this page, maybe you haven't followed the previous section and you decided to go with the premium theme. No worries about that. We're going to create completely new Contact page. So to do this, let's go to the dashboard. Let's go to All Pages and let's select all pages. And before we move on, Let's do some changes to the page we created previously. So let's click Quick Edit. And at the end of the title and Slug, Let's type two. And we are doing this because we're going to create a completely new page. And if you're going to create our new page, Contact and we're going to give the same title. It's not going to have the same URL. It most likely going to have contact dash two. So to avoid death, let's rename the page we previously graded, and now we can click at noon. Alright, let's type Contact and let's click edit with UX Builder. Alright, this time let's click add elements and let's add a row. So let's choose two columns, and let's click applying in the first column right here, I want to include contact information like e-mail address, phone number. And if you want, you can also include your address. And right here I'm going to include Contact Form. So if you didn't watch my previous section where I showed you how to create Contact Forms. No worries about that. I'm going to show this right here as well, but I highly recommend you to check the previous lesson where I showed how to grade Contact Page using Elementor using Astra Theme. Alright, so let's start working on this page. Alright, so the first things, Let's click Apply. And right here in this first column, I want to include a text elements. So I'm going to click right here at two column and I'm going to choose text. I'm going to click Apply, and I'm going to open this in text editor. And right here I'm going to type the heading for this text element that's gonna be Contact. I'm going to choose the second level of heading for this one. And I'm going to click Enter and I'm going to enter my e-mail address, phone number, and it's up to you if you want to include address. Alright, so this is how it's going to Look. I'm going to click Okay, and I'm gonna go back. And here in the second column, right here, I'm going to click Add to column. And once again, I'm going to choose text. I'm going to choose paragraph. I'm going to open this in text editor. And right here using this second level of heading, I'm going to type, send us a message. Alright, so as you can see, I chose the second level of heading just like that. Just a moment. I'm going to choose the second level of heading one more time and I'm going to click, Okay, alright, so now let's go back. And here I'm going to click Add to column one more time. And this semi, I'm going to use HTML. Alright, here I have to include HTML code of malformed. So if you don't know how to create a form, showed you in the previous section where I was showing you how to create Contact Forms. But if you didn't watch that lesson, I will show you how you can do it. Alright, so let's go to our website in a new tab. Alright, so right now I'm in the post section. So basically I'm in a dashboard of my websites. And as you remember, we installed fluent forms Plugin. I highly recommend you to watch my previous lesson from the previous section where I was showing how to create Contact Forms. Because in that lesson I showed you how to install fluid forms Plugin. And once you install this plugin, you will be able to create forums. So if I would click right here in all forms, as you can see, I have some forms readings. In the previous lesson, I created this form. So if you don't know how to create form, just watch my previous lesson. But if you don't want to watch that lesson, I can show you how that's done. So for example, let's click Add New Form, and let's choose this one. I usually like to remove the last name, so we're not going to use the lastName. And right here, instead of using submit form, we can change that to send a message. So right here, I'm going to type send message. We can change the style of a button right here. So let's say I'm going to choose the red. I feel like it's going to fit perfectly with my design. And this is how it's going to look. Alright, so before we leave, let's click Save form. And also we could change the title of this form so we would know what we are using. So I'm going to type the title for this form. I'm going to call this contact form two because in the previous lesson, in the previous section are already created the first form, so it's gonna be Contact Form Two. Alright, let's click rename, and this is the ID of our forms. So we want to copy this ID right here. And there's one very important Setting adjustment that we have to do. We have to click right here. And as you can see, this is how the message of our form will look once our visitors submits a form. So we can go right here and email notifications. And let's make sure that we activated email notifications. Once a customer, once a visitor leaves us, a form leaves us a message, we will be notified to our e-mail inbox. But before we leave, we must do some very important adjustments. Let's click right here and send to here. You have to type your business email address. So type the email address that you created previously where I showed you how to create your business email address. Because if you're not gonna do any changes here, you will not be notified to your email address. So make sure that you add your business email address right here. So I just entered my business email address. Now I can scroll down and I can click Save notification. Alright, so make sure that you copied this one right here. Now, we can close this here and let's paste this code right here. Now we can click applying, and before we leave, I feel like we need to add a gap. So let's look for a gap element. Let's select this element, and let's use 50 pixels. Let's click Apply. And now I'm going to duplicate this one right here. Let's click Apply. And now I'm going to bring this one to the top. So I have the same gap at the top of my elements and add a bottom. So now we can click Publish. Alright, we can click Update. Now we can close this UX Builder. Alright, let's go to all our pages. And as you remember, we rename this page. We can put it to trash bin and now we can view our contact page. And this is how it looks. Alright, So contacts right here, it seems quite minimalistic. So I just decided that I wanted to include my e-mail address and phone number, but it's up to you if you want to include your address as well, maybe you're working hours. I decided to go the simple way just to show you how everything works. I also like to include some information for my customers that are usually reply within 24 h to messages, to emails. So just to fill up this column right here a bit more, but as you can see, this is how our contact page looks right now. And it's fully functioning Contact page. It will work just great. Maybe we didn't need to add a gap right here, but we can fix that if you're going to click right here, Edit with UX Builder and we can remove the gap that we produce the ad. Alright, so let's delete this bottom gap because we already have a good gap in between the elements. We can click Update. Alright, we can close this one. Alright, so as you can see, this is how it looks and I feel like our contact page looks great. It does the job. Our customers, our visitors will be able to contact us, leave us a message, and what else you could ask. Alright, so that's all for this lesson. 51. (6.4) Creating Menus: In this lesson, we're going to go through the creation process of the main menu, of the Menus itself. So if you haven't watched my previous section where I showed you how to create Menus. It's basically the same no matter what FIM you are using, no matter if you're using any page builders or anything like that, Menus are part of the WordPress itself. So I'm gonna go to my homepage. As you can see, this is the menu. We have no worries about that this menu doesn't fit our header. Later we're going to do adjustments to this menu. But right now, this is the menu we want to have. This is the exact menu we are planning to use for our website. So how I created this menu. So we should go to the dashboard right here. And if I would go to Appearance section right here, I can choose Menus. So here I created this menu, and as you can see here, we have various different menus. So I can choose from the list. So I have main menu, I have a menu of quick links. I have a secondary menu site links. In this course we are only focusing on the main menu because that's all we're going to use in this course. So I'm going to select this main menu and I'm going to click select. And of course, if you will need to create a new menu, you can click right here and you will be able to create a new menu. And later this menu will be added to the list of all Menus. And in later stages, when you Customizing Your Theme, when you are customizing your website, you can set this menu, newly-created menu, let's say to display in a certain place of your website. But right now, our main focus is on this main menu. So as you can see, we have all the categories and that's exactly what we want to have. And if you're wondering how I created this menu, so I simply use custom links. So right here, I added the text, let's say costumes. So added the text costumes, and I added the URL of the costumes category. So if you're not sure how to find those URLs, you can click right here products. Let's open Categories in a new tab. And let's go to Categories and let's say costumes. So this is the costumes category. I can click View in a new tab. And this is the URL of our costumes category. So we can simply copy this URL. If I would go back to my menu right here, I can add link text costumes, and I will paste the URL. Once I click add to menu, this menu item will be added right here. So as you can see right here, we have costumes. I'm not adding this one because we already have this added to our main menu. And our main menu is fine. We don't need to do any changes. So just like that, you can create Menus. Also, you can choose from the Categories. If I would go right here. No, sorry, it doesn't work. So this one right here, menu items looks a bit different from the previous version when we were working with Astra Theme. And it's just because we are working with different Theme. So different themes usually have different options. But in this case, when you are creating a menu, you're going to need to use the same option, custom links, just like we used in the previous section when I was working when Astra Theme. So right here, don't forget, paste the URL of your category, add the text and click Add to Menu. And just like that, you will create your menu. And here of course, you can set your menu to be displayed in various different locations, but you don't need to focus on that because in later lessons, we're going to do changes to the locations of our menu that will be displayed on our website. So no worries about that. You don't need to focus right here at all. And once you're done with your menu, don't forget to save menu. And if we would go back to our website, so I'm just gonna go to this tab right here. I'm going to click Visit Site. As you can see, this is the menu we're going to have. I'm going to close this stem right here. If you're wondering how to create a drop-down menu, actually showed this how to do in the previous section, but I'm just going to show this one more time. So for example, if you have a parent category costumes and you have child categories like Halloween costumes, Christmas costumes, Something like that. And you want to make a drop-down menu. So let's say this is going to be your costumes, and this one is going to be Halloween costumes. So just move it to the right side, just like that, hit Save Menu. And let's go back to our homepage. Let's refresh this page. And as you can see now, costumes, drop-down menu has bath toys, but in your case it might be Halloween costumes and maybe you're going to have the second item, Christmas costumes or anything like that. So this is how you create a drop-down menu. Alright, let's go back and let's make it as it was previously. So we have to select this item right here. Let's move it to the left. And just like that, we're gonna go back to the previous layout. Of course, you can swap places with many elements just like that. So it's up to you. So once you do any changes, don't forget to hit Save Menu. And now we can go back to our homepage. Let's refresh this page. And as you can see now, costumes is not a drop-down menu. Alright, we can close this tab. So just like that, you can create Menus. And if you're not sure about the Menus, you still want to learn a bit more about that. So don't forget to watch my previous section where I showed you how to work with as supreme. And you can check the lesson where I showed how to create menus. So no matter what Theme you are using, no matter what page builder plugin or anything like that you are using, the creation process of your menu is going to be the same. But at the later stages when we are working on the customization options of our website, we can set our menu to be displayed in certain locations. So our goal is going to be to set this menu to display. And now Header, Right now it doesn't look too good, but we're gonna do some customization options in later lessons. Alright, so that's all for this lesson. Now you should know how the Menus work and if you need some more information, don't forget to check my previous lesson in the previous section where I showed you how to create Menus 52. (6.5) Customizing the Theme (Flatsome): Okay, In this lesson we're going to start customizing our theme and you're gonna see yourself how many customization options this beam has compared to our previous theme that we worked on. Alright, so let's click right here, Customize. And as you can see here, we have all the customization options. We have a bit more options, but once we click, let's say on the header right here, as you can see, this is how many options we have. Right here we have our header builder. We can set different types of Heather's for desktop devices, for mobile and tablet devices. And right now we're not going to work on our header because there's quite a lot of things, so talk about it. And the later lesson, we're going to focus on the header a bit more and we're going to work on debt in the later lesson. Alright, so let's go back and let's go to Style. So once again in Style, you obviously going to do changes to the style, so to the fonts, two colors, and so on. So if I click right here, topography, as you can see, I can choose my font families, four different types of texts. So right now, as you can see for headlines, so this is the headline. This is the headline it said to be this bond, and this is the variance. It's up to you what type of fonts you want to use. Our usual, don't over-complicate myself with a font families, and it's up to you. It's of course the matter of taste, but lots of websites and now use Roboto font. They also use some other popular font families. And you can Google if you want, you can check other popular font families that most of their websites use. But as you can see, this one looks quite good. And if you would choose from the list, as you can see, we have various different fonts available and it's up to you if you want to explore this option right here. So like I always like to say, don't be afraid to explore everything yourself because you're going to learn how to use this beam or tool much better. And as you can see right here, we also have the different fonts for base STX. So if I would click on my product right here, this is the base texts. This is the text will be used for product descriptions, reuse, and your blog posts and so on. So this is where you can do changes to this type of texts navigation. So if you're going to choose different font for your navigation, It's going to be applied right here. It's up to you and just to let you know it's not a problem to use two fonts on your website. You can absolutely use two fonts on your website. You can use different fonts for your headings are for your base stacks. You can even use a completely different font for navigation menu. But just keep in mind that those fonts, they got to match together. Alright, so this is where you can do those changes. You can also change the text transforms right here. So as you can see right here, breadcrumbs right now I said to uppercase, if I would activate this one. As you can see, instead of being an uppercase, this section right here is displayed in normal letters. Alright, let's go back to uppercase. And once again, it's up to you to decide what you want to use, how you want to make things look. Because once again, it's a matter of taste. If you would just follow my course completely blindly, you would probably end up with the same looking websites. So I think the uniqueness is very important. So you should explore everything yourself. Alright, let's go back and in colors. Alright, so as you can see right here, we have primary colors, secondary color. And when we were working on our homepage just a second. Yeah, this is the Homepage and as you can see, this is how our homepage looks. And as you remember when we were working on this first section on this banner, and when we added a button, we had an option to choose what color if we wanted to use. So we went with the secondary color, and as you can see, the same color is used right here and right here. Since it's secondary color, the primary color is right here. So I'm just going to change those colors here. And I'm going to Add link colors. However, link colors and all that. And once again, this one is up to you because you're working on the style, on the colors. And just keep in mind, the best case is to make them match and to make colors matching. As you remember, I showed you in the previous lesson a while back ago, where I talked about how to use coolers tool to generate matching colors. So right now I'm just going to replace all those colors with matching colors. Alright, there's, you can see, I've just finished replacing all the colors and this is how it looks. And now everything looks a bit better, like the way everything looks. And the sense, of course we have all the matching colors in place. And if I would scroll down, this is how everything looks. And once again, those all Style adjustments up to you, but just keep in mind, you should use matching colors. And if I was scroll down, as you can see, I can do changes to the separate items, to the separate areas of my websites or my Theme. So for example, I could choose a completely different color for the sale button. So instead of using this secondary color, as you can see right here, I could choose Color for the sale bubbles. So it's going to be not the secondary color, but it's going to use this color if I would decide to set it right here. And as you remember, I told you before it you shouldn't use too many colors on your website because it's not going to look professional. But if you will decide that you want to make cell bubbled different or Add to Cart button different or something like that. Don't be afraid using four colors or up to five colors is good. But just keep in mind that you should match all those colors. So you can explore those settings right here yourself. And now we can go back. And if I would choose global styles right here, we're not going to change anything because everything is good as it is by default. So let's go back some CSS. So since I told you and the beginning of this course, we're not going to work with any code and we're not going to do that. But if you would need any extra customization options to go even more in-depth, to dive even more in depth, to change colors spore as separate small elements. This is where you can do that. But to do that, you should know how to code. So you should know CSS coding language. Of course, it's for advanced users. Alright, let's go back and image lightbox. And we're not going to change anything because everything is good as it is by default. Alright, let's go back. And in Blog, we're not going to change anything because we haven't started talking about blogs. And for this I have a completely separate section. So if we wanted to do those changes right here, we shouldn't have blog first and we don't have that yet. But right here, you just gonna be able to do changes to your blog posts, to the Categories. And once again, is the matter of taste. Once you going to have your blog posts ready, this is where you will be able to do various adjustments. How your blog posts will be displayed, how the featured images will look, what meta data you want to display and so on. So this one will be for you to explore, to design how the thing is going to look. But usually the way it is by default, it just works well and you will see it yourself once we publish our first blog post. And it's gonna be for you to design how you want to work on the customization options of the blog aspect. But I think the default version usual looks good and no matter what the Theme you are using. So if you are using an Astra Theme or this one, if you're not going to lag the way things look, this is very, you will be able to do changes to the blog pages, to blog posts, and to everything that is associated to blog. Alright, let's go back and WooCommerce tab right here. This is where you can do changes to the WooCommerce part of your website. So in Store notice, if you've watched my previous section, this is where I added my Store notice. If I would enable this Store notice right here, and I would click this one here. As you can see, we have Store notice that you can dismiss, but I usually don't use that Store notice, let's say for this type of message, free shipping for orders over $50. When I'm working with Flatsome Theme, maybe it's good option, it's good choice when you're working with Astra Theme very, you have lack of customization options. But with Flatsome Theme, I usually like to display such information right here. So you can easily do that. So we can disable this one completely. Alright, let's go back Product Catalog. This is where you can do changes to the product catalog. I usually like the way everything looks at. Do not change anything. But this is for you to explore the customization options. As you can see, this is our product page. So no matter if you're going to be in the costumes category or would entice category, or anywhere else. It's going to look the same just like this one, sharp. So this is where you do all the changes related to catalog. If I would scroll down, this is very can change the layout of your catalog. I usually like to keep this one. You can change the list style and do various other adjustments. As you can see, there's plenty of various adjustments. And once again, it's the matter of taste. And when we're going to visit the widget section, this is where we're going to add some widgets. So let's not focus on that right now. Alright, so just do not be afraid to explore everything yourself. Alright, let's go back from the Product Catalog, Product Page. Alright, so this is the product page. If I would click on this product, we will be working on this product page so you can change the layout, you can change how the thing is going to look, how the header gonna look, and so on. So this one is once again for you to explore. I usually like to keep everything the way it is. I feel like it looks the best. You can also change how the additional images will be displayed. So for example, yeah, this is how it's going to look, but I usually like to go with this version. And as you can see right here, we have various other adjustments. And if I would choose, for example, sticky Add to Cart, I would scroll down. As you can see, we have Add to Cart option. So once again, it's up to you to decide what works for you the best. Looking from the Conversion Rate perspective, I haven't noticed any huge differences if I would have this one activated or not. So it's up to you to decide how you want to make your website look. Because after all, we're Creating unique websites. Alright, so I'm just going to disable this one. Then as you can see right here, we have even more adjustments. But once again, I'd do not over-complicate myself with dose changes here, because usually everything is good as it is by default. Alright, let's go back and my account. So if I would click on My Account I will have to click right here my account. As you can see, this is my account page. So here you can change the title alignment. As you can see, this is how it would look. I feel like this way. It will look better. Yeah, maybe it's going to look a bit better and you can change the text color. Once again, those changes are up to you. We don't have too many adjustments right here, but it's okay. I usually like to keep our string symbol. Alright, let's go back Payment icons. This one is up to you if you will decide that you want to display Payment icons such as Visa, PayPal, stripe, MasterCard, cash on delivery. And if you scroll down, you'll find even more various other different types of payments. And I usually do like to display those, especially if I'm working with the global audience. So my global audience would see that accept Visa, PayPal, stripe, MasterCard. Usually if you accept payments by cards, it's a good idea to include Stripe because Stripe is a very well-known brands, so it's usually a good idea to include that. And for example, once I would select absolute Footer, as you can see, it's already being displayed right here, but it shouldn't be displayed. Alright, I want to display those Payment I constraint here, but I just wanted to show you if I'm going to disable it, it disappears. So I should activate that one in later lesson when I'm going to be working on the Footer, we're going to do some adjustments right here. But for now, let's keep those four active and we can go back. I also forgot to mention you can also activate this one end card sidebar, but I usually don't do that. But just to show you how it's going to Look, let's activate this one. Let's go to our cart page. And this is where it's gonna be this way. So this is how it would look, alright, so we can disable it. So it's up to you if you want to keep active or you want to disable it, I'm just going to disable it. I'm gonna go back. I'm gonna go to the Homepage and just a second. What else we have? We had Payment icons, product images. We're not going to change anything because I feel like everything is good as it is by default. But for example, if I would choose this one one-by-one, as you can see, this is how it would look. Maybe it will look better. So it's up to you. I feel like it's gonna look a bit better. I feel like it looks better. So it's up to you if you want to keep this one or you want to use custom and you can change those settings right here. Let's go back checkout page. Alright, this one is very important since we were doing some changes in the previous section when I was showing you how to work with Astra Theme, how to customize it. Some of the changes were saved. So what are dead in that section, if you remember, I decided to hide company name field because I'm doing business to customer. I'm not doing business to business. I like to keep things simple. And I decided to hide the second line for address. It's not necessary because it's sometimes for customers it might look a bit confusing. Let's keep things simple because simple things work the best. Form field. One field I usually like to require because it's important, field and disinformation is important. And right here you can do various other adjustments. But I usually don't change anything. Maybe in some cases are more email to the first position, just like that. So you can activate this one as well as some of my websites. They have email address in the first position. And once again, I haven't noticed any huge difference in conversion rate. And if you lack the way this checkout page looks, you can keep it just like that. But if you would choose the simple layout, as you can see, this is how it would look and I feel like it's going to look much butter. And if you would choose focused one, it may be doesn't look that good. So let's go with a simple one. Alright, now we can go back. And if I would go to cart adjustments, this is where I'm going to be doing changes to the cart itself. So I have to go to my cart. And once again, here you can change the layout. If I'm going to choose the simple one, this is how it's going to look, but I can go with a focused one. I feel like the focused one is going to look much better. Alright, it looks a bit better. I do understand it looks almost identical. And just a second, you can also activate box shipping labels. As you can see, this is how it would look. So once again, those are up to you. And right here, if you do any changes with those options, you won't be seeing any changes. Because in the last lesson of this section, I will show you how to fix this cart page, the checkout page. There are some things we have to do, but no worries, Everything functions the way it is right now. But in the last lesson, the Final Touches, we're going to take care of the final things, so everything would look perfect. Alright, so I think everything looks good. Now we can go back and basically we are done with WooCommerce tab, WooCommerce customization options. So let's go back. Layout adjustments. We're not going to change anything because everything is good as it is by default, maybe you are creating some type of website in a specific niche where your website has to be extra sweet or something like that. Maybe you would want to include a background image that you can barely see. Maybe this would work. So once again, it's up to you and don't forget to check every time the changes on each the y's on tablet On mobile. And once again, let's go back to the desktop view. And so here we're not going to change anything because everything is good as it is by default. Alright, let's go back and a footer, we're not going to do any changes because there's gonna be a completely separate lesson for this. And basically in this section you're going to have two options. How to set up your footer. So you're going to have the same option as you had in the previous section by using widgets. But in the second option we're going to set up our Footer and a bit easier way. And that's exactly on what I'm going to focus. So let's not focus on the footer right now at all. We're going to have a separate lesson for this pages right here. We're not going to change anything because everything is good as it is by default. Alright, let's go back portfolio. We can skip portfolio because we are creating an eCommerce store. We're not grading upper swallow type of website. And like I said, this Flatsome Theme, this premium theme is extremely versatile. You can even create a portfolio websites using this beam. But since we are working on an eCommerce website, Let's not focus on that at all. Alright, let's go back Menus. So right here we can change the locations of Menus. And to be honest, here, we not going to change much. Probably the only one thing that we're going to change. We're going to go to main menu. And basically we had kinda similar adjustments and Astra Theme. But here we have more settings because we are working with premium theme. And the only thing that I'm going to change, I'm just going to disable Footer Menu. I don't need to display any menu in the footer. So if I would scroll down, as you can see, this menu that was displayed previously disappeared, and that's exactly what we want it to happen. Alright, let's go back. Let's go back one more time. Widgets. So here we don't have much adjustments. As you can see, we have adjustments for our Footer. And if I would go back, this is the second Fetzer. And here we're not going to change anything because those widgets are here for our Footer. And maybe if you're going to decide that you want to customize your Footer using wedges just like we did in previous section. This is where you can work on those widgets. This is where you can add those widgets. But in this section we're going to create our footer in a different way. Alright, so here, let's not focus on that too much. Alright, let's leave that just like that Homepage Settings. We're not gonna change anything because everything is good as it is by default. And as you can see, the only thing that we can change is we can set page for our blog posts. Alright, let's go back. Share, serving share. You can do changes to the share button. So for example, if I'm going to select this product right here, as you can see here, we have share buttons. Maybe we don't need to use Email option because Email Esquire outdated, let's be honest. Alright, and this way, I feel like it looks good. And if you don't like the style, you can change the style. You can see if you would choose this one. This is how it would look. And once again, all Style adjustments are up to you. I usually like to keep things simple, just like that. Alright, let's go back. Notifications. We're not going to change anything right here. This tab is maybe for users who are looking to let their visitors note that there were any changes, policy or something like that. But we don't need to focus right here because everything is good. Okay, Let's go back and additional CSS. Once again, this one is for advanced users who are looking to do some Customization using CSS coding. Alright, let's not focus on that. Right here. Reset options, you can reset Theme Options, but we're not going to use that at all. Alright, let's go back. Let's check how our website is going to look on tablet devices. Alright, I feel like everything looks good. And of course you're going to work on our header. Of course you're going to change the footer, but for now everything looks great. If I would click on this menu, this is how it's going to look. If I click on the mobile device, is going to look the same. And yeah, basically, everything looks great. And if everything looks great, if you are satisfied with the final result, we can click Publish. We can close this one. And this is how it looks. So our homepage looks white. Well, it's nothing compared to the previous section, and of course is because we are working with a premium theme. Alright, so that's all for this lesson. 53. (6.6) Editing Header (Flatsome): This lesson we're going to edit our header that's right here. Okay? So just like we did some changes to our header when we were working with Astra Theme. It's going to be the same, but except this time we're going to have more customization options. Alright, let's click Customize and let's select Header. Then as you can see here, we have Header Builder. And just like with Astra Theme, this header builder has three levels. So this is the top part of our header. You can see this right here in this electric color. We have the second part of our header. You can see it right here. We have the third part that is an active right here. You can switch between the different modes. As you can see, if I would switch to mobile tablet view, I have a different header builder because on mobile and tablet devices are Header looks different. So this is how it's going to Look. We have a bit different structure, a bit different layout, but it still works and it does the job. So when you are working on your header using this Flatsome Theme, you have to keep in mind that you have to do changes to your desktop device and to your mobile and tablet devices. And as you can see right here in this header Builder, we have various elements. We have HTML code. So basically this HTML code is text right here. This is the text. If I would move this HTML block or elements and this area of not used elements, as you can see, it disappears. Alright, if I would move it back, it shows up again. So as you can see, we have various different blocks elements. And it's gonna be up to you to experiment what you're going to like more. But once again, in this lesson, I'm going to show you a mob blueprint and I find that it just works. Alright, so once we clicked on this block is you can see we are doing changes to this block, but this blog has various different HTML code. So this blog is connected with other HTML blogs. So those settings right here, I mean, you can see we have HTML block number two, number three, number four. And here you can add various information texts, images if you want, and if it's too confusing for you, HTML is very simple coding language. And I'm just going to explain you real quick what this code right here means. As you can see, we have texts, add anything here or just remove it so you can add any text you want. And right here is just set to display this text and uppercases. And this is a bold text. So that's basically all it means. I usually don't use this one right here, except when I'm offering free shipping for orders, let's say $50. So I might replace this text and I'm going to add free shipping for orders over $50. Then as you can see, this is how it would look. And once again, it's up to you how you want to display this information. You can even move this block to the center. And of course, now it doesn't look too good because we have this menu. We can deactivate this menu just like that. And now it would look much better if we would switch to mobile and tablet devices. You can see we have this HTML blog as well. And once again, it's up to you if you're offering such things as a free shipping or you want to display any other information, it's completely up to you. I usually like to keep things simple. And in majority of cases such as disabled this top bar right here. And when I'm offering, let's say, some special deal sales. I just said HTML texts and forming visitors, customers that there are such deals, such offers, such sales or something like that. And I include this information here. If you're not doing that, you can disable this one by moving this HTML code just like that. Or you can completely disabled this top bar. So if you would click right here to our bar, you can select if you want to disable it for now, since I'm building the header according to my blueprint, I'm just going to disable it. But now you know the ways how you can use this top Header and it's completely up to you. Alright, so now you are familiar that here we have our header Builder. We have various blogs that we can move around in this header Builder. If we are not using those blogs, we can put them here. And if we want to do some changes to these blocks, we can click on those blogs and we can start doing changes to those blogs. And you can also switch in between different views. So now we know how that works. Alright, so let's go back to all Header customization options. And as you can see where the presets, if I would go right here, you could choose the presets, so it's pre-made templates for the header. You can explore that yourself. And it's completely up to you if you want to use that. But you can create your own Header, and that's exactly what we're gonna do in this lesson. You can explore those, you can activate them, you can deactivate them. Maybe you will find the header you would like to use. And once again, it's the matter of taste. Okay, let's go back and logo and site identity. Of course, you can add your site title since I already added this side title and tagline When I was doing changes to my WordPress Settings. Those are right here already in place and yours should be here as well. And those are not displayed because I haven't activate this one. And the most important thing that we're gonna do here, you're going to change the logo. So we're going to click right here. This is the logo one to use. I'm going to click Select and I can change the logo size. So if I'm going to move this one just like that, I'm going to shrink it. Alright, I think it looks better. And now if I would scroll down here, you can see we have some other adjustments. You can play with those changes to see it's going to change anything. And of course, right here, you should add your site icon. The icon is displayed right here. So this is very important. Okay, let's go back top bar. We already disabled the top bar that was displayed right here, and it's up to you. If you want to display, maybe you will want to display this top bar when you are offering some special deals, special sales or something like that. And it's completely up to you. And if you're going to do that, you can activate it. You can add various blogs to this top bar, just like we did previously when we added HTML1. This one here. As you can see, just like that, you can add those right here. Alright, let's go back. Let's select top bar one more time. You can adjust the height, you can change the background color and do all other adjustments. So those are gonna be up to you if you will want to use this top bar, but I'm just going to disable it. Okay, let's go back. Let's go to header main. So if you would click right here, we will be doing changes to this part of our header. So this is where we're gonna do changes. You can change the height. As you can see, we can adjust that. You can change the wide, just like that. I usually like to keep this way. And you can change the colors, you can do all other adjustments. You can change the size of Navigator menu and so on. This one is going to be up to you to explore because of course you want to create a unique-looking website. We can go back. And to be honest, since we were there and we were working on this part, we could do some changes to this section right here. So I usually like to display search right here, and I like to put my main menu. And the third part of my header just like that. And I do not use Search icon instead of Search icon. I like to use search for just a second. This is the search form. And if I would add right here, this is how it's going to look. And as you can see, our website is starting to look better. And I usually like to go with this option right here, this one. And I usually like to choose flat, and I usually like to expand the width of this search bar. Okay, I feel like it looks good. Now we can go back and now we have Heather bottom. So we already did some changes. We moved our main menu in the header bottom. So this is our header bottom. We could click right here to do changes to Header bottom, but we can click here as well. So if I would click right here, I could change the height of our header bottom. I couldn't make it a bit larger. I could also change the color to white. I think it's going to look much better. And I could change the navigation menu size if I'm going to choose extra large. This is how it's going to look. But if I would choose large, this is what we get. Maybe doesn't look too good. Maybe we could go with medium-size and we could expand the spacing in-between those many elements. Alright, the finger, it looks better. The color didn't change, so we should change that one more time. And those changes are not. No worries about that. Once we click publish, those changes will be in place, so no worries about it. You can also explore some other options. This one is completely up to you. Alright, let's go back. Heather and mobile menu overlain. So here you will be doing changes to mobile or tablet device. So you should change your review to mobile and tablet. And as you can see, this is how it looks. So here you can do various adjustments. So this is our menu. And as you can see right here, now we have newsletter to make this newsletter work. We would have to create a blog and we would have to add to this block our contact form. And it's just too complicated for our visitors. I usually don't include this type of newsletter and my menu. I usually like to include a simple newsletter form and the footer, and it works very well. Sometimes I include pop-ups, but I do not like to include newsletter and the main menu because it just doesn't work. Okay. So to disabled this newsletter, because like I said, I do not recommend you to include that as well. You can scroll down and here we have various many elements. Alright, at a top, we have Search. So this is Search. We have main menu, we have accounts. So this is my account part. We have newsletter, so we can disable newsletter part and we can keep social icons later, I'm going to show you how to add your profile so your pages to those social media icons. Now, we are done with this part where we were doing changes to a mobile and tablet menus. So this is how it's going to Look. I think it's going to look good and you can explore some other adjustments as well. So now we can go back to desktop view. We can close this one and we can go back and right here, sticky header. So sticky header means that you're going to have sticky header wants to scroll down. So for example, if I'm going to scroll down, as you can see, our header is sticky Okay, So this is how it looks and it just sticks. Okay, if I'm going to activate and just a second, I'm going to deactivate the top. Yeah, just a second because sometimes it just freezes and it's not supposed to act this way. Okay, so now everything is normal and deactivated this top bar, and now it looks perfectly and no worries about that. If you publish their roofing and you want to check your website, those changes would be saved and you wouldn't have any issues. But I just wanted to show you how it's going to look. So as you can see, this is how our sticker Header looks. And I usually like to keep the sticky header just like that. It's very convenient for our customers around visitors. Alright, so this is what the sticky header is. If you would go to drop down style, as you can see right here, and you could do changes to the drop-down menu. So for example, if you would have, let's say parent category costumes. And in this parent category, you would have child categories, Halloween costumes, Christmas costumes, or any other type of costumes. Once you hover over costumes and there's a drop-down menu, this is where you can do changes to this drop-down menu. So this one is up to you to explore. Let's go back. Buttons. Buttons. Here you can add buttons. So for example, we have button number one. So let's say maybe you're going to create a button. I don't know where this button will take your visitors. It's gonna be up to you. I usually don't use that because the simple header works just as well. But if in the future you will decide that you want to include some buttons, let's say live consultation, something like that. This is where you can add text, alright, live consultations, something like that. This is where you will include link very your users can register for live consultations. And now you will have an active button one. Also you can do some other style adjustments for this button, this button one. And if you scroll down, you can create another button. And once you do that, this is where you will find those buttons. Right now those buttons are not used. So these are the buttons button one button to. So as you can see, button one button to, for example, I'm going to include a link hashtag. I'm doing just to show it how it works. And let's say now I want to include this button to the right side of my main header. And as you can see, we have button. You can also drag this button right here. And once again, it's up to you how you want to use those buttons. Okay, I'm gonna put it back to not in use section. Alright, let's go back now. You should understand how buttons work account. So once again, this is our account. Our users can login to their accounts. They can check their orders, addresses and so on. And this is where you can do various changes to the style of this part right here, you can add an icon. This is how it's going to look, but I usually like to keep things simple. You can activate username as labeled as you can see, this is how it would look and yeah, those are just the settings for you to explore. But I usually like to keep the way things are. I think it looks great. Let's go back. Card. You can do changes to the card Style. So at the moment, this is how it looks. I usually like to keep it this way. I feel like it looks the best. But once again, it's up to you to explore. You can activate this option. You can choose cards, icon. You can do wherever you want. You can also import your custom icons SVG file. So just like I showed you in the other lesson where you can download icons. This is where you can upload your icon if you want. And this is where you can do those changes related to your cart style. Let's go back Search. So for search, we already did some changes. We selected the style. So this is how it looks right now. And if you like, it looks great. Alright, let's go back. Html. We're not going to do anything because I've already told you that this is where you can add various information to HTML blocks. So we have first HTML block. As you remember, we added free shipping for orders over $50. So this is our HTML blog. Just a second. This is the first blog. Let's say I'm going to add this one right here. And this is how it looks. It doesn't look good. I totally understand because it's supposed to be right here at the top bar. But since we have disabled the top bar, it's not displaying. So we can put it bank to not in use section. Let's go back Contact. So right here you can add your phone, your email, maybe later you will decide that you want to use those Contact blogs and never you want. So once you add this information right here, we have this contact blog. And once again, you can display it anywhere you want. Okay. This is the contact information. You can display it at your towel bar or anywhere else. Let's put it back. Okay. Let's go back. Newsletter. So once again, like I said, I usually don't like to use newsletter. It's not the best way to show the newsletter form for your visitors. I usually like to include newsletter in the footer and I'm going to show you how that's done. And of course, for marketing purposes, you can also create pop-ups and that's how it works. But I usually don't like to use that in my header. It just our complicates things. Alright, let's go back. Vertical menu. So vertical menu is for your mobile or tablet devices. Usually everything is good as it is by default and we don't need to change anything. Okay, let's go back. Follow wagons. So this is where you want to include your social media profiles, Facebook, Instagram, Twitter, maybe your email address if you want to, and all other information. And once you include those, you can display those social media icons. And never you want the block are responsible for those icons is this one. So as you remember, it used to be displayed at a top, top bar. So let's activate the top bar one more time. Now we have our social media icons and we have a newsletter. If I would drag this newsletter, do the nut in use section, as you can see, it disappears. And if I would click on social icons, go to the same tab as previously. And here you can add your Facebook Instagram profiles. You can change the style. And as you can see, this is how it would look. This one is completely up to you. Alright, let's go back to the settings of top bar. Let's disable the top bar. Okay, let's go back and pretty much that's it. So as you said yourself at this Flatsome Theme has way more customization options compared to the Astra Theme. And you have a lot of different ways to create your header. But I usually like to keep it simple because it works the best and it's also completely up to you what type of Header you want to have. But if you want to have the same header, just follow my steps and you'll have the same header once you're done with changes, not forget to click Publish. And now we can close the sidebar. And as you can see, this is how our header looks. It's a fully functioning Header, and as you can see, it's a sticky header as well. And it works just well. It looks much better. And of course it looks much better than we had our header with Astra Theme. So that's all for this lesson. 54. (6.7) Editing Footer (Flatsome): In this lesson, we're going to customize our footer. The footer is right here. And like I mentioned you before, with this premium theme, with this Flatsome Theme, you actually have two options to customize your footer. So the first option is right here. If you would click customize, it is going to be similar to the option when we were Customizing our Footer using Astra Theme, except this time we ain't going to have Footer Builder. If you would click right here for term. As you can see, we have first-level of our footer. So this is right here. If I would disable it, as you can see, it disappears. And of course you can choose how many columns you want to have. And if you're going to scroll down, you're going to have the second level of your Footer. So this is the second level. And as you can see, it also has four columns. It has the background color. And we have absolute Footer that is right here. And with absolute Footer, we will not be able to disable this right here because it is absolute Footer and it's just going to be displayed. You can delete the texts, you can disable those icons. But no worries about that. We're going to use this absolute Footer, but we're not going to customize our Footer using those options. As you can see, those all Footer levels, the first one, the second one where created using widgets. So if I'm going to click around here, as you can see, we have various blogs, various widgets. Similarly to Astra Theme when we were Customizing are Footer using widgets. So it's basically the same since we are using this premium theme, we have an option to create our footer in the easier way. Why over-complicate ourselves with more difficult way when we can do this in an easier way. Alright, so let's close this Customization sidebar. Let's click. Okay, Let's go to our dashboard. And to create our footer, we're going to use UX blogs. Ux blogs are similar to widgets. You can create blogs and you can display them in various places. In this case, we're going to create a block and we're going to display it. And now Footer as our Footer. And when you are creating blogs using this UX blocks option, you will be creating those blogs using UX Builder, the same Builder that we use to create our Homepage and all other pages. So let's click Add New. Let's give a title. Let's call it Footer, and let's click Publish. And now we can select UX Builder right here. Alright, as you can see, we have the same interface when we were working with our pages. And now let's click add elements and let's choose Flatsome studio. And as you can see right here from the list, we can choose all kinds of different pre-made layouts. So we want to choose Footer. And as you can see right here, we have some pre-made Footer layouts that you can use, and it's up to you which one you would like to use. You can even click Preview to check how those footers look. As you can see, if you choose this one, you could replace the information that is here with your information and you can set this Footer to be displayed as your Footer. Alright, let's close this one. I usually like to use this one. So let's click Import. And as you can see right here, we have our footer. This is how it's going to look. The first things first, we could change the information that is right here. I usually like to include a short sentence about my business, about my eCommerce store. And at the top I usually like to include my logo. So let's click right here. Let's click Open Text Editor. I'm going to delete this title right here. I'm going to click here Add Media, and I'm just going to select my logo. I'm going to click insert into page. Let's resize it a little bit. Okay, I think it looks good. Here. I'm just going to paste my text, my short sentence about my online store. Alright, so I'm done and I'm going to click, Okay, right here, you can include your social media profiles. If you have your Facebook page, this is where you can add your URL, your Instagram URL, Twitter, or an address. So this one is up to you. If you have those profiles, just paste them right here and they will be displayed here. If you don't like the way those icons look, you can do some style adjustments. But I usually like to keep them just like that. I feel like it looks good since I'm not going to add my profile. So I'm just going to click Apply and I'm going to move on to the next column. Alright, so right here, I usually like to include information for customers. So the top, I'm just going to type for customers. And here I'm going to include five pages for my customers, such pages as shipping and delivery information, returns and refunds my account, my orders, and so on. So since I know that I'm going to have five pages, I can copy one of those pages right here. And I can go to the next line and I will paste this page. Alright, as you can see, I accidentally copied too many pages so I can delete some of them only need five. Alright, so right here I have five pages. And before I add anything, I have to disable the links that were added previously. So I'm just going to remove links one-by-one, just like that. And here I'm just going to replace the text but my pages, alright, so now I have to add links to these pages. So to add my account link, simply, Let's go to our website. Right here are just a second and open our posts page. So let's click Visit Site and let's go to my account, and this is our account page, so we want to copy this URL right here. Let's go back And here, just select my account, select this one, paste this URL, and click this one, apply. Just like that, you will make this Page Act. And the same goes with orders. So let's select orders. And I'm going to copy this URL right here, and I'm gonna go back. I'm going to select this one. Once again. Just paste your URL, click Enter and your page is active. Okay, so now we have to add Contact page. So to find our contact page, we should go to our dashboard. Let's select all pages and simply just open Contact Page in a new tab, just like that. And this is your URL. So you want to copy this one. Now we can close it. Let's go back and let's paste this one right here. Just select this one before that space. So just like that, Let's click Apply and I'm going to do the same with the rest of pages. Alright, so I finished adding my pages. Now I can click, Okay, and we can go back. And we're basically done with this column right here. Now let's go to the second column. So in this column I'm going to include four pages. And those page is gonna be privacy policy about us cookie policy and all other pages. So basically I'm just going to do the same as I did with this column right here. I'm going to list all my pages and I'm going to Add URL so these pages, so as you can see, privacy policy, I'm just going to open this one in a new tab. I'm going to copy this URL and I'm going to paste this URL to my page. Alright, I just finished adding all the pages and now I can click. Okay, and let's go back. And right here in this column I'm going to include some information to encourage our visitors to join my newsletter club. I usually like to call this one not just the simple and ordinary newsletter, but I usually like to call it as a club, as a special club where our visitors, where our subscribers can get special deals and offers. So I'm just going to select this one right here. I'm going to click Open Text Editor. I'm just going to replace this information here. Alright, so I just had in mind formation and now we have to Add a contact form. So the forum where our visitors, where our customers can subscribe to our newsletter. So if you haven't watched my previous lesson where I showed you how to do that with Astra Theme. We're gonna do this one more time. So let's go to our website and to create a newsletter form, we're going to use the same plugin as we use to create Contact Form. Alright, let's go to flu and forums. Let's click new form. But if you have already created a form from the previous section where I showed you how to do that with Astra Theme. You can easily use that form that we created previously. But if you haven't done this yet, you should create a new form. This is the form we could use. Let's select this form. Right here. We can do some changes. So let's change the button background. So I'm just going to use the same color right here as a use for my logo. Alright, so I replaced the color. Now, you should do the hover color. Right here. I'm just going to paste the color that I used for this button. I'm going to paste it right here, and I'm gonna do the same with this color right here. So I'm just going to paste it right here. And this is how it's going to look. Alright, I feel like it looks good. And now we can do some changes right here. I usually don't like to keep this star in here that this field is required. It's kinda obvious for our visitors if they want to subscribe to our newsletter, they have to enter their email address so we can select No, it's not required. It's just going to look a bit better. Alright, just a second. Let's go back to inputField. And alright, so this is sounds gonna look, we can give a title to this form, subscription form, Footer. Let's click Rename. Alright, we can close this one. We can copy this form right here. Let's go back and let's replace this form that was added by default, our form. Alright, so this is how it's going to look. Now we can click, Okay, and we can go back and we're done with our footer. But before we leave, let's disable this area right here. Let's delete it because we don't need it since we are using absolute further. Alright, so we can click right here and let's select Delete. Alright, I feel like it looks good. So now we can click Update. We can close this UX Builder, and now we should go to our site. And as you remember, Let's click Customize to work on our footer. Let's scroll until we see our footer. So this is the current version. Now, let's select Footer and let's choose Custom Footer blog. So right here, Let's choose the Footer that we created using UX Builder. Alright, let's scroll down and as you can see, this is how it's gonna look. Of course, this color will be different right now, just showing up just like that, but no worries about that. We're going to have our color that we set previously. Alright, so before we leave, we should do some changes to our absolute Footer and right here. So let's select this absolute Footer and let's work on the background color. We can change the text style right here, and we can select background color. Let's choose a light gray color, just like this one. And let's put it in a center and a few like it looks quite good. And now we can replace the text right here. So instead of using Flatsome Theme, Let's add the title of our website. Alright, this is how it looks and I think it looks great. Definitely looks better than the previous Footer. Recreate it using Astra Theme. Now we can click publish and we can close the sidebar of customization options. And let's see how alpha zero looks now. Alright, let's refresh this page for some reason. It didn't save the settings of Subscribe. We should make sure that we save those settings. Let's go back to Footer Builder and let's click Save Form One more time. Let's make sure that we save those settings and let's purge all cash just in case it didn't save. And now we can refresh this page. And as you can see, those changes were applied. Our customers can join our newsletter club. And for example, if I'm going to type my email address right here, Let's click subscribe. Alright, so it says, thank you for your message. We will get in touch with you shortly. That's not the message we want to show to our subscribers. So let's go back to our editor. And as you remember, this is where we created our forms. So this is the same form. Now we should go to the settings and Integrations and we should replace the text right here. So instead of showing this message, let's show them. Thank you for joining our club. Alright, let's click Save Settings. And now every time someone subscribes to our newsletter and they're going to see this message. And once someone subscribes to your form, to your newsletter form, you should go right here to check all the email addresses that subscribe to your form. Here. Sorry, it's for creating new form. You should go to all forms instead. And as you remember, this was the form we created. It says subscription for Footer. And here you will see all the entries. So here you will find all the email addresses. So if I'm going to click around here, this is the same email address I used to subscribe to this form. So once you're going to collect more email addresses, you can select them all. And you can click right here, Export. And you can export them and excel file and later you can use those all email addresses or Email Marketing. Alright, now we can close this one, and basically that's it. So I'm going to refresh this page one more time. This message will be gone. And basically this is at, this is how our footer looks now. And as you can see, it looks much better than the Footer we had when we were working with Astra Theme. So this is it for this lesson. 55. (6.8) Final Touches (Premium Method): Alright, so we're almost done with creating our website using a premium theme. And as you can see, it looks much better than the previous version. And of course, all the customization options up to you as you saw it yourself. This beam is much more customizable compared to a free option that you saw earlier. Alright, so in the Final Touches this lesson, we're going to cover some of the things that we skipped. So right here, if I'm going to click on, let's say costumes, category, or any category. As you can see, we don't have a sidebar right here. To add a sidebar to this area here, we have to go to our dashboard and we have to go to Appearance tab, and we have to select widgets. And this is the sidebar, sharp sidebar. So in this sharp side, but I usually like to include my Categories and the recently viewed products so our customers could see the recently viewed products. So for example, if I'm going to choose this one, recent, not the recent post. Just a second. We have to scroll down. Yeah, first of all, let's start with Product Categories. Let's choose this one and let's click Add to shop sidebar. Alright, so right here we have Product Categories. Alright, so now we should scroll down and we should look for recently viewed products. Let's scroll down, Let's scroll down. And yet this is the widget we want to use. So let's select this one. Let's click Add Widget. And this widget was added successfully. So we just finished adding all the widgets we needed. And now we can go back to our side and we're going to select, let's say costumes category. And as you can see, this is how it's going to be displayed. So I'm gonna check this product right here. And I'm going to go to educational toys. You can see we have recently viewed products, so it's displaying right here. So everything works. Alright, so the next thing that we have to work on is going to be in WooCommerce Settings. And I actually did this when I was showing you how to work with Astra Theme and The Last Duchess of this section. So let's make sure that we have those settings sector. So let's go to WooCommerce. Let's select Settings. Let's go to accounts and privacy, and let's make sure that you have activated allow customers to login into an existing account during the check-out. Allow customers to play soldiers without an account. Allow customers to create an account during the checkout and all those settings right here. You want to allow your customers to create the accounts. It's just a good practice. So make sure that you have those activated right here. If you have those activated now we can go to the last thing that we have to take care of. So let's go to the side and let scroll down. And as you can see, if I'm going to click About Us page, I'm just going to open this one in a new tab. This is how it looks. It doesn't look too good because it just using WordPress text editor. And if you are fine with this option right here, you can keep it just like that. But remember to create your about page. You can use UX Builder. So for example, I'm just going to keep this page open here. I'm gonna go back to the dashboard. I'm going to go to pages, all pages. If I want to create a new page as separate page for about page, I can simply delete this page and that's exactly what I'm gonna do. And I'm just going to create a completely new page. But I'm keeping this tab open because I want to have this information since I'm going to copy this information later. Alright, so let's go back. And also it's quite important to mention that if you're going to delete the page, you will find those pages and trash bin. So no worries about it. If you deleted the page, it doesn't mean it disappeared. But if you want them gone, you have to go to your trash bin, select all pages and select Delete Permanently. Alright? Okay, let's go back to All Pages and we can click Add New Page, and let's type about, and let's select Edit with UX Builder and let's create a new About page. But once again, before we do that at this one is completely up to you. If you want to do that, you can follow this lesson through or if you don't want to do that, you are fine with a simple looking about page. It's completely up to you. And if you want lag, the page I'm currently creating, you can create different types of page. So this one is once again up to you. Alright, let's click add elements, and let's go to Flatsome studio one more time. And as you can see and about tab, we have various different styles for our about page, you can use one pre-created layout. You can use 234 or five, as many as you need. But let's make it simple. And I believe I'm going to choose this one. So I'm going to select Import. I'm not going to import images because already have some images ready. Let's click start and write it here. I'm just going to add my text about us. So from here, I'm just going to copy this text. Here. I'm going to go back, I'm going to open this and a text editor, and I'm just going to paste this text just like that. I'm going to click Okay? And here there's a button. I'm not using any buttons. So if you see there's a button, you can simply click right here, delete. I can also delete this button as well because I'm not using it. So I'm just going to click Delete. And right here, I can add something about our store. So once again, I'm going to copy this one I'll go back and I'm just going to paste right here. And I can actually go to the new line and type our story. And I can choose the level for the heading. Heading to. I think it's going to look fine. And we can click, Okay, Let's go back. And here we can add images. So that's exactly what I'm going to do. I'm just going to add my image right here. Alright, so I just added first image and I'm going to show you how I did this so you wouldn't get lost. Alright, so I clicked right here plus icon. I selected image, and now I'm just going to select the media and let me choose the image. This is the image I want to use. Now. I'm going to use this one instead. I'm going to click use image. And as you can see, this is how it looks and I can change the size of this image if I'm going to move this one just like that, I can even move this image a bit up. And this is how it's going to Look. I feel like it looks good. And now I can click Publish, and now I can close UX Builder. And let's go to all of our pages. And this is our newly created about page. The reason why I deleted the previous page, I create a new one, so we would have the same URL. So here's why I did this. So I'm gonna go back to my website, I'm gonna go to my homepage. And since our URL didn't change, we have the same URL. I'm gonna click right here about us. We have a new looking page. So that's why I did this. That's why I deleted the previously graded about page so we could create the same page with the same URL. So we're basically done with this part. And the last thing that we have to do, we have to go to our cart page. And as you remember when we were Customizing our cart page, we had an option to do some changes, two numbers to the steps of our cart page. And right now we cannot see those because we have to change the layout of this page. So to do this, we have to click right here, Edit page and here in template. Let's choose WooCommerce cards. This is the template we want to use. Let's click Update. Now we can click view page and as you can see, we have a different looking page. It's a minimalistic page. It's totally focused on the cart page. That's the poplar layout nowadays and it just works. And if you don't like this layout, of course you can go to customization options. Click right here, card layout, and you can do it changes. But as you can see right now, we have our shopping cart right here. We have checkout step and we have order complete step. So this is how it looks. If you don't like this layout, like I said, you can go to customization options and you can do cut layout changes. As you remember, you had different views, simple, focused, and minimalistic. If I'm not mistaking anything. And if I would go to checkout page right here, as you can see, it's also missing the steps around here. We have to go right here, Edit page. And once again, let's choose the template. Let's select WooCommerce checkout. And let's click Update. Now, let's click view page. And this is how it looks. It's also totally focused page. This is how it looks and it's usually quite convenient for customers. So once again, if you don't like this layout, you can go right here. Checkout layout, just like you can do with cartilage layout. As you can see in checkout layout, we can choose default and this is how it would look if we will choose focused. It would look this way, just like our cart page. So it's up to you if you want to choose default one or the simple one. Let's go back to the simple one. Then let's click Publish. Well that's close the customization sidebar. We can close this page. We can go to our homepage and pretty much that's it. We're basically done with Customizing our website using Flatsome Theme. So that's all for this lesson. 56. Section 6 Summary: All right, fantastic on completing this section. As you saw it yourself, working with a flats on theme compared to Aster is a completely different thing. It has way more customization options. For example, once you started customizing your header, as you saw it yourself, how many options it had compared to Aster theme. Flats theme is highly customizable and I use it for a reason on all of my website. As I truly like this theme. It's highly customizable, it loads fast, it looks good, and what else could you ask from the theme. Most of all, it's just one time fee. You won't need to pay every year for this fm. Unlike a lot of themes, they do this where you have to pay every year for a fm, let's say about $80 or something like that. If you need to pay for the theme every month or every year, That means you don't have this theme. So once you purchase your flatsum them, it kind of belongs to you. So that's a great thing. And of course, Flaum has a huge community. So maybe in the future, you're going to have some questions related to flatsum them, you can join their group. But you can also join M Facebook group, and if you're going to have any questions, just let me know and I will help you right away. Congratulations on completing this section. Now you know how to customize your website using a premium them that is called flatsum. Great job so far. So let's keep building our website. 57. (7.0) Introduction to SEO: Alright, in this lesson, we're going to start talking about SEO. And if you're not familiar with SEO, it is Search Engine Optimization. Basically, you do everything you can to appear higher in Google search results. Alright, let's start by asking ourselves so very simple question, what is a search engine? Search engine can be google.com, bing.com, duckduckgo.com, and any other search engine. There are plenty of them nowadays, but the most popular one is obviously Google. And this is where we're going to focus the most. And when we're talking about search engine optimization, we usually add talking about optimizing our content. We would appear higher in Google search results and the actual, there's a good old saying in SEO world, if you want to hide a dead body, you should use the second page of Google search results because no one goes there. So your goal is to make sure that you do everything you can to appear in the first page of Google search results. The best-case scenario, it would be to appear in the top three results. And of course, if you can, the best option would be to appear in the first position of Google search results. So how do we optimize our website? So mainly we have two ways to optimize our website. We have on-page SEO and we have off-page SEO. Alright, let's talk about on-page SEO. So in short, on-page SEO means that you do everything you can in your hands, in your power to optimize your website. So this is where you can use all tactics, all tricks yourself on your website, not anywhere else, but on your website, on your website pages to optimize your content and how we do that. So we do keyword research. We optimize our content with keywords. We use interlinking and of course, good user experience is also important. So how we do this keyword research you might be wondering. So for this, we usually use tools to do keyword research for our content, for our products. And such tools could be Ubersuggest, SEMrush, H drafts, the last two, they are quite expensive and I usually like to do keyword research, but Ubersuggest, it's much cheaper version. And if you're going to use this tool, you're gonna get seven days free trial. So I highly recommend you to check out this tool. And if you are building a website for your native audience where your native language audience, Ubersuggest. It also has an option to choose various different countries and various different languages. So that's very convenient. And when we're doing a Keyword Research, we also check our competitors. So you probably already know your competitors. And if you know those competitors, you know their products, their blog, post, their content. And you can, for example, take their product page. If you're going to sell a similar looking product, you can take this product page and you can run it through your keyword research tool, Ubersuggest. This tool will let you know how much traffic this specific products specific page is getting for what keywords it's ranking and what keywords are bringing this product the most traffic. And maybe you're going to see some other keywords for this particular product isn't ranking high because it's not optimized for this particular keywords. And this is where you can take advantage of that. And you can take, let's say, this keyword. And you can use this keyword for your product. And you can try to optimize your product using this keyword because that's not the keyword your competitor is using. So this is where you can take advantage when you are analyzing your competitors. And of course, when you are analyzing your competitors, you're going to get some keyword suggestions. Alright, so now you know how that works, what we use, but you might be wondering what is a Keyword. So basically keyword is just the phrase or phrases people use to look for information, for news articles, for blog posts, for products, for images or anything like that in Google. Let's say in my case, I have a Keyword were then train time. And I did my Keyword Research and I found out that people are searching for this keyword. This keyword is getting quite a lot of monthly searches. And that means people are interested in this product. They are looking for it. And this is a popular keyword. Then I'm working with products. I cannot just come up with random names for products because it doesn't necessarily mean that people are looking for these products in these specific words. So that's exactly what keywords are. We're to suggest the phrases people type in Google search to look for information for products or anything else. So like I said, we look for popular keywords that people actually use to find information, to find products. But when we have a fresh website, our goal is to find not so competitive keywords. So basically that means not a lot of websites or optimizing their content, their products, using those keywords because they are less popular. But there's still quite popular because people still use to look for information. And that's why we aim at those keywords that are less competitive. That means that are less websites that are optimizing their content using those keywords And just because it's less competitive, we have higher chances to appear in higher position of Google search results. When we're gonna do keyword research, you're going to see it yourself. I'm gonna do this in later lesson. But right now, my goal is to give you a better understanding what our keywords, how they work. And basically you would have a solid foundation of SEO. Alright, let's talk about short tail keywords. Keywords are usually in two types. There are short tail keywords and there are long tail keywords, usually short tail keywords are up to three words and usually they are very competitive. They are more difficult to rank. I'm gonna give you an example. Let's say I'm writing a blog post about Bengal cats. It's just the two wars, but this keyword is very popular around 200,000 people from us. Look for this keyword, look for this information. And obviously it's going to be difficult to rank for this keyword. So you have to take this in consideration when you are publishing blog post venue adding products or anything like that. So for example, when you adding a product, you could name your product Wooden Train. In this case, it's a short keyword, but it's gonna be way more competitive because it's a short tail keyword and more people look for this type of keyword. If you would use wooden train twice, it's going to be a bit less competitive of course, but it's going to have less monthly searches. If you're gonna use a longer keyword, that's gonna be a long-tail keyword, and in this case could be wooden train toy set. So now we have four words in this keyword, and that's a long-tail keyword, of course, is going to be less competitive because less people are looking for this type of product and it's gonna be a bit easier to rank. And the first page of Google Search, just because there are less websites that are targeting this keyword and there are less people who are looking for this keyword. And kinda already talked about long tail keywords. The long tail keywords usually have more than three awards. They are less competitive, they're easier to rank. And I'm just gonna give you a good example. When I'm working with one of my projects that is focused on cats, found out at quite easy to rank keywords and they are long tail keywords. So here's one example. Can cats eat oranges? It's along keyword. It has a lot of words, but it has quite a lot of monthly searches, but not a lot of websites. They use this keyword to rank for because it's not so popular, but that's something people want to know. And that's why this is a good keyword. When you're going to be doing keyword research, pay attention how competitive it is. Many monthly searches it gets. And maybe you're going to find some other variations for this keyword that's gonna be less competitive, but maybe it's going to have almost the same amount of monthly searches. So that's why it is important. And we're going to dive into this a bit deeper when we're going to do the keyword research. Alright, let's move on. So before we talk how we optimize our content, our products, there are some phrases you should know what means syrup or Serbs. It simply means search engine results page or search engine results pages. So basically it means Google search result page. So basically that's what it means. Meta title. Meta title means that's the title of your product or your blog posts or your website that you see in Google search, Serbs and Google search results. So when you type a keyword in Google search, you get a lot of results, a lot of websites. And those websites they have their meta title. That's just the title. And underneath this meta title, we have meta description. That's what is meta title and Meta description image title. So that's kinda self-explanatory. When you add images to your products, your blog posts, you add titles. And when you add those images, you're going to also had an opportunity to add alt next to these images. And you how to use those two fields, image title and all texts to add your keywords. And once you're gonna do this in practice, you will see how it works. And now we can move on to the next slide. How we optimize our content, our blog posts, our products and categories with keywords. So first of all, once we find our main keyword that we want to use, we include this main keyword in meta title. Once we do it, this will include this keyword in our meta-description. When we're going to install an SEO plugin, you will see it yourself that you will be able to add those meta title and meta description and you'll see how it works. But when you are adding meta description to your CO2 and I will show how that works. It doesn't necessarily mean that Google pickup on this meta title description that you added to your SEO tool. That's why when you are writing descriptions for your products or when you are adding blog post, the best-case scenario is to include your main keyword, the focus keyword that you just did research on. The first sentence of your product description Because that's how Google gonna pick up on your description. And once someone is going to look for a specific product that you optimize with that phrase, but that keyword for which people are searching, then Google will show this keyword in meta description. Just remember, when you are writing your product descriptions, don't forget to include your focus keyword, your main keyword in the first sentence of your product description, that's the most important thing when you're writing descriptions for your products and when you are writing your blog posts, you should include your focus keyword, your main keyword in the best-case scenario in the first two sentences. So in the first or the second sentence, just depends how it's going to work for you. Of course, we include our main keyword in the texts of our contents, of our blog post or file products. So when we're writing descriptions for our products, we usually include the main keyword two or three times in the description and the recommended amount of words when you're writing your description is 200 words. So if you wrote description of 200 words, maybe you will want to include your main keyword two times in your product description. So the first time, and you're going to include your main keyword in the description is going to be the first sentence that's gonna be automatically included in your meta description. So it's gonna be onetime. And the second time tried to include somewhere in the middle of description. Or if you're writing a longer descriptions, maybe you're going to want to include this keyword three times, but don't over stuff your descriptions with too many keywords. You don't want to make your description sound like a nonsense. You want to make it sound naturally. When you're writing your blog posts, you want to include your main keyword in your blog post, free five times or even more. It depends on how many words you are writing. Let's say you are writing a blog post of 600 words. So six times to include your main keyword in the text is completely fine. Your keyword density should be around 1%. And the SEO tools, they usually help you to deal with that when you are writing blog posts, Let's say you're going to have an opportunity to add your focus keyword and the blog post in the SEO tool. And this tool will calculate how many times you have included this keyword. And it's gonna give you a green checkmark or the yellow or the red mark saying that you should include your main keyword a bit more. It doesn't necessarily mean that is going to be a huge problem if you're not going to include your keyword enough times, you just have to remember that you have to include your main keyword. At least a couple of times when you're writing your product description and when you are writing blog posts, your main keyword should be around 1% of word density. And also when we optimizing our content with keywords, we include our main keyword in the title of images, and they all texts. So let's say I have a product within train time. When I'm adding this product in the featured image of this product, I'm going to include the main keyword in the title of my image. And of course I'm going to include and the alt texts of this image. It's very important because when you add in products, it doesn't necessarily mean that people are going to use just Google Search to look for products. Maybe they're going to use image search as well. If you're going to include your main keyword in your images, you're going to have a higher chance to rank higher, not just in search results, but in images as well. So that's very important. When you adding some more images, you can include other variations of this keyword. Of course, you can include the same keyword as well and the alt texts of other images. But I usually like to include other variations and it just gives him a more opportunities to show up in images. So for example, I could include and some other images wouldn't train toy set within train or something like that. And of course, when you adding blog posts, you're going to include some images. And those images, you can include your main keyword if it's for you difficult to include your main keyword in the text five times. You can include your main keyword and the alt texts of these images that you add to your blog posts that just an old trick. And SEO world where you can include your main keyword and all texts of images that you add to your blog posts, any images, not just the featured image that you're going to add for your blog posts, but all other images as well. And you can also include other variations of this keyword. And when I'm going to show you how to add blog posts, you will see it yourself, how you can add images and how you can add alt text to these images as well. Let's move on how we use interlinking. So what is interlinking? When we are working with products, we don't really need to focus on that much because interlinking, it's already done for us, especially if you have a good theme like Flatsome. It also works with Astra Theme. And if you would go to your product page, this is the same example as you can see. This product has various other links in that product. It has the category link right here. So this product is already interlinked with our category wooden toys It also has some tags that are also linked together with this product page. And it also has some related products. So basically in this product page, we're going to have some other products added. So those are the products that are displayed right here as related products, we have our category that's very important. And basically with products pretty much that's it. We don't need to focus on debt. So basically interlinking means that from your product page or any other page from real blog posts or anything else. You are linking to other pages of your website. You are using links to link to other pages of your website. So I'm going to show you an example of how it would look in blog posts. Alright, so this is one of my websites and I have a blog post about the friendliest cat breeds. You have probably seen something similar. And other websites and news websites, they tend to do this quite a lot. And if I would scroll down, as you can see, we have a paragraph about persian cats. So right here I have a link that is highlighted and it says Persian cats. If I would click on this link, I would go to another blog post that is on my website. So as you can see, it's persian cats. So this is persian cats, the keyword I'm trying to rank for. If I would go back. As you can see, I use the same keyword right here to link to my blog post. If I would scroll down, I have Maine ****. Maine **** is another interlink that I'm linking to other page. So I'm going to click on this interlink and I go to Maine ****, as you can see, and I go to a Maine **** blog post. So that's how it looks, that's how it works. You have probably seen this on other websites as well. So I'm just going to go back to our slides. And that's how interlinking works. When we are talking about interlinking, we have to talk about anchor text and we're going to talk about anchor text and back links as well. So anchor text is basically the text I used to interlink my links. So it's decide yourself. I had a paragraph about persian cats and I had texts highlighted Persian cats. That was a link. So this text, Persian cats that was clickable was anchor text. It's very important when you are linking various blog posts. And when you are adding anchor text, you want your anchor text to be your focus keyword. So as you saw it yourself, my focus keyword and the Persian cats blog post was persian cats. So that's the same text, anchor text I use to interlink from the friendliest cat breeds to persian cats Blog Posts. That's how interlinking works. You just simply linking other blog posts, pages from your other boast or your other page. Alright, let's move on. And when we are talking about good user experience, so good user experience means that you have a fast loading website. But here we're not going to focus on data at all. Because in this course I showed you how to create a website with a good user experience. So the radius, so your absolute is gonna be fast. Loading is going to be of course, responsive. It's going to work well on all devices. Flatsome Theme going to work a bit better compared to Astra Theme. Of course, your website is gonna be professional-looking. That's of course very important as well. Because if you're going to have not professional looking website, there's a huge chance that if a person going to find your website, he's going to open your website and it's going to look awful. He's going to leave your website and that means you have a bounce rate. So if you're going to have a lot of people just clicking on your website and leaving right away. That's a high bounce rate. Google doesn't like that. And you can expect to rank lower. And Google search results if you have a high bounce rate. And usually high bounce rate happens because your website isn't optimized well, it's not well-structured, is not professional-looking. It's difficult to find information. And that's what gives you high bounce rate. So you want to avoid that by offering good user experience. Alright, so let's summarize the phrases that you have to remember. On-page SEO. On-page SEO is when we do everything that is in our hands that we can take care of to optimize our website. So this is what we can do on our website, on our pages. Keywords, keywords are basically the phrases people use to look for information and Google, like I told you before, there are short tail keywords. So let's say Maine ****, cat is a short tail keyword. And we have a long tail keywords like can cats eat apples or something like that. That's a long tail keyword, keyword optimization. So this is where we take this keyword that we did research on and we use to optimize our products. We use to optimize our blog post categories or anything like that, keyword density. So keyword density means how many times you included your main keyword, your key phrase in the text of your page, of your blog posts of your product, of category or anything else like that. Meta title. Meta title is the title that you see in Google search results For our website, so that's meta title. This is where you want to include your keyword as well. Meta-description. This is the description you see in Google search results for certain results. So we have meta title and meta description. So this is where you want to include your keywords. All texts. Alt text is alternative texts that you add two images. Usually this text is used when images failed to load, but it happens very rarely. And in SEO world, people just take advantage of that to include keywords to alt texts of images, syrup, or serves search engine results pages. And this is where you're going to see all the results that Google shows you. Interlinking. Interlinking to link from one page of your website to another page of your website. So from one blog post, you bring people to another blog post, maybe from one blog post to product category, maybe to Products and so on. Anchor text. So anchor text is the text you use to add a link to in a blog post. Alright, let's move on. So we're going to talk about off-page SEO previously, we talked on on-page SEO. That was everything in our hands we that we can do to optimize our website to rank higher in Google search results. When we're talking about off-page SEO, this is that something is not in our hands. This is when we trust other websites. So this is where we get juices from other websites instead of our website, this is where we rely on other websites to link to our website. So in this section we're going to talk about backlinks. Backlink. So basically when other websites, let's say from there blog post the link to our website using anchor text. Now probably seen this in other websites when you are reading news or something like that, you click on the link and the decks and you go to other website. That's a backlink. We have do follow back links. We have nofollow links, do follow back links are very powerful. Nofollow backlinks are not so powerful. And once again, because those things are not in your power, you cannot select if you want to have do follow back links, no fall back links. But of course, if you are working with other websites, you can actually select. But when you are adding your links to other websites, let's say to Pinterest, you can add your websites link and the Pinterest profile, it's gonna be no fall back link because it's just not in your power to select if you want to have do follow back link or no fall back wing. We're going to talk about guest posts. So what are those things? You're going to talk about? Niche edits, how they work, and pretty much it's all about backlinks. Alright, let's move on. So let's talk about backlinks. Backlink is when a website links to your website. So let's say when you are reading a blog post, you see there's a link, you click on that link and you go to our website. In this case, it could be your website. Here's an example. Here I am back to one of my websites and as you can see, if I was scroll down, I have some links right here. So this is the link. And if I would click on this link, as you can see, I'll go to a completely other website. So this is a completely other websites. And just like that, this website got a backlink from my website. If I'm going to click right here, as you can see, our go-to mob absolutes. So this is inner link. It's not a backlink. So you saw the difference. One was backlink, one was the inner link. Alright, let's go back and once again anchor text. It's just the text that is highlighted and that is clickable. It's basically the link son. The previous example I showed you with a Persian cat that was anchor tags. When you try to get a backlink from other website, you should focus to add your link to an anchor tags were the same keyword that you are focusing on to rank. For example, I'm trying to get a backlink to our blog posts to persian cats. In this case, I want to find a blog. I want to contact a blog. I want to ask for a guest post and maybe they a sub guess beause, I'm going to write them a guest post. And my anchor tags gonna be persian cats because that's my focus keyword. So that's basically what anchor text is. It's the same as you are interlinking your pages, your blog posts, your products. But this time you're doing on someone else's website profiling. So usually this is where you can get yourself some free backlinks to your websites. So for example, if you're going to create a Pinterest profile, you can add your website to this Pinterest profile and this is gonna be now follow backlink. Usually those are nofollow, they give you some juice, they give you some variety of backlinks, but these are not as powerful as do follow back links. There are plenty of various profile websites where you can create profiles and where you can add your websites. And just like that, you can build some backlinks. If you would look up on Google profile links or something like that, there are plenty of various lists that you can use and you can try to add your website, your homepage. And this way you can try to get some free backlinks. Usually backlinks have built using guess. Both are niche edits Those are due follow and usually those things cost money. They can cause from couple of dollars to thousands of dollars. It depends a lot on the type of website you are publishing, your guests posts, and you probably have seen something on the news websites, Let's say when a news website is talking about some type of startup and there's a huge portion of tax talking about the startup, how amazing it is. And suddenly you see there's a link with a title of this startup. It's a clickable link and you go to that website, that means it's a backlink. Usually those things that paid, usually if you want to get back link using guests bows, you should contact website administrators who are running those websites. And you can ask if they accept guest both. You can ask if those guest posts are paid. And this way you can write a guest post on the website. And this way you can include a link in this guest posts that brings the visitors to your website. That's how the guest posts, work. Initiatives, initiatives are when, let's say you find a blog and you contact the administrator because you found some interesting article. And in this article you found that, Let's say this article is talking about the Montessori teaching and my cases Assad yourself. I'm building a Toys online store. So I have category Montessori toys. Let's say maybe you found a blog where this blog has blog post about Montessori teachings. And there's a paragraph that is talking about Montessori toys. You found in that text a phrase that you can use as an anchor text Montessori toys. And then you contact the administrator of this blog post and you ask, do you do initiatives? I would love to include my Montessori toys category in your blog post as an anchor text Montessori toys and that specific blog post. Usually those things cost money. It can cause from $5 to hundreds of dollars. So depends a lot on the websites you are reaching out to them. So that's how guess Posts work niche at its work. And this is how you build backlinks. And that's why it's called off-page SEO because those things are not completely in your power and you have to rely on other websites, you have to contact them, you have to ask if they accept guest bows. And in this case, if they accept guest posts for free, you will need to write a blog post for free and publish on their website and include a backlink. They're gonna get a free blog post. You're gonna get a free backlink. So that's how it works. If you're going to contact a bigger website, let's say a news website or something like that. Usually they list the pricing's in their partnerships page and you will see it yourself that those can cause from $10.50, hundreds, thousands of dollars. So that's how backlinks work. You have to rely on other websites. And remember if something's not clear for you, do not stress yourself too much. You can always join my group. You can ask questions and I'll help you out with any questions with any issues. I can explain everything better. I can even help you with building backlinks. So do not hesitate to join my group. Alright, so let's talk some of the other important phrases we already talked about back links. And I told you that the price depends on quite a lot of factors. Usually depends on domain of, for it to be its domain authority. You can have low or high domain authority. Usually it's up to 100. And usually various tools like Ubersuggest, SEMrush, H traps. They have different types of calculating your domain authority, but usually domain of force is calculated by how many backlinks you have, how many strong backlinks you have from hi authority websites, Let's say maybe you have two backlinks from bbc.com. So that's a high afford to website. Those higher for it to websites, they usually have a lot of traffic. They have a lot of backlinks. And if those websites are linking back to your website, this is how you can grow your own domain authority. So that's how it works, pays for it badger for it is also important. Let's say you could have high domain authority, but you could have a lower page of words. You could have a lot of back links linking to your website itself, but you can have not so many backlinks linking to your specific page, to your specific product, to your specific blog post, and so on. So let's say if you have a lower domain authority, but you have high page of 40, you have a lot of backlinks to your specific page, to your specific product page, to your specific blog post page. Then you might have a high page, you 40, and then you will have a bit higher chances to rank higher in Google. Search results. Higher domain affords the also is a factor of N ranking in Google search results because it just means that you are trustworthy website and Google trust. So that's how domain of for it and page of work works. You are basically using other websites to build your domain of worth it, to build your page of work by getting backlinks from those websites that just how it works. Alright, so what determines your rankings? So proper keyword research is very important. So this is the first thing when you do keyword research, when you are fresh website, of course you're going to have low domain, afford it. Because you don't have any websites linking back to your website. You're going to have low domain of 40. That's why you want to aim to a less competitive keywords. Maybe those keyword is not going to have a lot of monthly searches, but they're going to be easier to rank in Google searches. So this is important, proper keyword research. Of course, you have to optimize your content well. So if you're working with products, you want to include your main keyword in meta title, meta-description, and the description of your product itself, and the titles of images and all texts of images. And this is how you do a good optimization of your product when you're writing your blog posts, you also want to include your main keyword and meta title is method descriptions and the text of your blog posts, you want to include some other variations of this keyword. And of course you want to include your keyword and all texts of images as well. So that's gonna be on page Seo. And another important factor is gonna be backlinks. How many websites you have linking to your website, to your specific product, to your specific blog post. And that's also very important. And you're going to have high for it. Websites link into your pages. You're going to have your higher domain afford backlinks. How many backlinks are linking to your website determines your domain authority as long. So domain of 40 is kinda together connected with backlinks. So that's how it works. And just don't over complicate yourself. But all those things, you just have to remember that your first goal is to do a good keyword research. Find the less competitive keyword, and you have to optimize your content. And in later stages I'm going to show you how that's done. And once you get used to optimizing your content and you're a later stage could be building backlinks. But if you're going to need any help, once again, don't hesitate to join my Facebook group. I'm here to help you. And basically pretty much that's it. That's all for SEO. That was an introduction into a Seo. And now you should have a good foundation, a better understanding what is SEO? 58. (7.1) Let's Install the SEO Plugin: Alright, since you are a bit more familiar, what is SEO and how it works, now we can install and SEO plugin. So let's go to our dashboard. Let's go to Plugins. Let's click Add New, and let's use Search type SCO. And as you can see, there's plenty of SEO plugins. But to be honest, they usually do one thing. And that thing is they add meta description and meta title, and it's good enough and they also offer some suggestions. They also give you some tips when you are optimizing your products, let's say Categories or anything like that. And in later lesson, of course, you're going to dive deeper into keyword research, but for now, everything should be good. So let's select this Plugin Rank Math SEO. This is the Plugin Alliance to use and I use it on all of my websites. Let's click activate. Alright, so in my case, I just activated this plugin and nothing happened. But in your case, maybe it showed you a setup wizard and no worries about it. You can close that setup wizard. It just walks you through the whole Settings and so on. But in this lesson I'm going to show you what dose SEO plugin Sandman four. Alright, so if I would go right here, this is my Rank Math SEO. If I won't go to the dashboard, as you can see, we have various tools and some of those tools are only active for premium version of this plugin. But trust me, you don't really need to get premium version. Premium version just add X2, more Analytics details and so on. But even with the free version, you will be totally fine. Alright, so if I would go to Setup Wizard, probably going to have the same setup wizard as you had when you were installing your plugin. So like I said, you can close it, but if you didn't close it, you can still follow through this setup wizard. And if you close that wizard, just go to those steps I showed you select Setup Wizard. And now as you can see, we have options to choose. We can choose Advanced. Let's click Start wizard. And since previously installed some Plugins, aid's giving me an option to import data, but I haven't added any data to those plugin. So I can click right here, skip, don't import. Now, you can do that as well. And here, just choose some details about your website, your type of website, and it's gonna be a small business side, business type organization, educational eCommerce and so on. So just choose all those right here. You can also add your logo. You can add social share image. But it doesn't necessarily mean that Google going to show those things and Google search results, because those Plugins, they just add this information and it's for Google to decide if they want to show this information or not. So Google sometimes can be quite picky. Alright, let's click, Save and Continue. You can create and connect your Rank Math account. It's quite useful if you have a premium version. It allows you to do some more advanced things. But if you don't have an account, you can click right here. Skip step. If you want, you can create an account. And if you're going to create an account and you're going to add this account to your website. It's not going to change anything in the flow of this lesson so we can click, skip step. Alright, so here we have Sitemaps. Sitemaps will be used for Google. We're going to add our sitemap to Google Search Console, but we're gonna do this in later lesson. And as it is right now, we can keep it just like that. And we can click Save and Continue. Alright, we can click save and continue. Man, we can quick return to Dashboard. So we are done with Installing our SEO plugin. It's ready. As you can see, it has a lot of different tools. You can explore everything yourself. In later lessons, we're going to dive a bit deeper in those options right here. We're going to use some of those options, but of course not all of them. This is just what this SEO plugin has to offer. And you have to keep in mind that there's plenty of SEO plugins and they compete with each other. And they tried to offer as much options as they can. And it doesn't necessarily mean that those options are very useful, that just how it works. Alright, so now we have our Plugin ready, it's in place. We don't need to add anything else. And now we should go to our pages. Let's start with our pages. As you can see now it has these columns as you details, title, description, and so on. So usually when you are working with eCommerce store, maybe some of the most important pages that you want to show to Google and you want to take care of is about page and your Homepage. All other pages are not necessarily to take care of because they are just the pages for customers and you're not going to rank those pages in Google search. But if I'm going to click right here on about page and I'm going to select Edit, not Edit with UX Builder, but just added, as you can see here, we have some more options. If I'm going to click right here, this is where I can access the options of our SEO plugin. So right here it's showing us our meta title and meta description. So here we can click edit snippet and you can add the title. So this is how it works. Just add the title if you want to add a bit longer title, if you want to add a description, you can do this as well. And like I said, if you want to take care of everything precisely, the pages where you could focus our about page and Homepage, all other pages are not necessarily to focus on because most likely they are not going to rank in Google. But what's important to you if you are running a new commerce store for you, the most important thing is products So instead of doing changes right here, Let's go back to All Pages, and now we can go to Products, and let's select all products. Let's scroll down. And let's say we want to work on our wooden train set twice. So let's click Edit. Alright, so now we are editing our product. And as you can see right here, we have our SEO plugin in place. It's showing us our Optimization score. It is eight out of 100, but no worries about that. It doesn't really mean that much. It just giving you some suggestions, some tips, and how they see things. And here you will have to enter your focus keyword. But about that, we're going to talk in the later lesson where I'm going to show you how to do keyword research, but you are familiar what is a Keyword? So we're going to talk about that a little bit in this lesson as well. Alright, so let's scroll down until we see our SEO plugin. This is the section for our SEO plugin. And as you can see right here, we have our meta title and meta description. When you're writing a meta title and meta description, you want to include your main keyword and both of them, Let's say in this case my main keyword is Wooden Train. I want to include this keyword in a title that's already in a title. And I want to include this keyword and meta description as well. If I don't have this keyword in the first sentence of MOD description of my product description. I'm going to go back right here. As you can see my product description in the first sentence, it has the keyword Wooden Train. So other than trill, need to change anything in a meta description because it's already and math first sentence of my description. When you are writing descriptions, just keep in mind that the best-case scenario is for you to include your main keyword in the description in the first sentence of your description. Because no matter what, if I'm going to include this keyword and mom meta description right here using this Settings right here, if I'm going to add a different looking description from my main description of the product itself. And let's say my product description that I showed you previously, it doesn't have the main keyword, but my meta description right here, it would have, you see, it doesn't really work this way because Google is speaking and it doesn't matter if you're going to add meta description right here, and you're going to include your main keyword. There's a huge chance that Google will decide not to use that method description that you just entered right here, which are keyword energy is going to pick your description instead of taking this description that you're going to write. So instead of that, Google will take this main description and it's just going to display in meta description in Google search results. I don't know, that's making much sense. But your goal is when you're writing descriptions for your products, you have to include your main keyword in the first sentence of your product description. So that's your goal and it just makes everything easier because you want need to write a separate description for mater right here. And it doesn't even mean that Google will pick on this description that you're going to type. So since this product has a well-written description, I don't really need to change anything. Maybe if you want, you can change the meta title. But right here, I can type my focus keyword. So my focus keyword is Wooden Train. I'm going to click Enter, and this is what we get. So instead of getting just a couple of points out of 100, and now we got 68 of 100. So as you can see, the only downside is that our content is too short. When you are writing product descriptions are always recommend to write 200 words and just include your main keyword two or three times. Not just one, but two or three times, up to three times, not more than if you're going to include your main keyword too many times it's not going to help it just actually going to harm your rankings. So this is what SEO plugins do. They give you an option to select a different type of meta title of meta description and you can enter your focus keyword. It just gives you suggestions how you could optimize your description better. As you can see, if I'm going to scroll down, it's actually saying that you should use 600 words, but it's not true because we don't have premium version and with the free version and it's not recognizing that we are writing description for a product, not for a blog post. So for a product it's 200 words and it just works fine. So that's what SEO plugins are four, just make sure that you install this plugin. And when you're writing descriptions for products, make sure that you include your main keyword in the first sentence and later we're going to use this plug-in a bit more to submit our sitemap to Google Search Console and you will see how that works. But for now, this is outlooks and just make sure that you install your SEO plugin. So that's all for this lesson. 59. (7.2) Setting Up Google Search Console: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to set up your Google Search Console. It's very useful tool is of course, tool made by Google. And it's helpful for SEO. It allows you to check how well your keywords are ranking, what keywords are bringing you the most traffic. And basically it's essential tool for SEO. So first of all, you will need to create your account at Google Search Console. So just go to Google and search for Google Search Console. This is what you want to look for and the first result is what you need. So let's select this one. Let's click Start now. And here you will have to type your domain name. So in my case, it's going to be based on our ketose.com. Let's click Continue. And now we're going to need to do some DNS changes for our domain name. So as you remember, my domain name was registered at GoDaddy. So it doesn't really matter where you have registered your domain name, you just going to need to add one line. So right here you'll find instructions. We can select any DNS provider. And as you can see here, we're going to need to create a new texts record. So we can copy this text record right here. And now I'm gonna go to my GoDaddy account. I'm gonna go right here and I'm going to select my products. So I'm going to scroll down until I see my domain name. And right here I'm going to select DNS. And let's click add new record. Let's select type is gonna be taxed and name. Let's type ETA and let's paste the value we previously copied. Time to load. We can select Custom and let's add 600 s. Let's hit Save. Alright, so we successful graded and new texts the record now we can close our GoDaddy Account. And right here, just wait a couple of minutes. It shouldn't take long up to 5 min. And once you have waited 5 min, you can click verify, alright, after you have weighed at some time now we can click verify. Alright, so the ownership was verified successfully. Now we can click Go To property and if you want, you can take the tutorial to see how everything looks. I usually don't do that, but I'm going to walk you through everything anyway. So once you are going to start getting more data, this is where you will see your information, the information about the performance of your website, how well it's doing in Google search. So right here you will see the performance. You will see what pages are indexed and various other tools like experience of your website and enhancements if you're going to have any, and if I would click right here, performance, this is where you're going to see everything more in detail. We can select pages, we can select the keywords, countries, devices. We can check how well our pages are performing according to devices, countries, Search, appearances, dates, and so on. Later I'm going to login to one of my websites and I'm going to show you how it looks. More information with more details. Here you can inspect URLs to see if there are index. So if you would click right here, you can paste any URL you have and you can check if it is indexed or not. And index URL basically means that it is in Google's database and it can be found in Google search. So basically, what it means here you will find various other tools and don't be afraid to explore everything yourself. And this way you will learn how to use this tool a bit better, but right now, you ain't going to have any information. You would go to links. Here, you will see backlinks if you're going to have any. And like I said, this tool is very convenient to understand how well your website is performing in Google search. So you can explore all other tools like Page experience. So here you will see information about your page experience, how well it is if it's good on mobile devices and so on, you will see Corvette vitals, how well your website is performing according to Google's, who are Web white those, so Google has its own measurements to let you know if your website is fast loading, if it's slowed good enough. But if you're going to have even not so good core Web vitals, don't stress yourself too much with that. It's not the main ranking factor anyway, so you can explore debt. But before I go and show you how it looks, how it looks in one of my websites. There's one other very important thing that we have to do. We have to submit our sitemap. We have to go right here Sitemaps. And we have to add a sitemap of our website, basically of all our URLs that we have on our website. To find our sitemap, we're going to use our SEO tool that we installed previously. So let's go to our website. Let's go to the dashboard. Let's go to the SEO tool that we previously installed, the Rank Math. Let's select sitemap This is our sitemap. We can open this sitemap and basically it's just a very simple sitemap. It's kinda self-explanatory. It's the map of all your URLs on your website. So here you have product sitemap. If I'm going to click on products, as you can see, these are all products I have on my website. I'm just going to go back and I want to copy this URL right here. I want to go back to my Google Search Console, and I will paste this URL right here. Alright, let's click Submit. Alright, so we successfully submitted our sitemap and now Google will start gathering information about our websites. So if I would go to Overview, once our website starts to get some impressions, some clicks, this is where we're going to see all information. So I'm just going to open one of my websites to show you how it looks. Alright, so this is my profile on Google Search Console of one of my websites. And as you can see, this is the performance. So we can see how many clicks we get, how many clicks you get from search results, from Google discover, and so on. If I would scroll down, this is how many URLs Google has indexed on my website. As you can see, I have added some videos, so these are the stats of the index, the video pages and experience as you can see, and some of the websites, my experience is quite poor, but no worries about that. It doesn't affect rankings that much and you shouldn't focus on that too much. But since your apps, it is going to be fresh, is gonna be new, your page experience should be good anyway. So if I'm going to scroll down and how some more tools like shopping information, some of them are products are listed on shopping ads. And if I'm going to scroll down, I have some enhancements, FAQ review snippets, and so on. So this is where you can see all the information. If I'm gonna go to performance right here, I can click search results. So as you can see, I can see how many clicks and how many impressions or God, the last three months. And I can check what's my click-through rate, what's my average position? And if I'm going to activate click-through rate, this is how it looks. And right here, this is the keywords. Here I can check what keywords are bringing me the most traffic. So this keyword right here, as you can see, is bringing me the most traffic. It's getting quite a lot of impressions. Click-through rate is quite low, but the position is quite high. So as you can see, I can see the position how well it's ranking in Google search, even for those keywords are very competitive. And I'm ranking quiet good. So if I would click right here pages I can see, well, I'm performing based on pages, so this is the page that is performing the best. I can even select this page. And as you can see, I can get the stats of this specific page. So this is how it works. You can explore everything yourself and of course, I highly recommend you to explore everything yourself. Once you start getting more data, those are up various filters. So I can close this filter that are selected previously to show me how well my pages performing. And as you can see this as outlooks, I can check what countries are bringing me the most traffic, what the wisest, most used, and so on. This one is up to you. And in discover. As you can see, I can check how many clicks I guess from Google discover. And usually Google discover shows up when you're writing blog posts, you write quite a lot of blog posts and Google features some of your contents. Sometimes it just gets featured, sometimes it just doesn't get featured. But if you upload content daily, you will get featured on Google discover. So that's just how it works. And pages indexing, as you can see, I can check how many pages are indexed and how many pages are not indexed and so on. So this is the virus information I can check. I can even check my back links if I'm going to scroll down, if I would click links, as you can see, I can check how many websites are linking back to my website, how many backlinks I have, what other websites are linking my pages and so on. So this tool is very convenient to have. It's very helpful when you want to understand what works and what doesn't work, what keywords are bringing you the most traffic? Maybe you can write some other content based on those keywords and you can get some traffic from those blog posts or products and so on. Majority of the traffic that I'm getting to this online store is from blog posts. But I'm getting from products do so that's just how it looks. So once you start getting traffic impressions, this is how everything is going to look and baseline until you don't have any data, you won't be able to explore anything. But once Google stars gathering data from your website, you will see everything right here. So that's just how it works. And once again, if you're going to need any help with all those tools or anything like that with SEO, do not hesitate to join my Facebook group. Alright, now we can close our Google Search Console. We can close our sitemap. And basically we can go to our website. And pretty much that's it for this lesson. Now we know how to set up your Google Search Console profile 60. (7.3) Setting Up Google Analytics 4: Alright, in this lesson we're going to set up Google Analytics and we're going to set up Google Tag Manager. The reason why we are using Google Analytics is because we want to understand our traffic that is coming to our websites. Using Google Analytics, we will be able to check how many visitors we are getting, where those visitors are coming from. If those visitors are coming from the search engines like Google, Bing, or any other, if they are coming from social media profiles like Pinterest, Facebook or any other. Are those visitors sat, direct visitors who type your website into their browser and they access your website. And besides that, you will be able to see the purchases, the sales where they are coming from. So you will see if sales are coming from organic sources, social media sources, or any other sources. So having Google Analytics is extremely important, especially if you want to run successful online store. And the reason why we're going to set up Google Tag Manager is because with Google Tag Manager, we will be able to connect our Google Analytics. And Google Tag Manager is a tool that you install on your website. And basically, your website in a way goes through Google Tag Manager and it captures various details like Add to cart, purchases, page views and so on. The Google Tag Manager sends this information to Google Analytics. Then once you login to your Google Analytics account, you can see all information and well structured way. And besides that, Google Tag Manager is very convenient to have, especially if in the future you will decide that you want to run Facebook ads, Pinterest ads, read it ads, or even Google ads or anything like that. Because using Google Tag Manager, you will be able to install various pixels, let's say Facebook pixel. Facebook pixel helps you to track conversions, to track Add to Cart page views. And by using these details, Facebook optimize your ads. So this is very important to have. So that's why in this lesson we're going to set up our Google Analytics and we're going to set up Google Tag Manager. So the first things first, let's go to Google and just type Google Analytics. Alright, right here we can select Google Analytics four because it's a new version. And right here, you want to select this option. So let's select this option. Now, let's click start measuring. Right here you can add your account name. So just give the name of your website. So I'm just going to tie back on our ketose. Let's scroll down and let's click Next. Once again, type your proper name. So your proper name once again, is going to be the name of your website. So in this case, I'm just going to tie bacon avocados right here. Select your reporting time zone. And of course, select the currency you will be using. So it's going to be US dollars, euros, or any other currency. This is very important. So just select your time zone and select your currency. Alright, so I'm just going to click Next. Let's select our industry. So in my case, I can call it Games, toys, something like that. And I'm going to select business size, it's small. Let's click Next. So our business objectives or dry online sales rise. Brand awareness examined user behavior and of course get baseline reports. Now we can select, Drive online sales, raise brand awareness, and examine user behavior. Alright, let's click Create. Now, let's agree with terms of service. Let's click right here. Let's select accept. Let's choose Web. And here just type your website's URL and give the name to this property so the name can be the same as your websites title. Alright, let's select Create stream. Alright, so for now, we don't need to follow any instructions for Google Tag Manager. And later we're going to install that. Let's scroll down, let's see what else we have. Now, we can close this one right here, and this is our property. So now we can select this property. Alright, so just open the same window. Let's close it. And instead of doing that, Let's click Next. Alright, so data collection is spending, so it's going to take some time until Google Analytics starts collecting data. But usually you're going to see this information right away, unlike with Google Search Console. And right now it says it's pending because we haven't connected our Google Analytics account and we haven't added Google Tag Manager as well. So let's click continued to home. Alright, we can click right here save, and basically this is our property. So right here we're going to see various information about the traffic that is coming to our website. So previously when we set up Google Search Console, this tool is only meant for analyzing traffic that is coming from Google Search and that's it. But Google Analytics is for analyzing traffic that is coming from various sources, not just from Google Search. So that's the huge advantage of Google Analytics. So the next thing that we have to do now we have to create an account at Google manager. So let's go to the new tab and let's search for Google Tag Manager. Alright, let's click Enter This is what we want to use. So select this option. And once you're here, now, let's click Create Account and give a name to your account. So you can call this the same as your business. So in my case, it's, of course is gonna be baked on avocados. Select your country. And now let's scroll down and let's give a name to our container. We can call our container our domain name. Let's select Web right here, and let's click Create. Alright, let's click. Yes. Alright, so let's not installed Google Tag Manager. We're going to do this a bit later. And now from here we can start working with a tag manager. And the first thing that we're going to do with Tag Manager, we're going to set up Google Analytics tag so we can connect those two things together. So to do this, you want to go right here, tags. Let's select New. Let's click right here. And let's choose this option. Alright, we can give the title. So your title can be Analytics G A4. Alright, so we gave the title, and now we have to go back to our tag. And right here we will need to add our measurement ID. So the measurement ID will be in our Google Analytics account. So let's go back to our Google Analytics account. Let's go right here to admin. Let's choose Data Streams. Let's select this one right here, and we want to copy this measurement ID. So let's click right here to copy this ID. Now let's go back to Google Tag Manager. Let's paste this ID right here. And we are done with this part. Now, we need to activate triggering. So let's click right here triggering, and let's choose all pages. So we want to trigger this tag on every single page of our website. So let's select all pages. Let's click Save. Now we can click submit and let's click Publish. Alright, let's click continue. And just like that, we connected Google Analytics with Google Tag Manager and we published all the changes. Alright, let's close this one right here. Now, we will need to add Google Tag Manager to our website. We ain't going to need to add Google Analytics because Google Analytics is already connected together with Google Tag Manager. And the only thing that we need to add to our website is Google Tag Manager. Alright, let's go to our website and let's go to the dashboard. Now we're going to need to install one plugin. So let's go to plugin. So let's select, Add New. And right here, just type Google Tag Manager. This is the plugin we want to use. So let's click Install. Now, let's click Activate. And now we can go to settings right here. And let's select Google Tag Manager. And right here we're going to need to pace the idea of our Google Tag Manager. So let's go back to Google Tag Manager. Let's go back to workspace. And this is the idea you want to copy. So this is the idea. So let's select this ID and let's click Copy. Let's go back to our website and let's paste this idea right here. And just make sure that you don't have any spaces at the start of this ad and at the end of this idea. Because if you're going to have any spaces, it's not going to work and don't forget to select on. Alright, let's click Save Changes. Now let's go to integration tab. Let's choose WooCommerce, and let's select track enhanced e-commerce. Alright, let's scroll down and let's hit Save Changes. Alright, now we're going to need to configure our Google Tag Manager so we could send various eCommerce details like Add to Cart, purchase details, Product views, and so on. Right now it's just showing page views and it's not registering various eCommerce triggers. So to do that, I want you to save you some time and I have a file already, so you have to download a file where I have preconfigured variables so you won't need to over-complicate yourself with grading various variables. I get this might get too confusing, so I have done this for you. So you wouldn't need to confuse yourself too much. So you can go to my Facebook group and I have a pinned post where I have uploaded this file, uploaded this file to my Google Drive, and you can download this file from my Facebook group if you already in this group, or if you're not in that group, I highly recommend you to join this group, but if you don't want, Here's the link, shorten the link, and you can go to this URL right here. And this is where you will go to my Google Drive, just click Download and we're going to use this file right away. Once you have downloaded this file, you have to go right here in Admin tab. Let's select Import container, and let's choose container file. So I'm gonna go to my downloads folder, and this is the file I want to choose. Alright, let's click Open and let's choose existing workplace. And let's use our workplace that we just created. Let's select Merge, and let's click Confirm Alright, now if we're gonna go to Tags tab, as you can see, we have a new tag that we just uploaded. If we would go to triggers, we have eCommerce triggers, various triggers like Add to Cart, purchase, page view, entering details using coupon and so on. If I would go to variables, these are all the variables we have that will be used to track various conversions. Alright, let's go back to tags. Let's select our newly added tag. Let's click right here configurations. Let's select configuration tag, and let's choose the tag that we created previously when we were setting up our Google Tag Manager account. And let's click Save. Alright, before submitting our changes, we can click preview and we can check if this tag works. If everything works right here, you'll have to base URL of your website. So just paste this URL right here and you can click Connect. Alright, so we successfully connected to our website. Now we can select this product. Let's say, let's choose the style and let's choose the age. And let's see if our Google Tag Manager is registering everything. So let's go right here. Let's select this option here. As you can see, the Google Tag Manager is working. So let's select this option right here. And as you can see, it is registering various triggers. So we have viewed item from start, you item list, page view and so on. So if I would go back to my website and if I would click Add to Cart, it should register another trigger Add to Cart. So if I'm gonna go back right here, as you can see, areas registering everything. So Add to Cart was registered as well. So now we can close this one right here. As you see right here. Before we close, we can click Finish. Alright, let's close this one. Everything works. So let's go back to our Tag Manager. Now we can close this one and we can click Submit. Alright, let's click Publish. Let's click Continue. And now everything should work. So we can close this window right here. And basically we are done with our Google Tag Manager. So now you can go to your website and incognito mode. Just open your website incognito mode, and just go through your website, check some of the pages, check some of the products. And later we're going to go back to Google Analytics and we will check if it is registering all the data, if it is getting data from the Google Tag Manager. So I'm just going to open my website in the incognito mode. I'm going to click on some of the pages. I'm just going to check if everything works. I'm gonna go to the costumes category. I'm going to select this product. And as you can see, our online store, it looks quite good. And I'm just going to browse through my website. And once I'm done, I'm just going to close this one right here. And now I can go back to Analytics. I can close this one and I can go to my homepage of Google Analytics. And now it should register all the visits. Alright, As you can see, there's registering everything and it shows all the visits. So those were visits from website and as you can see, it is active. And once you're going to start getting more data, this is where you're going to see all information. You can choose if you want to check yesterday, today, 90 days, or any other periods of time right here, if you would go to reports, you will find various other more detailed reports. And once again, this one is up to you to explore. And if you have any questions, don't hesitate to join my Facebook group and just shoot me a message and that will help you right away. Like I said, this one is up to you to explore it usually the most important things for me. I want to check how many visitors I'm getting, where those visitors are coming from. So once I click right here, I can see that right here in this graph, I can see the revenue, the sales, where those sales are coming from, and all that information. Right now we don't have any data, but once you are going to gather more data, this is where you will be able to check everything. So Google Analytics is extremely useful tool. And if you want to grow your online store, this is a must-have. So that's all for this lesson. 61. (7.4) Let's Do a Keyword Research: Alright, in this lesson we're gonna do a quick keyword research to find out how well our keyword, but don't train toy is performing. And maybe we will find a better version of this keyword that we can use instead of this within train toy. And when you're doing a Keyword Research, it's completely up to you because of course you're going to have different products. You're going to have different blog posts and so on. But this is going to be a quick introduction. I'm just going to show you the tool I use myself and I highly recommend you to use it as well because it doesn't cost much. And before we jump in into exploring data tool, I just wanted to show you that open one of my competitors. So let's say I just found one eCommerce store that is selling toys and it has quite a lot of food and train toys. And this is the toy I want to investigate. This is the toy. I want to check using that tool and later, that's exactly what we're gonna do. But before we do that, first of all, we have to access this tool. A tool that I like to use is called Uber suggest. So just type in Google search, Ubersuggest, and this is how this tool is called. So let's hit Enter. And right here you'll find this Ubersuggest two. So let's select this tool right here. You will be able to create your account. If you're going to create your account, you're gonna get a free trial of seven days. So it's gonna be more than enough to do our basic keyword research to figure out what keywords are poplar, what keywords are good or what keywords are not good at all. So in this case, already have my account, so I'm just going to click right here sign-in, and I'm just going to sign into my account. Once you create your account and once you sign into your account, this is what you're going to see. You will have an opportunity to add your domain name and so on. So I'll already connected this domain name, but Google Analytics, and once you create your account, you will be able to do that as well. In my case, I'm not able to do this because I have already done this. Right here you will see an option to connect with Google Analytics. It's very simple. You just going to need to allow this tool to use your Google Analytics by signing in with your email address. So that's all basically going to need to do. Alright, so if I'm going to scroll down, this is the information I get. I can see my organic traffic. What's my organic traffic? What I'm getting, I can check this by devices, BI desktop devices, by mobile devices, tablets and so on. And right here I have some keywords that I added that I wanted to check how well I'm ranking. And as you can see, this is the amount of backlinks I have. This is my on-page SEO score. So on-page SEO, as you already know, is everything you do on your website. So that's what is in your power. So once you add your domain name, you're gonna get a score how well you're doing. And in my case, it's doing quite well. We have traffic estimations and so on. If I would click right here, rank tracking, this is where you will see how well your keywords are ranking. So here you will be able to add various keywords by clicking right here. And let's say in my case I want to track keyword, wouldn't train toy. And then we're going to base this keyword right here. And this tool will let me know what position this keyword is ranking. So those are the keywords I'm tracking. And this one is gonna be up to you because of course you're going to have different keywords for you to track and just explore this to yourself. I usually use only the first tab right here Dashboard just to quickly check how well my website is performing or do check rank tracking. And right here you can explore other tools. But most important tool in this lesson that we're going to explore is gonna be right here, keyword research. So if I'm going to select this one, as you can see, it expands and we have various tools. So if I'll click keyword overview, this is where I can check the keywords and as you can see, you can select your location, you can select your language. In this case, of course, I'm using English language and location is going to be united States. So right here I'm just going to type my keyword within train toy, and I'm going to click Search nine. As you can see here, I get various information. So as you can see right here, this is the search volume. On average, one to 900 people look for wooden toys every month. And United States, a quite popular keyword. And as you can see, SEO difficulty. So SEO difficulty goes 1-100 and right now it's 55, it's a bit above the average. It's gonna be a bit tough to rank for this keyword. As you can see, it even gives us some suggestions to rank in the top ten for this keyword. Usually websites have one-to-one backlinks and domain of worthy of six to five. That's very high, especially if you are just creating a fresh websites. So that means you will need to build some backlinks to build your domain authority and pay show for it as well. As you can see, we have some suggestions about paid difficulty. So pay difficulty, it's 100s, so that means it's very competitive keyword, if you're going to decide to run Google ads. And average cost-per-click is one-seventh. So that's how much it costs to run ads for one-click. It doesn't necessarily mean that this is how much it's going to cost. It's going to cost a bit less, sometimes a bit more, but that's just the average. And as you can see, the search volume here increases during November, December. So during the Christmas period, obviously, just going to be higher search volume. And if I'm going to scroll down, I have various keywords, suggestions, other suggestions, maybe I will find the keyword that is less competitive and that I can use instead of using that keyword that is quite competitive. So right here you will see all the suggested keywords Here you will see Content Ideas. And basically those are just the other websites that rank for this specific keyword. And you can see how much traffic they are getting per month and so on and how many backlinks they do have as well. Alright, so if I'm going to click right here, view all keyword suggestions. I will see all keywords suggestions and I can use filters. So let's say I'm looking for volume right here from 52,000 per month. So that means I'm looking from 52,000 monthly searches that keyword has. So that's exactly what I'm going to type 50 to 2000. Alright, now I'm going to click Apply. Now I can sort by the keyword difficulty. So I'm going to select this one. No, sorry, I have to select this one. I can select from the least competitive to the most competitive keyword. So as you can see right here, we have wooden toys for four year olds. And it's not as competitive keyword, but it doesn't make much sense because we are looking for Wooden Train keyword. Alright, so maybe this keyword would be good for Categories. Very, you have a category for four-year-olds or something like that or any different in your case, of course is gonna be different. But I'm just showing you this as an example. So as you can see, the least competitive keyword right here is within trained toy set. And as you know, it's long-tail keyword, it has four words and the volume is 480. Maybe it's not that much, but keyword difficulty is not as high as it was with the previous keyword. So we can select this keyword, then we can check how it looks. So as you can see, it increases during the Christmas period. Of course, that's just how it works. And it's up to you to explore this tool yourself and to decide what keywords you want to use. Pretty much that's how I do keyword research with this tool. I just go through the keywords. Once I select, let's say this keyword, I will go through other Keyword Ideas. I'm going to click right here. And as you can see, we have even more ideas. I can sort by keyword difficulty just a second. And this is how it looks. Of course it says zero because it's not a popular keyword. As you can see right here, we have a cool toy, wouldn't train set. There's a typo right here. Obviously, you're not going to rank for this type of keyword. But as you can see, this is how you can do a simple keyword research to figure out what keywords perform. If you have an idea how you want to name your product or what keyword you want to target. You can check and see if this keyword is popular. If people use this keyword to look for this type of product or not, this tool is very convenient. You can use this tool just like that as I showed you. And that's exactly how I use this tool. And I usually rank quite high in Google search results. And I focused on optimizing my content, my products, my blog posts. If I'm writing blog posts, of course, and in later lesson I will show you what I do to optimize the product. Alright, so this is how you do a regular assemble keyword research when you have an idea how you want to call your product. But if you don't know how to call your product, you can find your competitors. So in this case, this is my competitor. I'm going to copy this URL and I'm gonna go back to Ubersuggest tool. And I will go right here. And traffic estimation, if I'm going to click right here, traffic overview, I can check how many visits this URL is getting. So I'm going to paste this URL right here, and I'm going to click Search. Alright, as you can see, this product is getting around 500 monthly visits. It's ranking for 291 keywords for various different types of keywords. This page doesn't have a high for it, It's just went to free. It has only one backlinks and it's the ranking very high. And usually the reason why such page is ranking so high is because the domain itself is very powerful. It has high domain authority score and it has a lot of traffic and it just a trustworthy domain, a trustworthy website. If you're going to scroll down, we're going to see for what keywords this product is ranking and we're going to see how many visits those keywords are getting. So in this case, it has even a brand keyword, data train. And as you can see, the volume is not so high, but this is a brand keyword. It's very powerful, and that means this website is quite popular. So as you can see, it's ranking in the first place. For toys train its ranking in the third place. And as you can see, how many visits each place is getting. If I would click right here to check all the keywords for which this product is ranking. I can check everything. I can sort everything by the keyword difficulty. Once again, if I'm going to click right here just a second. As you can see, I can sort by the keyword difficulty. So as you can see, train with tractors, Maybe it's a good keyword if you have a similar product and as you can see, it has a high volume and it has a lower keyword difficulty. So basically that's how keyword research works. If you have an idea how you want to name your product, you just go through this tool to check if this keyword that you are planning to use is popular at all. If people use this keyword to look for products or not. If people do not use this keyword, you can try different versions. You can try various suggestions. If you don't find any suggestions, you can try spying on your competitors. And this way you can figure out what keywords would work for your product. And my case, I wouldn't train toy is going to work fine. Maybe I could rename this to wooden train tie set, but I'm just going to go but wouldn't try and tie and I'm just going to leave it just like that. But I just wanted to show you how the keyword research works so I can close all those vendors. And basically that's all for this lesson. Now we know how the simple keyword research works 62. (7.5) Let's Optimize Your Content: In this lesson, I'm going to show you mil formula that I use to optimize Ml products. So this is the Wooden toy train product, and obviously, the keyword I'm focusing on is Wooden train Ty info. It's quite competitive. I decided to use it just to show you as an example. If I'm going to click right here, dit product, let's make sure that we have all requirements in place. So the first thing when you are working on your product, when you are optimizing it, of course, you want to include your main keyword at the beginning of your title. So in my case, it's wooden train toy. And if I would decide to add something right here, Wooden train toy with a rope or something like that. This won't count as a keyward. My keyword is wooden train toy. So I can leave it just like that. I don't need to add anything else. But if you will need to add some more words to your product, just make sure that your keyword is at the beginning of the title. So this is in place. We have our keyword in the title. We also have our keyword in the URL of our product right here, which is very important as well. But I didn't talk about this in the beginning of the section because when you give the title to your product with a keyword, it usually adds that keyword to your URL because we did perma links adjustments when we were working with the settings of Wordpress. So we have our keyword in the title. We have our keyword in URL right here. So that's great. And right here, we have our keyword in description. Since this description is quite short, it's only 100 words. Also included this keyword two times in my description, but I usually recommend to write description of around 200 words, it works the best. And as you can see, included my main keyword in the beginning of my description. So in the first sentence, as you can see, it says introducing the wooden train toy. So we have this check. We have our keyword at the beginning of our description, and if you will keep reading this description, you will find that there's a place where we could include our keyword. So right here, this train. So instead of saying this train, we could say this won't train toy. I'm just going to type right here, this wood' train toy. As you can see right now, we have our main keyword in the description two times, and we have right here, and we have it at the beginning of our description, which is great. Like I mentioned you before, your description should be of around 200 words. So we are done with that part. And now we have to make sure that we have our keyword in the photo of our product. So this is our featured image, if I'm going to select this image. As you can see, I have the title of this image wooden train toy, and in texts, I included this wooden train toy as well. So that's what you want to do with your featured image as well. And that's very important. So don't forget to include your keyword in the title of your image and in the old text as well. If I would choose other image that is the part of our image gallery, as you can see, I included a bit different variation of this keyword, just wooden train. Don't want to be spammy, so this is the way I do things, and usually it works. And it's just wooden train. And actually this old text describes the image. That's actually the purpose of text. If your image fails to load, you will see a text, your customers, your visitors will see a text instead of image. That's the purpose of old text. So we have done this. We have included the other variation of the keyword in the product gallery images. If I would choose this image, as you can see, I included wooden train toy set. So I included a bit different variation. You could still say this is the keyword we are aiming to. It has wooden train toy, but instead of that, we included wooden train toy set. That's good. Right here, I just said at Wooden train Coach, just to describe this image, since I don't want to be too spammy with my keyword. Right here, I included wooden toy parts because once again, I don't want to be spammy, and here I did the same. So, we can close this one. So we have our keyward in image. We have some different variations in product gallery, which is great. Right here in Focus keyward, we can type our focus keyard to check how well we are doing with this product. I'm just going to type my keyward, wooden train toy, and I'm going to hit Enter. All right, as you can see, we got the yellow mark, and it's good. We are not getting better score because it's recommending us to write 600 words, but don't worry about that. It's just focusing on blog post. And when you're writing descriptions, product descriptions, 200 words more than enough. So that's good. Even though we got 67 out of 100, that's a really good score, and we should be fine with that. So basically, that's how I optimize my products. And as well in product tags, I include wooden toy, as you can see, I have wooden toy tag, and I have train. So I usually go with those variations because I know that I might have more products in the future, that's going to be wooden toys, and I might have some other toys, train toys, but those toys might not be wooden trains. So I include train as well as a separate tax. But you don't need to overfocus on tax. That's just the way I like to do, and it's up to you to explore those settings, those options. And now we can go up, and let's go through the things one more time. So don't forget to include your main keyword after you have done your keyward research in the title of your product. In the URL, it's going to be automatically included if you're going to include it in your title. And don't forget to include your keyword about two times in the description, and don't forget to include your keyword in the featured image and include your variations of this keyword and product image gallery. R here. As you can see, this is how it's going to look, and you won't going to need to do any changes to the snippet to the meta title or meta description, if you're going to do everything right right here. So we can click date If we can click view Product and basically that's all. That's how you optimize your products. Just keep in mind that you should aim at lower competitive keywords because your website is fresh, it doesn't have any back links or anything like that, and you want to aim at the keywords that have less competition. That's all for this lesson. 63. Section 7 Summary: And we are done with SEO section. So this section was like a completely separate course and the course. So now you know what is SEO, search engine optimization. You know how it works, you know how to do keyword research, how to optimize your content, your products, and how to use tools to understand the traffic that is coming to your website. That's very important if you want to create a successful online store, you have to understand how visitors use your website. What are the most popular pages, what keywords bring you the most traffic? And of course, SEO is extremely important if you want to get those free sales coming to your website and if you start getting free sales, organics sales, that means that if you're going to start running paid ads is going to work as well. If you're gonna get resales sales from the Google, trust me, once you're going to start running ads is going to work even better. But now you know how that works, you know how the whole optimization part works, how the on-page SEO works, you know about off-page SEO, and that's a solid foundation in SEO. So congratulations on that. Now, what is SEO, how that works? And this is going to help you to get those organic sales, the free sales to your website. Congratulations on that. 64. (8.0) Introduction to Blogging: All right, let's start talking about blogging on your ecommerce store. So I already kind of talked about this in other lessons, kind of told you that writing blog posts on your ecommerce store is a good practice. You might attract more visitors to your website, and you can expect more customers. Usually, a lot of ecommerce stores do that, do this as well. So, for example, if I would decide that I want to write blog posts with this Ecommerce store, that is in children Toys Nish, I could write such blog posts about gift ideas for, let's say four year olds or six year olds or something like that. Tesori teaching and all other similar type of block posts. And if you would do a keyword research, looking through these types of keywards, you would find that those keywards are quite popular. And to add a product with a title gift idea for a 4-year-old, just want work and to take advantage of this keyward of this popular keyward, let's say, you could write a block post. So to start writing blog posts, you will need to create your block page, and then you will need to create categories for your block post. So let's begin with creating our block page. So let's go to the dashboard. Let's go to all pages, or instead of going to all pages, let's click Add New. Let's give a title blog and let's click Publish. Let's click Publish one more time. Let's go back, and now we have to set this page to be our blog page. To do this, we have to go to settings. Let's select reading, and in post page section right here, let's choose blog. And let's hit save changes. All right, so we have our block page ready, and now we can check and see how it's going to look. So let's go to all pages. And as you can see, blog is now set to be as post page. So we can click view, and as you can see right here, we have some block posts. So here you'll find all the block posts. So as you can see, right now, we only have two block posts. Right here we have a sidebar. So this is how this side bar looks. It looks quite messy, so our next test will be to fix this side bar right here. I usually like to display the latest posts, the recent posts, and categories as well. But right now we don't have any categories created. So before we work on our side bar, we should create some categories for our block posts. So to do this, let's go back to the dashboard. And of course, this one is completely up to you, what type of categories you want to have. I usually have about five categories, but in this lesson, I'm just going to show you how to create two categories. And even though if you're going to have less categories, it doesn't really change anything. Because I usually like to use blog posts to provide useful, helpful information for my visitors, for readers. And this way I can build my trust, and this way I can also expect that I will get more customers later along the line, because my future customers will be familiar with my website. So that's how I use the blogs. Example, I have a E commerce store where I sell cat toys, cat products, products for cat lovers. And on this website and blog, I have quite a lot of categories with various tips, breeds, suggestions, entertaining content, and so on. So I usually like to provide my visitors with useful information from that they could benefit. All right. So that's how I use the blogs. Now, you kind of have an idea how you can use it as well. So before we leave, let's create our categories. So to create categories, we have to go to pose, and let's click categories. As you can see by default, we have one category that is called uncategorized, and we cannot delete this category, since it's created by default, it's just the way it works, we cannot delete this category because WordPress has to have at least one category, and it usually is uncategorized. Instead of looking ways how to delete this category, we can edit this right here. Let's click. Quick Edit, and I'm just going to give name and the slag the same. The sleg is going to be what we're going to see in the URL of this category. This one I'm going to call Montessori, and I'm going to click Update category. In Montessori category, I'm going to post various blog posts about Montessori teachings, methods, and maybe I'm going to post a list of ten toys, ten Montessori gift ideas or toys or something like that. And in this blog post, I'm going to include my products. I'm just going to showcase my products. So that's how you can take advantage of blogging as well. So the next category that I'm going to create is going to be called gift Ideas. All right. Let's click Add New category. And wonderful. Now we have two categories ready. And if we would go to all of our pages, just going to open in a new tab, and I'll just want to check my block page. I want to see how it looks. So as you can see now instead of having right here on categorized category, it has Montasori, this is going to be the default category. And right now, as I mentioned you before, we should take care of this side bar right here. So to fix this side bar, let's go right here, and let's go to appearance tab. Let's select widgets. And this side bar was created using widgets. All right, just a second. All right. So this is the side bar. As you can see how many widgets it has, and I'm going to delete this one. And actually, I'm going to delete all of these, except I'm going to leave this recent post, and I'm going to move categories above recent posts, and I feel like just like that, it should look good. So what I'm going to do right now, I'm going to delete all of those blocks here, and I'm just going to leave categories and recent posts. All right, I just finished removing the blocks that I'm not going to use, and this is how my sidebar is going to look now. Of course, you can test some other widgets right here. If you want, you can use any of those, drag them anywhere you want, and this one is up to you, but I usually like to keep everything simple. Now let's go to our block page, and let's refresh this page. And as you can see, it's quite simple looking sidebar. This is how it's going to look. If you don't want to have the sidebar, you can disable it if you would go right here and if you would select blog layout. As you remember in a lesson when we were talking about customization options. I told you that you can do various adjustments to layout, but first of all, you must have a blog. So Right here as you can see, I am in my blog customization options, and if I would go right here. In this section, I can change the layout. If I would go right here, single post, I can change the layout as well. This one is up to you if you want to do some changes, but I usually like to keep the way it is. I just wanted to show you that it is possible to do some changes. All right. So right now we have this block kind of ready. And the next thing that we have to do, we have to display this block somewhere, so our visitors, our customers could access our blog. So it's up to you where you want to include your block page, you can include right here in your footer, or you can include it right here in your menu. So in this case, let's include our block page in our menu, and we're going to create a drop down menu with categories. So to do this, we want to go to the dashboard, and we're going to practice for the last time working with menu. So let's go to appearance. Let's select menu, and right here, this is our main menu. So right now, let's choose just a second custom link. So our custom link is going to be our block page. So right here, we can type text. It's going to be blog. And here I'm just going to paste the URL of my blog page. All right. Now I can click add two menu. And I want this one to be the last, so that's exactly where it's supposed to be. And now we can expand categories, right. So we have view all And right here, we can see our categories, our all categories of our block. So we can select them both and we can click at two Menu. All right, so now I want to make this blog element a drop down menu. So I'm going to move this one to the right, and I'm going to move Montesori to the right as well. I can switch places, and let's click Save Menu. All right. We can go back. Now we can close this tab. And here we go. We have our blog in place. So if I would hover over blog, as you can see, I can choose any category I want. If I would click on the blog itself, I'm going to go to the blog page. And if I'm going to hover over blog, as you can see, I can select Montessori category. So this is the Montessori category. It kind of looks the same because we only have one category with two blog posts. If I would select gift ideas, we don't have any block posts. So this is how it looks right now. So just like that, you can create a block page for your website. So that's all for this lesson. 65. 8.1 Keyword Research and Content Optimization: This lesson we're going to talk about the keyword research and ways to optimize your block post to get the best results possible, especially if your website is fresh and understand when you have a fresh website, it's kind of difficult to get this organic traffic and when you're writing blog posts or adding products, should look for keywords that are not as competitive as others, and that have some search volume, some search, monthly volume, like 200, 100 or something like that. Right. So how to do keyword research for your block post. It's actually the same as doing research for your products. It's actually identical thing. So I'm going to go to Uber Suggest tool, and as you can see, this is the same tool we use to do a keyword research for our products. All right, so let's go to keyword research. We can start with keyword over you. So as you can see, I already typed one keyword, one keyword on that. I'm planning to write a block post, and the keyword is going to be Montessori Method. So I could write a block post Montessori method, dash, everything you need to know, or I could name it all about the Montessori method. But the best case scenario is to include your keyword at the beginning of the title, because right now we are talking about the optimization part. So if you can, if it's possible for you, the best case scenario is to include your main keyword, the phrase at the beginning of title. That's very important as well. But if you cannot do that, no worries don't sweat over that too much. You can include in the middle of the sentence, it's still going to work. But this is the best case scenario. All right. So now we can check how well this keyboard is performing. As you can see, we have an average search volume, 3,600 searches per month on average, and that's quite good. That's quite high. And SCO difficulty is quite high. 49 out of 100 is quite high, and right here, we have some information saying that in top ten position to rank, you should have this many backlinks. Your domino of 40 should be at least 55, but it doesn't necessarily mean that these are the real requirements. These are just predictions. Right. But as you can see, already from the SCO difficulty score, you can see that this keyword is quite difficult to rang. And if I'm going to write a blog post, it doesn't mean that I'm going to get a lot of traffic, because most likely, I'm not going to end up in a first page of Google search results. And to be there, I will need to build some backlinks to reach out other websites so I could post some guess posts. So it's a long process. But maybe we will be able to find a less competitive keyword. And if I'm going to scroll down, let's see what we have right here. So in keyword ideas, I'm just going to expand them all. As you can see, we have various other ideas. Right here, Montessori Method of teaching materials, right. This one is going to be quite difficult to work on because I don't even have any ideas, how I could pump out a blog post talking about this subject. So I'm just going to skip this one. All right. This one, Montessori Method parenting. Search volume is low, but it doesn't necessarily mean that only 70 people search every month for disinformation. Usually, the volume is much higher. These are just predictions. These are just the numbers, and it doesn't necessarily mean that if your search volume is low, you shouldn't focus on that keyboard because it has a low search volume. Now, if it has low difficulty, and it's not going to be so difficult to rank this keyward. You should also focus on these lower volume keyward. Because of course, your website is fresh or domain name is fresh. You don't have high domain authority. You want to focus on less competitive keywards, and usually those keywards have less volume. All right, Montessori Method parenting. Maybe I could write a blog post Montessori Method parenting, everything you need to know or everything you need to know about Montresori Method parenting. Maybe this could be a great topic, and maybe I can use this keyword. I'm going to select this keyword right here. And maybe I could write a block post on this subject. So now I know that it only gets around 70 monthly searches. It doesn't have a high difficulty, and most likely I could end up in the first page of Google Search. It's not much traffic, but it's something. And when you are new, you should start with less competitive keyboards. And as the time goes by, as you grow, as your domain authority grows, can aim at more competitive keywords. And as I showed you in one of the lessons where I showed you how to work with Google Search Console as you saw it yourself. In my situation, I'm kind of ranking in very high positions with a very competitive keywords that are extremely competitive. So it basically happened to me because my website is out there for quite a while now. I've been running this website for six years, and I already gathered some backlinks. My domain has a higher authority, and I can rank higher using more competitive keywords. So when you are fresh, when you're just starting out, you can pick less competitive keywords, and you can start working with it, because you still have to learn how to pump out content, that is not that competitive, but if you will manage to master this craft this art of pumping out content that is less competitive and you will rank high. That's a great start. That's a fantastic start to be honest. So this is going to be the keyword that I'm going to use, Montresoro Method parenting, and the title of my blog post is going to be everything you need to know about Montresoro Method parenting or something like that. And in this case, of course, it's kind of difficult to include this keyword at the beginning of the sentence. But once again, it's not a huge issue. I can include it basically anywhere I want. And in any case, this keyward isn't that competitive. All right. Let's see what else we have. What other competitors we have right here that are using this keyward? All right, as you can see here we have one block post that is raising baby using Montresor method parenting. All right, Maybe that's also a good block post idea. If I'm going to open this one in a new tab, let's see how it looks. Right. As you can see, this is how it looks. It's a book or something like that. But yeah, this is how it looks. You can also try to write a block post, similar block post to your competitors right here picking from content ideas. You can try various different ways to pump out contents. So this one is once again up to you. This is where you can get creative. And let's run this URL right here through our Uber suggest tool to check for what other keywords it is ranging. So if I'm going to go to traffic estimation, I'm going to select traffic overview, and I'm going to paste the CRL right here, and I'm going to click Search. We're going to check for what other keywords this page is ranking. All right. It's ranking for 15 keywords, and let's see what those keywords are. All right. Maybe right here, we're going to find some other keyword ideas that we can use for writing our content. Okay, right here as you can see Mommy and me Montessori. It's quite confusing. Let's not focus on this one. If I'm going to select to view all, let's see all the keywords. As you can see, this is the keyword, Montessori Newborn for infants. As you can see, right here, we have various different keyword ideas that we can also use to write content. Mom and Montessori Montresori sleep method, as you can see, we have quite a lot of other keyword ideas. So this is how I usually do a keyword research. I usually start with the broad phrase of the keyword right here in keyword research. I go through the suggestions, I go through the various other keywords. Then I check content ideas. Then if I find something interesting like this one right here, I copy the URL of this page of the block post, and I paste it right here in traffic estimation and traffic overview, and I check for what other keywords this page is ranking, and then maybe I'm going to find some other interesting keywords. So as you can see, this is how it works. You just go through the keywords. You try to select the keywords that are less competitive that have some volume, some search volume, and that you can rank for. And when you're optimizing your content, don't forget that you have to include your main keyword in the title of your blog post in the URL of your blog post. So if you're going to include your keyword in the title, it's going to be automatically included in the URL as well. Do you have to include it in method description two. But if you're going to include this main keyword in the first sentence of your blog post in the first couple of sentences at least, then it's going to be automatically included in method description. In any case, it's very important to include your keyword in the first couple of sentences? When you're writing your blog post, this is a part of optimizing your content. You have to include your keyword in the first couple of sentences of your blog post Then when you're writing your block post, let's say your block post is going to be of 800 words, something like that. Then you probably want to mention the keyword around eight time, something like that. After you have included your keyword eight times, the next thing that you have to do, you have to add featured image for your block post. Later, I'm going to show you how that's done. But once you add featured image, you want to also include your main keyword in the text and then the title of the image, just like we did when we were working with products, when you're going to add some other images in your block post as well, you can include some other variations of the keyword that is also relatable to your content. That's how it. So basically now you are a bit more familiar with the idea how to do keyword research when you are writing blog posts. 66. 8.2 Writing Blog Posts: This lesson, I'm going to show you how I add blog posts to my website. So if I would go to Google Docs, as you can see, I have my blog posts ready, and I usually like to use Google Docs for writing my blog post. Not in all cases, I write blog posts myself, sometimes buy from fiber from freelancers. And this is how I usually get those blog posts done in Google Docs, and it's just more convenient. So as you can see right here, I have my blog post ready. This is the title. And as you can see, I included my keyword at the beginning of the title. And this is how it looks. It has headings, and basically, my blog post is ready. So I can simply select my blog post right here, and I'm just going to copy it. All right, I'm just going to copy my blog post, and I'm going to go to my website. I will go to the dashboard, and in Post tab, I'm going to click Add New. All right. I'm going to delete this block because I don't need this block because I need a paragraph block instead of HTML block. Right here, I'm just going to paste my content. And as you can see, this is how it looks. All right. Now I need to add the title. The title is right here. Once again, I'm just going to copy my title. That's how I like to write my titles, and I'm going to paste it right here. As you can see, this is how it looks, and majority of words have upper cases, that's just how it works. And if you would go right here, you'll find various blocks that you can use in your blog post. Usually when I'm writing blog posts, only use images, paragraphs, headings, and the spaces, this one right here. Usually, those are more than enough, but if you want to explore other blocks, it's up to you to check them out, so don't hesitate to explore other blocks. Maybe you'll find something you would like to use as well. And besides that, I also use table of contents by rank math. Right. So the first things first, when I'm adding my blog post, I usually like to go right here to post instead of block. When I click right here post, I do changes to the whole post itself. So the things I do right here, I add my featured image. So my featured image is going to be this one. I already added some images. And like I mentioned you before, in the old text, I'm going to include my main keyword. So right here, I'm going to include my main keyword, and in the title, as well, I'm going to include the same keyword. All right. As you can see, I included my main keyboard in the old text and in the title as well, and I'm going to click Set featured image. Now I have featured image for this blog post. All right. So we are done with this part. Now we have to select our category. Just a second. And the category I'm going to select is going to be obviously Montessori. And in the text, I will include Montessori and Montresori Method. All right. As you can see this is how it looks, and as you remember tax, meant for describing your content in short keywords. So if you're going to have any similar content, maybe you're going to have a bit different pieces of content where you're going to talk about Montosur as well or Montosur method, you can include the same tags as well. So that's how the tag work. They don't do much help, but it's still something, so I usually like to include tag as well. Right. So if I'm going to scroll down, we don't need to change anything else. Everything looks great. And now the next thing I do, I usually include spaces. So the first space I'm going to include below the title, and to include a space, you have to click right here. Let's scroll down and just drag it and drop it anywhere you want. I usually like to use 30 pixels. Right here, I'm going to type 30. Now I can duplicate this one right here. I'm just going to duplicate it, and I'm going to add the same space right here. I'm going to duplicate one more time, and I'm going to add another space right here. Now I'm planning to Tad another image. Tad, another image. I can click right here, add block, and I can select image. If I would use search, I co type image, and this is the block I want to use and below the image, I usually like to include another space. So that's exactly what I'm going to do. I'm just going to duplicate the previous space, and now have two spaces in between the image, and now I'm going to select image from the media library. So I previously uploaded some images. This is the other image I'm planning to use, and as you can see, already included all text and the title. This time I decide to go with different keyboard and I don't want to make each image with the same text. So that's what your goal is. You don't want to look to spammy. All right. So I'm going to click Select. And this is how it's going to look. Right now, I'm going to scroll down, and once again, I'm going to duplicate this space. I'm going to move it down just like that right here. Here I'm planning to include another image. As you remember, to include an image, we can click right here. Let's select image. Let's duplicate our space. Let's move it down, and let's choose image from the media library. The other image I'm planning to use is this Right here, I included the same keyword as my main keyword because it will not cause any issues since I'm not using the same keyword in each image. I used my main keyword in two of the images. I used in the featured image and in this image as well. So I'm going to click select. All right. My image is ready, and once again, I'm going to duplicate this space, and I'm going to move it right here. And the next space that I'm going to duplicate is going to be here and I'm going to move it right here. And right here, I'm going to include another image. Once again, let's select this plus symbol, let's select image. Let's duplicate the space. Let's move it up down, and let's choose damage. This is the d image I'm planning to use. Now it has a bit different keyword, but it's still relative to my blog post. I'm going to click select, and now I'm going to duplicate the last one, and I'm going to move it right here in conclusion part. This is how it's going to look. All right. So now, like I said, you should interlink your block post. And since my website is fresh, I don't have many choices to interlink my block post. I can interlink Montessori Ward, right here, this one, and I can add the block post category, or I can add the category of my Toys. So I'm going to go to my website, Bacon avocados. I'm going to open Montessori Toys in a new tab, and I'm going to open blog. No, not a blog. I'm just going to go back. Going to hover over the block. I'm going to choose Montessori category. And now I have a block post category Montessori in place, and I have my product category Montesori. So I can include this URL, but I have to copy it. And now since I have copied this URL, I can go back to my block post, and I can select Montessori. All right. So right here, I'm going to choose this option. And in this place, I'm going to paste this URL that I previously copied and this is how it's going to look. So now this block post is interlinked. So that's great. And the other interlink that I can include is my block post category, that is Montessori. Since I'm planning to have more block posts in this category, I'm going to interlink this category with my block post. So I'm just going to look for the other Montessori anchor text that is right here, and I'm going to select this one. I'm going to paste this right here. L going to click Enter, and as you can see, this is how it looks. Now I can actually go to my SCO tool that is right here, and I can type my focus keyward. My focus keyward is going to be Montessori Method parenting. That's exactly what I'm going to type. I'm going to hit Enter. And as you can see, we got 69 out of 100. That's pretty good. As you can see, Yeah, we are getting good marks. Focus keyword not found in your method description. So if it's not found in method description, I actually included this keyword in the second sentence. So it's not catching on, but we can dit the snippet. And right here in the description, I can include my main keyword. So that's exactly what I'm going to do. All right, so I just included my main keyword in the method description. And this is outlooks. I usually recommend you to include your main keyword in the first sentence of your blog post or of your product because it's just going to work better. And right now, I just included this one in my method description using my SEO tool. But it doesn't necessarily mean that Google will pick up on this one, and Google might use just the first sentence. So that's the issue with Google. Like I said, it's quite picky sometimes. So we can keep it like that. It should work. And now we can close our SEO tool. And before we publish our blog post, we can click Preview. Let's click Preview, and let's check how it looks. All right. As you can see, this is how it looks, and it looks clean. It doesn't look messy or anything like that, like the way this blog posts look. And this is the blueprint I usually use when I'm posting blog posts. This is how most of my blog posts look, and it's easy to read. It's easy to understand, and that's what matters the most. After all, you are creating a website with the intention of offering the best user experience for your visitor. So I think this block post looks great, and if you like the way your block post looks, we can close this tab. We can actually close this one as well, and that 12. And now we can click Publish. Let's click Publish one more time. And let's click view Post. And once again, this is how it looks. If you don't like the layout of this block post, you can do some customization options right here, and this one is going to be up to you if you want to change anything, but this is how it's going to look right now. If I would click on the Montessori category, This is the posts we have, and this is how it looks. Those two other posts were added by default, you can delete them because we don't need them. And basically, that's how our blog looks. If I would click on our block page, as you can see, this is what we get. Those two posts that were added by default, we can delete them. But for now, I'm just going to leave it just like that. And I feel like everything looks good. So just like that, you can add your blog post, and when you're adding your blog post, don't forget to optimize your content with your main keyword. So you have to include your main keyword in the title of your blog post. That's going to be a meta title as well. And the meta description and the URL of your blog post. It's going to be done automatically, if you're going to include your main keyword in the title of your blog post. And you have to include your main keyword depending on the amount of words you're writing in the text of your blog post itself. Once that's done, you have to add your images, and when you're adding your images, don't forget to include your main keyword in the all text of some images in the title of images. And then in other images, just include other variations of your keyword. That are still relevant to your block post. And of course, don't forget to interlnk your blog post to other content of your website. So that's all for this lesson. Now you know how to add block post to your website. 67. 8.3 Tips for Generating Content Ideas: All right. So in this final lesson of the block section, I'm going to show you how I'll look for inspiration to write my blog post and the whole process itself. So the first place where I like to look for inspiration is, of course, Pinterest. So if you have a Pinterest account, you can go to your Pinterest account. If you don't have one yet, you can create one just right away. And right here once you are in the pinterest, you can use search and just look for the keyword. For the keyword you want to write a block post about or something like that. In my case, it's going to be Montessori. So that's exactly what I'm going to type right here. All right, so I type Montessori method. I feel like it's going to be closer to my block post idea, and it's just going to give me better results. So I'm gonna hit Enter. And as you can see, we get a lot of different content ideas. And as you can see, what is Montessori, what is Montresor and five easy ways to get started. Montessori, Newbies need to avoid mistakes and so on. So you can scroll down through all various different content ideas, and you can use Pinterest together various types of ideas. So that's what I usually like to use. Pinterest is usually my number one place to go if I'm looking for ideas to write my content. So this one is for you to explore. And yeah, I usually like to use Pinterest. It just works very And the second place that I like to use is AI tool, artificial intelligence. So as you can see right here, this is the Op AI tool. We already used it we were writing some pages for our website, like cookie policy and so on. But this tool is also great for generating ideas for writing outlines and for writing the content itself. So for example, in this right here message field, I'm going to type give me ten content ideas for Montessori Method. All right, so my input is going to look like that, and I'm just going to hit Enter. And this tool will give me ten content ideas. I usually like to use the tool, not just for generating ideas. Sometimes I even write some of the content pieces when I'm working on a blog post. So this tool helps a lot. Just imagine gyrus from Iron Man. And this artificial intelligence tool is very helpful. It just saves you a lot of time, when you are struggling with coming up with ideas and anything like that. So as you can see now we got ten ideas, and I can ask this tool to write me an outline for the number one. So that's exactly what I'm going to do. All right. So my input is going to look like this, write me an outline for number one, and I'm going to hit Enter. All right. And as you can see, this tool is generating me an outline for this blog post. And it makes sense. It looks great. And if you don't like the way it looks, you can regenerate this output, or you can work on this one yourself, if I'm going to scroll down. As you can see, we have quite a lot of points. But this is also another great tool to use if you are lacking of ideas to write content or anything like that. So I usually like to use this tool as well. Like I said before, usually, my number one place where I look for ideas is Pinterest. And the second best place I like to use is CGTP. So this is a great tool for generating various ideas. It even helps you to write blog posts. So this is it for this lesson. Now, it should be easier for you to gather ideas for what type of content you should write to your blogs, and it should be very helpful. Those two places pinterest and CGP, more than enough. So that's all for this lesson. 68. Section 8 Summary: All right, now you know how to Blogging works and how you can use it in your advantage. So I usually like to add blog posts to my online stores. This way I can attract more visitors. I can also grow my domain of words because with my blog posts I usually get back links, grow my domain of worded this way. And it just helps to the whole SEO part of my websites. So that's a huge thing if you can add blog posts to your website, and I highly recommend you to do that. You just want to start selling things left and right. If you can use should help your visitors, customers with valuable information. And that's how I usually like to do it myself. If I'm selling cat products, I usually like to have blog posts about cats, Cadbury's various health tips and so on. So this is a huge thing if you want to attract more visitors to your website. This way you can also collect emails if you're gonna do Email Marketing. And basically a lot of eCommerce stores, they use blogs to attract more visitors to their website. So congratulations. Now you know how that's done. 69. 9.0 Learn to Fully Translate Your Website: This lesson, I will show you how you can translate your website into any language. So basically you can create your eCommerce store in any language you can imagine. It's very convenient if you are building your online store in your native language for your native audience. And you're not just focusing on English-speaking audiences. The first things first, when we're translating our website, we have to go to our dashboard and let's go to the Settings. Let's choose general, Let's scroll down. And let's choose side language from the list right here. Choose your site language. In my case, I'm just going to choose lithuanian. Alright, once we have done this, let's scroll down and let's hit Save Changes. Alright, as you can see, some of the tools and our Dashboard that in different language right now. But not every single tool is indifferent because some of the Plugins, they still use the English version, but no worries about that. If you got used to the English version, you will not need to know how it's going to be translated in your language because those plug-ins are only inaction in the back-end of your website. So in the front end, you're going to have your website in any language you want, but we're not done yet. Absolutely not. There's quite a lot of steps we still have to take, but before we proceed, we can check our website. Let's see how it looks right now, alright, and as you can see, a lot of things right now, still in English language because we still have to change them. If I would go to my cart, as you can see, us still have the English language. Alright, so now we have to do some important changes and we have to translate our WooCommerce plug-in. To do this, we have to go to the settings right here. Let's scroll down. Let's see if we have any adjustments. So right here, if you will need, this is where you can change your currency if you haven't done this yet and you can change, do your region location. Using this information. If you will decide to activate taxes, using this information, taxes will be calculated automatically if you're going to enable them right here. Alright, let's go back and let's go to the advanced part right here. So here we're going to have various endpoints, checkout and points and Account endpoints. As you can see right here, we have checkout endpoints and they are in English, so you have to replace them in your language. And its order to pay or the received and so on. Just replace all this information to your language right here. Do the same at all this information or a year, just translate this text right here that you have in each window. So that's exactly what I'm going to do. Alright, so once you have replaced all the information right here, you can hit Save Changes. But before you do that, don't forget that you have to use a regular letters. Don't use any special letters that you have in your language. Just use simple, plain, simple letters. That's all you have to do. Alright, so once you have done this, Let's hit Save Changes and now we're done with endpoints. And when you were adding your shipping methods right here, you should change them as well as you remember, we had various different shipping methods in English language. And if you are creating your website for your native speaking audience, you have to replace those all shipping methods. So just click Edit, replace standard shipping with the Shipping type that you have in your language. And basically that's all you have to do. This one is going to be for you to change. So don't forget about that. Alright, so since we are done with this one, now we can go to our pages. And as you remember, all our pages where in English language. So we have to go right here. This is our Pages tab. Let's select all pages. And now you have to replace every single page, the page in your language. So to do this, you will have to click quick edit. In my case, this is how the Quick Edit sounds. So let's say this is a card page. So in my case, cart page is going to be called crepe shallots. So that's exactly what I'm going to type. Alright, once we have done this, you can click Update and you'll have to do with every single page that you previously named in English language. You will have to replace English language with your language. And you have to do with every single page by clicking quick edit and just translate the page into your language. That's exactly what I'm going to do myself. Alright, as you can see, I just finished replacing all the pages and now my pages have fully translate it. And when you are changing the names of your pages, just don't forget that in the title, you can use a special letters. But when you adding a slug that is going to be displayed in the URL of your page. You cannot add any special letters, so just use regular English letters and the slug in the title, you can use your letters. Alright, so we can click Update. And now we can go to our website and let's check if anything has changed. So if I would go to my cart page, as you can see in the URL right here instead of card, we have crept shells. So now this page is translated. The change is already in effect in the URLs. We still have to do some changes to the website itself, but now we're done with pages. Alright, so the next thing that we have to change, we have to update our categories. So as you remember, we had all categories in English. So if I would go to our Products tab right here, and I would select categories. As you can see, all our categories are in English. So now you have to replace those categories in your language. So to do this, once again, click Quick Edit right here. And in the title include your category name. You can use a special letters and the slug right here, don't use any special letters. And when you are separating words, you should separate them with dashes, just like that. So that's exactly what I'm gonna do. I'm just going to update all my categories. Alright, so I just updated all my Categories. And if I would click right here view, I'm just going to open this one in a new tab. As you can see, we have a completely different category and now our categories are listed in Lithuanian language. So the next thing that we have to do, we have to make sure that our main menu is functioning. If I would click on this menu item, as you can see, it's not working because it's using the URLs that we added when we were working with an English version of our website. So to change those URLs, we have to go to our dashboard. We have to go to the Appearance tab right here, and we have to select Menus. And right here, we have to change Menus. So to change those menus, we have to replace English version to our version of title. And in the URL, we have to add our newly updated product category URL. So previously used to be costumes, now it's costumer and it's completely different URL. So to change that, Let's go to all categories. And this is the one that I need to replace. So first of all, I have to know the URL of this category. So I'm just going to open this one in the new tab. This is the new URL. I'm just gonna copy this one right here. I will go back and I'm gonna paste it right here, the new updated URL. And instead of costumes, I'm going to replace to the other language. Alright, so now I'm going to need to do the same with every single category. So as you can see, I replace this one and I will do the same with this one if that one. And I'm gonna do the same with blog as well. So first of all, I'm going to add the blog page. So before I'm going to focus on Categories, I just wanted to show you How to Add blogs. So let's go to our pages. This is where we're going to find our blog page. So I'm just going to open this one in a new tab. And this is our blog page. So if I'm going to click View, now I know that this is how the new URL is called. So I'm just going to copy this URL. I'm going to go back. And this is the blog URL. This is the old URL. I'm going to replace with new one, and I'm going to change the title and to replace your blog categories is basically the same as replacing your product category. So as you remember, you have to go right here and pose you have dislike categories. Once again, I'm going to open this one in a new tab. As you can see, these are the English versions. So I'm going to click Quick Edit and I'm going to replace the title and I'm going to add the slug. So once again in the title you can include special letters, but in the slug, you shouldn't do that. Alright, so just renamed my blog categories and now I can use them. So for example, I'm going to take this newly updated category. I'm going to click View. And now we're know the new URL. This is the new URL, so I'm just gonna copy this URL right here. I'm going to go back to my menu editor and right here and gift ideas, I'm just going to replace this one by removing it. So once again, I'm going to expand it and I'm going to click Delete right here. And I'm going to do the same, this one. Alright? When I click Delete and before I add those newly updated Categories, I will need to refresh this page. So before I do that, I'm just going to update those Product Categories. So as you remember that a newly updated product category, you should go to your product categories that are right here. Now we can close this one. So these are our Product Categories. Already added this one. So I can add this one. I'm going to click View. And these were bath toys. I'm going to copy this URL right here. I'm going to go back to the menu. And this is the bath toys. So now I need to paste this URL and I will need to add newly translated title. So that's exactly what I'm going to do. And just like that, I'm going to update all the rest of the product categories. Alright, so just renamed all the Product Categories. Now I can click save menu, and now I will need to add blog categories. So since I refresh this page, I can go right here and to Categories. And I can select View all. And these are newly updated categories. These are blog post categories. So I'm going to click Add to Menu. And once again, I'm going to move them to the right. I'm going to add them into drop-down menu Zhao, a parent category blog. And we're going to click Save. And now we can close those right here, and we can click right here, view our website. Alright, now as you can see, our menu is another language and it's fully functioning. So this is how it's going to look. And basically that's all for this lesson. So now you know how to translate your WordPress website, how to update your pages, how to update your Product Categories, blog posts Categories, and how to update your main menu. In later lessons, we're going to take care of the rest things that I left for us to do. But for now we're done with a big portion of translating our website. 70. 9.1 Working With Loco Translate Plugin: This lesson we're going to use a plugin that is called Loco Translate to translate some of the strings or in other words, text that is created by the Plugins, let's say by WooCommerce plugin by Themes, by our Flatsome Theme. Or if you're using an Astra Theme, you will also be able to translate various text from these different types of themes, plugins or anything like that that you can see in the front end of your website, basically what you're visitors can see. So let's go to the dashboard right here. Let's go to Plugins and let's select Add Plugin. And now use Search to look for local translate. This is the plugin you want to install. Let's click Install. Let's click activate. Alright, so our Loco Translate Plugin is active. And as you can see, it is right here. And if he would go to the homepage, as you can see, we have various different options, but our goal is to start with Plugins. Let's select Plugins, and let's choose WooCommerce plug-in. Alright, so as you can see a, we have already fully translated our plugin into Lithuanian language. So usually it's such Plugin says WooCommerce. They are translated in a lot of languages and you don't need to translate anything else. So you can simply select your language right here. You can click Sync. And now a lot of things that were from the WooCommerce part will be translated to your language. If you didn't see you your language available, probably it should be available. I don't know. Unless you're language is extremely unpopular and uncommon, maybe you will not find your language added to WooCommerce. But if that happens, once again, join my Facebook group and I will help me with any of these questions. I will help you to translate your website, but I believe you shouldn't face any such issues because WooCommerce is very popular plugin and it's popular around the globe and it's translate it to a lot of languages. So now we can click Save. So basically we translate it WooCommerce parts automatically within a need to add anything, everything was translated automatically. So if you would click right here, breeze porch, all cash just in case to make sure that we have an updated version of our website. Alright, now we can check our homepage by clicking right here. I'm just going to open this one and the new tab. And let's see if anything is different right now. So as you can see, now, we have a completely different Header. So previously we translated our main menu, but now our header, the Search bar, is also translated. Instead of my account, now we have a cigarette that's fully translate it as well, corrupt shallows. So that's translated as well as you can see, those buttons are also translated. So if I'm going to click View card, as you can see, it's translated. A lot of parts are translated, but some of the texts is still in English and it doesn't look too good. And don't forget in shipping part right here, you are supposed to change your shipping methods into your language. I didn't do that. I just told you that you should do this yourself. So that's why we are seeing those English versions right here. But if you have replaced your shipping methods with your language, you shouldn't be seeing those methods in English, alright, so most of the text is translate it right here is you can see we have shopping carts. We should have a different version, checkout or your complete. So I'm going to show you how you can translate those right here. So usually texts that come with Theme here in those various sections and for those plug-ins are not responsible. So mainly when we are working with our website, when we are translating our website, the most important things that we have to take care of is we have to translate the WordPress itself. We already did this in the first lesson. We have to translate WooCommerce. We just did that. Now we have to take care of the rest of the texts. And usually the texts that hasn't translated yet comes from the Theme itself. So our theme right now is Flatsome. So we have to translate texts for Flatsome Theme. So I'm going to show you how that's done. And now we have to go back. And once again, let's go to Loco Translate. Now, let's select Themes. So now we have to translate Flatsome Theme. If you're using Astra Theme, you can translate Astra Theme, but in my case is gonna be Flatsome. Alright, let's scroll down and let's see if we have our language. No, we don't have my language right here. But as you can see, if you are speaking any of those languages, you want to make your website in any of those languages, you can simply select them and you can simply use them. But if you don't see your language right here, you can click right here, new language. Let's select WordPress language. So it's gonna be this one. We can keep it just like that and we can select start translating before we do and new translations. Let's click Sync. And now we can go back to our cart and as you can see, we have this text shopping cart. So all we have to do, we have to go back to our Plugin. And right here we can use filter and let's type shopping cart. Alright, as you can see, it gives us texts. So this is the text shopping card. Now we can select this text and we can translate to our language variety here in this window. So just type your version of shopping cart in your language. And now we translated shopping carts so we can click Save. And I'm gonna go back and I'm going to refresh this page. And as you can see, it translate it. So check out details. Let's go back and let's use search one more time and let's type check out details. Alright, let's select check out details. And right here we can translate this English version to our language. Alright, let's hit save and let's see if there were any changes. Alright, let's refresh our shopping cart. And as you can see, everything is in place, so we can do the same with order complete. Let's go back. Let's type order complete a lead, select this one, and we can translate it right here. Alright, let's hit Save Changes. And once again, let's refresh this page. And as you can see, everything is in place. If you're going to click right here, go to checkout. As you can see, basically everything is translated so we don't really need to change anything, alright, so everything is in place, you can go back. And if I'm going to scroll down right here, and if I'm going to hover over this product, as you can see, we have quick view right here. So we could do the same. We could go to our plugin right here and let's type quick view. Right here we have English version. Let's select this version. And right here we can translate it. Let's hit Save Changes. Let's refresh this page. And let's see, yeah, as you can see, we just translate it. Alright, so now we know how to translate various texts from the themes from the Plugins using Loco Translate Plugin. Of course, there are more texts that we can translate. It's gonna be for you to explore, is gonna be for you to translate all the texts. Because you just have to browse through your website and see if you find any English versions, variations. And then if you find any English variations, you have to go back to this plugin. Just type this tax right here and look for English version that you can translate simple as that. You will be able to translate any texts from any plugins, themes, and so on. But right here at our Homepage, you won't be able to do that because for this, we're going to have the last lesson where we're going to take care of the final things. And one of those Final things is going to be our homepage and our footer right here. So we cannot translate those things right here using this play in because we created those things using Page Builder. Alright, so now you know how to use Loco Translate Plugin and now you know how to translate various texts from the themes and plug-ins. That's all for this lesson 71. 9.2 Final Touches: This lesson we're going to take care of other notch Translate attacks that are on our website and we will translate them and we're going to start with our homepage. So as you remember, we created our homepage using UX Builder to do changes to this page, we have to go right here and select Edit with UX Builder. And it doesn't matter if you have created any other pages using this UX Builder and you created them in English language, you will have to edit them as well. Simply translate all the texts that you have right here, that you have, texts and banners and buttons and in category titles. And this text here, here. And anything that goes right here that is an English, just translate in your language. So that's exactly what I'm gonna do myself. And I will start by clicking right here. As you remember, I will open text editor. And I'm just going to replace this text right here. Alright, so I replace the text and I'm going to click, Okay, and now I can select this button right here, and I can translate this Shop Now button as well as you remember to this button we added the URL. So now the URL doesn't work and we have to replace it. So let's go to our website right here. And let's go to our pages. And let's select all pages. And just a second and let scroll down. And this is gonna be our shop page. So we can click View and we can copy this URL because it's a shop page that we previously had. And now we have to add a new URL right here. We're not just translated the text and this button we also added a new Europe. Now we can click Apply. And right here I'm gonna do the same with every single texts that is an English. Oh, there's you can see I just finished translating all the texts and now I'm going to click Apply. I'm gonna click Update. And now I can close our UX Builder. Now I can refresh this page and as you can see now, our homepage is translated except products are still in English because obviously you will need to translate your products as well, but you already know how to do that. You just simply how to edit the products. If you added products in English, just replace their titles and descriptions and don't forget to do the same as you would do with English version. Simple as that. I'm not going to translate products because obviously you're going to have different types of products and it's gonna be for you to translate them yourself. Alright, so we are done with our homepage. Now we can close this page right here, and now our footer is still an English. So before we do changes to the footer, we should do some configurations right here because we have absolute Footer in English as well as you remember, we created this part using UX Builder, but this part right here was created using configuration options. So we have to click right here, configure. And let's scroll down. And this is our absolute Footer. Let's select absolute Footer right here, and here in this window right here, you can replace, translate the information that is an English. So it says copyright. You can replace it to your language. Alright, so I just replace this text and now it's translate it. Now we can click publish right here. And the next thing that we have to do is we have to take care of our footer. So basically we're going to need to translate this Footer that we created using UX Builder UX blocks. So we should go to our dashboard. Let's go to UX blogs. Let's select UX blogs. And right here in Footer, we can click edit with UX Builder and simply replace the information. So right here we had text editor. I can open this one right here, and I can add translate it version of this text. Alright, so I replace this text, I can click, Okay? And as you remember these columns right here, we also added them with the text editor. So let's select this column right here. Let's click Open Text Editor. Let's replace this text above for customers. And now all these pages that we added previously inactive because we have changed the URLs of these links and now they are fully translate it. So now we can select those links and we can disable URLs that we previously added one-by-one just like that because we're not going to use them because those are inactive or URLs. So I'm going to show you an example, my account. So I'm going to translate my account and let's go to our website. Remember my account used to be right here. Now it's fully translate it. Now we can select this one right here. Let's go back. And now we can select this text here, and we can add URL. So we're going to paste this URL. We're going to click apply. And just like that, I'm going to replace my orders. I'm going to translate contexts and I'm going to Add new URLs. So if you will need to find the URL of a page that you translate it. As you remember, all pages can be found right here. And this is where you're going to find the page. So let's say I want to find the URL of page contexts just a second. This is the page So I'm going to click View, and this is the new URL. So I can simply copy this URL right here. Since I know this is my URL, I can close this tab. I can go back and I can translate contacts. I can add new URL to this text by clicking here, I'm going to paste the URL. And basically I'm going to do the same with each of these pages. I'm just going to translate them and I'm going to Add new URLs. Alright, there's, you can see, I'm done with this column. Now it can move on to this column right here. I'm going to open this in text editor. I'm going to translate information and I'm going to replace the URLs and texts right here, just like I did with this column right here. Alright, so I successfully translated all the pages. Now I can click, Okay, and let's move on to Newsletter. Someone's again, let's open a text editor. Let's translate the text right here. Alright, so successfully translated all the texts. Now I can click, Okay, and let's click Apply. Let's select Update. Now we can close UX Builder. Now let's go to our homepage. We can close this tab right here and let's scroll and see. Yeah, as you can see, we successfully replaced it for bayesian. But right here our subscription form is still in English. So we have to do adjustments to this subscription form as well. So as you remember, changes to the decryption form are done right here. Let's go to flu and forms. Let's select all forms. And this is our subscription for. So let's click Edit. And now we can change the fields right here. So if I'm going to select this field, I can do changes to this field so I can replace this information right here. Alright, now I can do changes to the button. If I'm going to select this button, I can change the text once again and we can click Save Form. And let's not forget to change the message because previously when we added our message it was an English. So right here, thank you for joining our club. You can translate it to your language. Alright, now we can click Save Settings. While we're here, we can go to our contact form because as you remember, we created our contact form and it was an English, but now we are translating it. So right here you will have to click Edit. And just like we did previously, select the field, replace the text right here, FirstName, LastName, and Email do the same. And just like that, you will change this contact form once you have done with those changes, don't forget, hit Save form just like that. And you will translate as well. So let's go to our website and let's see how it looks now. Alright, let's scroll down and what we have. Yeah, as you can see, it's fully translate it now. There's one other very important thing that we have to take care of. If I'm going to click on this category, as you can see in sidebar, it's still an English. So to do changes to decide, but we have to go right here to our dashboard. And as you remember, those are widgets. So we have to go right here, appearance. And let's select widgets. And right here and sidebar. Let's add category in your language. And right here, you can add the latest posts in your language. This one is gonna be for blog sidebar. So don't forget to take care of this 1.4 Shop sidebar. As you can see right here, we have titles in English. So right here we have to change Product Categories to the version of your native language. Let's hit Save Changes, and let's expand this one. And let's replace this one as well. Alright, let's hit Save Changes. Now, let's go back to our website. Let's go to the category, and as you can see, it's fully translate it. So now everything is fully translate it. But if I'm going to go to our account page, as you can see, it looks quite messy, doesn't have the same style as it used to have. It's because we changed the title of this page. And now we have to click right here, Edit this page. And now we can select template. Let's choose from the list, and let's choose my account. Alright, let's click Update, and let's click view our page. And as you can see, everything is fully translate it. So just like that, we translated our website to other language. So as you said yourself, you can easily translate your website to any language you want. And if you're going to have any questions, don't hesitate to ask. You can send me an email or you can join my Facebook group, and I'm always here to help you. So that's all for this lesson. Now you know how to translate your website 72. Section 9 Summary: Fantastic. Now you're not just know how to create a website for the English-speaking audiences or the global audience that has.com domain. But now how you can fully translate your website into any language you want. Of course now your website is not multi-language website. You just have a translated are fully translate it website to any language you want. So if you will decide that you want to create a website in your native language for your native audience, maybe you are not from the English-speaking country, then you will know how that's done and as great, because you won't need to look for any other alternatives, you will know how to do that with WordPress and WooCommerce. So as you saw it yourself, if you translate it the backend of our website, and then we translated the front end of our website for our customers. So if you will ever notice some untranslated texts and your website, don't forget you have to use Loco Translate to translate this text. Usually not translated things that can be found in WooCommerce plugin and in your theme as well. So if you're going to find something that is not translated, that is not fully translate it. Your first option is to try Your Theme, either Astra or Flatsome, and then you should check out WooCommerce. And later if you're going to decide to install some more plugins to add more various others functionality is your website. And if you're going to see that there's some untranslated texts, then you should check that plugin as well. So congratulations. Now you know how to Fully Translate Your Website